Home

Crimson 2 User Manual Modular Controller PDF

1. THE PUSH BUTTON ACTION THE PLAY TUNE ACTION THE USER DEFINED ACTION USING DEFAULT SETTINGS iat es ke MEER ER ORE REEL 171 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS 2 5 cere pee duce noe eoe 171 THE LINE PRIMITIVE 171 THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES THE TANK PRIMITIVES THE SIMPLE BAR PRIMITIVES si cerei cosa c f re ern en erede a da a adr ens THE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES THE SCATTER GRAPH PRIMITIVE esee nnne a nnne nnne nnne nne nnne nnne nne nnne nnn THE SCALE PRIMITIVES RRR THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE THE AUTO TAG PRIMITIVE s rore ben rv e er el rn nad rad da d ra C TEXT PRIMITIVES vivis coco eene te ra neon ae rd aa P i E aa P c P C PERDE EDITING THE UNDERLYING THE MULTI LINE TEXT PRIMITIVES THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE THE RICH BAR PRIMITIVES eer mena ennt rune ud ono n hPa BEER E a a RR ERE n Regu Ee ga ae Ec THE RICH SLIDER PRIMITIVES 35 65 1 rennen
2. 273 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS e te eee fie e RI n F 273 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE e e seen rene nnne n nuu uuu u nuu a nasa nau sa sauna aura aura ausus 275 HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES 5 nnne nenne nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn 275 ACTIVEALARMS cete x Pase RARE RR E Oen EH PA Fe bx EPI 276 COMMSERROR POE de Pee Eee pea E sea E o RE d Y Pee Ede 277 DISPBRIGHTNESS 5 i exeo reto rs Pose A dede rara YR 278 iecore deh telae aede celat ca ust Eee e De age unde v une ERR 279 DISPCOUNT 5 tese 280 DISP PDATES ia cc sa ecisiewescuet ou ra e worse eno Gite sta de Peu 281 155 ER ease 282 ae onte ice eem imm ete vetu Edere once qua Fre 283 9 teuer ie eo eene eco redes E EOS 284 cC EE 285 USEDST 5 ien oso te se bea HEAR RR CHR HER EYE Genau 286 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE 5n e nenne uu RR RARE RR RENE RR RRRSRRR RR RR nnmnnn 287 EXPRESSION OPERATORS eene sah aha so aa aan aaa adua
3. 350 GETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM nennen nnne nne nnne nnn nnns 351 GETREALTAG INDEX EE 352 ES oe coeno ced vuv i Od e en sie ERU 353 GET TAGEABEL INDEX ERR RN RE ERE Re ek Ste resa 354 GETUPDOWNDATA DATA eene nennen nennen nnn nenne nnn nene 355 GETUPDOWNSTEP DATA 356 55 Pm 357 Coeur lorc 358 HASACGESS RIGHTS i eee Cope e vena eva Ed CY 359 HIDEPOPUP iioc tte ia t E ERE RE e TERRENI 360 INTTOTEXT DATA RADIX 361 ISDEVICEONEINE DEVIGE c 139 dee vuv pau eter Tet ae 362 ISWRITEQUEUEEMPTY n nnne 363 LEFT STRING COUNT aaaea a 364 LEN STRING M E 365 LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE esee eene 366 LOG Q 7 1c 367 Kolenko 071273 rM 368 LOGSAVE sieve coe 369 370 MAKEINT CVAEUE 371 REVISION 6 PAGE XI TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER vient eee ase eee yet ce eek tee Eia
4. Pe 391 POWERCVALUE POWER sensu eee ER EE aint ie Rie tenis da ue E aUa tance 392 RAD2DEG THETA ettet exert iux Outta vue eee eu eo ie Me et rea ua 393 ripe Pic 394 READDATA DATA COUNT iiri exinde Ren eo aea eeu eoo Ea a e eu roS er eR 395 4218 814262 2 0 MEC DELE 396 READFILELINECAILE estes 397 RENAMEFILE HANDLE 2 1 2 nennen nennen nnn nennen nnne nnn nnns 398 399 SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE 400 SCALE DATA R RZ ET EZ sitse E re Pete en EE 401 SENDFILECRGPT FILE 5 esci tuer eae ERROR De Va CEN eden REUS VERRE ERR eek 402 SENDMAIL RCPT SUBJECT BODY nennen mener enne nenne 403 SET TAG VALUE uo esce x roe 404 SETINTTAG INDEX VALUE s ecu see ree aout lal dua Ane Yee o gu Pee eo Sud ER av even 405 SETLANGUAGE CODE 3 cte rea eva festive e dee vae Ya Cu v PU aUa 406 SETNETCONFIG PORT ADDR MASK GATE eee eee nennen nennen nnn nnn nn nnn nnns 407 SETNOW TIME Rene Pete ete ten Say ter erae ra E Ree Te Den E RR De Eee WU UN ey RR 408 SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE eese nmm nnne 409 SETREALTAG 7WDEX VALUE cei innen nar nera nen nno ein nne n nn o noe y reden 411 SGN VALUB
5. 6 eet eR ore Sewer 248 ACCESSING THE WEB nnne nennen nnne nnne nnne nnn nnne nnne nnn nnn 248 SING ETHERNET i E 249 USING MODEMS i iibri EU a DA ECRIRE LEERLO EUG E D EE Ee Pa Rat 249 WEBSERVER SAMPLES 5 4 52 80 660 Ret PU See ov Rte UNES dut 250 SECURITY BASICS tape MeL 255 OBJECT BASED SECURITY Cea Reo aeria ea 255 USER RIGHTS rene ACCESS CONTROL 2 DERE DEFAULT ACCESS ON DEMAND EOGON 5e esse osse sn res no ee reb neo Fo no oo Ene o ae eo so no oo MAINTENANCE ACCESS SECURITY SETTINGS te CREATING oo e thee hea ed 2 SPECIFYING ea Ge Cae coins ae 259 SPECIFYING PAGE SECURITY ED II 259 THE SECURITY MANAGER PRIMITIVE nnn nne nnn nnne nnne nnne nnns 259 DATA IARD 2c CONSTANTS AE O T O TETE A TAG COMMUNICATIONS REFERENCES SIMPLE DAN FER
6. Jove cars NM An unlimited number of address book entries can be added edited or deleted using the buttons in the right hand pane Each entry can refer to one or more email recipients from any of the transports enabled by the database Recipients for multiple transports can be included in the same entry The dialog used to define the properties of each recipient is shown below aPEdit Contact Details EN xj Properties Display Name 5erviceCrew E mail Address Fixed mikeg redlion net 17175551234 ce The Display Name property is used to define human readable name of address book entry This is the name that will be used for the display name of the SMTP recipients and choosing an address book entry within Crimson e The Email Address property is used to define one or more recipients for this address book entry Multiple recipients should be separated by semicolons The format of each recipient will depend on the transport that is expected to deliver the message In the example above the address book entry refers to one SMTP recipient and one SMS recipient The address can be mapped to a string tag so it could be changed from the display PAGE 82 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS WORKING WITH MODEMS This section explains how to configure your Master module to work either with modems or with direct serial conn
7. ALARM WILL ACTIVATE WHEN Not Equal to SP The tag does not equal its setpoint Off When SP On The tag does not respond to an ON setpoint On When SP Off The tag does not respond to an OFF setpoint Equal to SP The tag equals its setpoint The Event Name property is used to define the name that will be displayed in the alarm viewer or in the event log as appropriate Crimson will suggest a default name based upon the tag s label and the event mode that has been selected e The Trigger property is used to indicate whether the alarm should be edge or level triggered In the former case the alarm will trigger when the condition specified by the event mode first becomes true In the latter case the alarm will continue in the active state while the condition persists This property can also be used to indicate that this alarm should be used as an event only In this case the alarm will be edge triggered but will not result in an alarm condition Rather an event will be logged to the Master s internal memory REVISION 6 PAGE 113 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER e The Delay property is used to indicate how long the alarm condition must exist before the alarm will become active In the case of an edge triggered alarm or event this property also specifies the amount of time for which the alarm condition must no longer exist before subsequent reactivations will result in a further
8. MODULE CONFIGURATION CSDIO DiGITAL I O MODULE PROGRAMMING VARIABLES OUTPUTS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS Outputl 6 Output State 0 or 1 bit R W OutputCoill 8 Output Coil State 0 or 1 bit R W VARIABLES PRESETS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS CounterPreset 8 Counter Preset Value 0 65535 R W TimerPreset1 8 Timer Preset Value 0 6553 5 sec R W VARIABLES VALUES DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS CounterValuel 8 Current Counter Value 0 65535 R TimerValuel 8 Current Timer Value 0 6553 5 sec R VARIABLES CONTROL DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS LogicHalt Starts stops Logic Engine 0 or 1 bit R W REVISION 6 PAGE 63 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORT USAGE CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS The next step is to configure the communications ports of the Master module to indicate which protocols you want to use and which remote devices you want to access These operations are performed from the Communications window which is opened by selecting the first icon of the Crimson main screen As can be seen the Communications window lists the unit s available ports in the form of a tree structure Master modules have three primary serial ports with the option to add a further two ports in the form of an expansion card They also provide a single Ethernet port that is capable of running four communications protocols simultaneously SERIAL PoRT USAGE Whe
9. OvER CAPs NuM The modem has the following configuration options e The Connect Using property is used to select the physical device to be used to make the connection The devices supported at this time are direct serial connections to computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system generic landline modems which implement the Hayes command set and the Telit GM 862 GSM mode For dial in connections the Telit device must be configured in Circuit Switched Data mode e The Activity Timeout property is used to define how long a period must pass without the Master sending a packet over the PPP link in order for the PAGE 84 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS connection to be terminated For dial in connections it is assumed that the connecting device is friendly so no effort will be made to filter out optional packets that might result in the link staying active for long periods Note that even if you want a permanent connection you must enter a suitable timeout so as to allow the detection of dead links This implies that so called permanent connections may still drop on occasions but since the client will immediately reestablish the link this is not an issue e The Additional Init string is used with non direct links and provides a series of AT commands to be used to initialize the modem The initial AT prefix is not required Several commands may be combin
10. A single line comment may also be placed at the end of a line that contains code REVISION 6 PAGE 227 RETURNING VALUES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER RETURNING VALUES As mentioned above programs can return values Such programs can be invoked by other programs or by expressions anywhere in the database For example if you want to perform a particularly complex decode on a number of conditions relating to a motor and return a value to indicate the current state you could create a program that returns an integer like this if MotorRunning return 1 else if MotorTooHot return 2 if MotorTooCold return 3 return 0 You could then configure a multi state formula to invoke this program and use that tag s format tab to define the names of the various states The invocation would be performed by setting the tag s Value property to Name where Name is the name of the program in question The parentheses are used to indicate a function call and cannot be omitted HERE BE DRAGONS Note that you have to exercise a degree of caution when using programs to return values In particular you should avoid looping for long periods of time or performing actions that make no sense in the context in which the function will be invoked For example if the code fragment above called the GotoPage function to change the page the display would change every time the program was invoked
11. 11 while i lt 10 return t LOOP CONTROL Two additional statements can be used within loops The break statement can be used to terminate the loop early while the continue statement can be used to skip the balance of the loop body and begin another iteration without executing any further code To make any sense these statements must be used with i statements to make their execution conditional The example below shows a loop that terminates early if another program returns true for 0 i 10 i if LoopAbort break LoopBody NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Crimson supports local variables by means of C style declarations within the program body rather than via the local variable table Unlike Edict s local variables Crimson s variables are held on the stack and can thus be used if a PAGE 234 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS NOTES FOR EDICT USERS program is called recursively This also means that Crimson s local variables do not hold their values between program invocations e Crimson supports passing arguments into functions so there is no need to use global variables to improvise such functionality As with local variables arguments are stored on the stack and can thus be used recursively e Crimson does not support the Dispatch function The decision as to whether to run a program i
12. dy ed eo E 372 MEAN ELEMENT COUNT EMEN 373 STRING POS COUNT iios Ln e E aE 374 MIN A erse a a a 375 B C 376 edere ode omae ee ages que dep dpa adidas 377 NEWBATCH WAME i nere deese etat peres 378 55 2 ee e ep ex exo eae dee Ree 379 OPENFILE MAME MODE s ut eas se e ae RP EX RR ER XR 380 C 381 PEAYRI TT ECTUNE 382 POPDEV EFEMENT a kde Po gv 383 get ere ERE EF ee give exe ER ee ENTE 384 PORTGETCT SCPORT idisse esee desse erue ee node dre env terea OTT Te Ee ee En wanes 385 PORTINPUT PORT START END TIMEOUT LENGTH eese ener nnn nnns 386 PORTPRINT ZORT STRING pitri RF EH PER RESET OR UU ER HEP PN eT RE sae 387 PORTREAD ZORT PERIOD sirrettiin tista Eee a UR EPA stent 388 STATE a uns ERRARE DC 389 esie reed pee e Aora ve E rege sia 390 POSTKEY CODE
13. Da erae o ERE RE A E XN ER a E Rob A A 108 EDITING FLAG TAGS eo cec vet deb 108 THE DATA TAB VARIABLES 109 RHE DATA VAB FORMULAE 55 5 3 cds des ru n e cue neuere eoe eer er edu ede en ede eee ae 110 THE 5 P E EA Yee EY eaae tient 110 ae 112 THE COLORS TAB THE ALARMS TAB TRIGGERS TAB EDITING INTEGER TAGS sii sa dt ceste riva Verve ods THE DATA TAB VARIABLES THE DATA TAB FORMULAE THE DATA TAB ARRAYS s recti ee tice d eene dete Ente sues rece oe tuere yu ad n ITHEEORMAT 15 mann done dee te ee AE De Ee b bb ef al oe uen rca c I Dac E A A A E E E E 575 TETE E E TE EDITING MULETI TAGS EEEE EEEE AA THE DATA TAB VARIABLES THE DATA TAB FORMULAE THE DATA TAB ARRAYS TAB ete Rete A A ale LIT E THE COLORS TAB A d baa de re dh e a s THE ALARM TABS M THE TRIGGERS TAB faite s a a Dd aA e La ie aie s ee vetet EDITING EDITING STRING x aee TER Tek THE D
14. Datal Data2 Data3 0 0 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 359 HIDEPOPUP CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER HipEPoPuP ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Hides the popup that was previously shown using ShowPopup FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE HidePopup PAGE 360 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE INTTOTEXT DATA RADIX COUNT INTTOTEXT DATA RADIX COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data int The value to be processed radix int The number base to be used count int The number of digits to generate DESCRIPTION Returns the string obtained by formatting data in base radix generating count digits The value is assumed to be unsigned so if a signed value is required use Sgn to decide whether to prefix a negative sign and then use Abs to pass the absolute value to IntToText FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE PortPrint 1 IntToText Value 10 4 REVISION 6 PAGE 361 ISDEVICEONLINE DEVICE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ISDEVICEONLINE DEVICE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION device int Reports if device is online DESCRIPTION Reports if device is online or not As device is marked as offline if a repeated sequence of communications error ha
15. ocv eve eonun ETE ERA 309 DATECY M hs habe ice REY Eae aea 310 DECTOTEXT DA7A SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP eese 311 DEG2RAD THBE I4 ise decetero Eee ae ee cody XE TRE ERE e Ve voe EY eee Gui E YR EP E RR EE EE 312 DELETEDIRECTORY NAME 313 HE 314 DEVCTRL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA mener nnns 315 DISABLEDEVICECDEVICE euentu eve Er Nee a Ex an ee una 316 DISPOFR P PPM 317 pis ele EE e 318 DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION OR VALUE esee 319 EMPTYMRITEQUEUE DEV roo EUR ERE cue Drug ca eee 320 ENABLEDEVIGE DEVICE ur RAA tu aAa SEE TDEAK 321 eren ee 322 323 EXPTOCVAEUE CER YE ERE NY TRE 324 FILL ELEMENT COUNT iii eine te Gen Se near ce REP ERU NE Ree xe Exe 325 FINDSTRING CHAR ses x eoru urhe ee eoe sex ra ue evel mee veg acu vive 326 FINDFEIEEFIRST DIR iscei eee eeu te eek oe ye eet aed ae LEO Ox EE viva ted Y ERR Ta 327 2s m 328 FIND T GINDEX LABEL eR 329 53
16. AVAILABLE DATA SERIAL PORT USAGE 2 1 EE deer torso ree sop eeu de anode euet 65 SELECTING A PROTOCOL ses 6 xe sues DR OSEE 65 PROTOCOL OPTIONS 2 5 eire eek te Exe oce topo 66 WORKING WITH DEVICES 2 52 5 0 36 2 ies ete ea E 66 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION e eese nennen nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nnne nene nnne nene nnn nn nnn 67 IP PARAMETERS 67 RO 67 PHYSICAU AYER ico a o ORO PO eta t ER RE ORE HERR ONU Uns 67 REMOTE UPDATE 5 ncn rete 68 SELECTION xcii cities ren ede ente taret ete th opp ra n pp 68 gt RS MAPPING ITEMS TO A BLOCK ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL BITS READ WRITE VARIABLES a eos eost dco f e ho i es tec an tsi PROTOCOL CONVERSION eS MASTER AND SLAVE sca cicuta cass e t ere Ee Ll ER d dep HR Re EAE HERR RE 71 MASTER AND MASTER ic fecti teen tte d ree sete e EAR ARE RR HR 72 WAA WAV AROUND 2 72 DATA TRANSFORMATION wx 21 22 eoe e e Rege ea 72 PAGE II http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVANCE
17. GETNOWTIME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the time of day in terms of seconds FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t GetNowTime PAGE 350 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM GETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION port int Number of the port to be set param int Port parameter to be set DESCRIPTION Returns the value of a parameter on port The port number starts from the programming port with value 1 The table below shows the parameter number and associated return values PARAM NB DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE VALUES 1 Baud Rate The actual baud rate e g 115200 2 Data Bits 7 8 or 9 3 Stop Bits 1 or 2 4 Parity 0 none 1 odd or 2 even 5 Physical Mode 0 RS232 1 422 Master 2 422 Slave 3 485 FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Config GetPortConfig 2 4 In this example Config will take the value of the current parity setting on the RS232 communication port REVISION 6 PAGE 351 GETREALTAG INDEX CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETREALTAG INDEX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the real tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function F
18. Protocol 1 OPC TCP IP Master aa ENNEN m HM Protocol 2 TCP Port 790 b Device Address Space Mai Manager Filename U Desktop OPC Server cd2 Tli OPC server Time Manager Protocol Options B Sync Manager 3 Link Type Use Dedicated Socket z ICMP Ping Disabled 7 Connection Timeout 5000 ms Transaction Timeout 2500 Close When creating data tags the server tags will be accessible via the mapping button A client tag can be linked to one of the server s tags Once used in the database reading or writing this tag will access the server with the appropriate command and action with no further programming necessary If the server tag is related to a PLC changing the client tag will impact on the server which in turn will reflect the change in the PLC X Wari Glose Note The server tag list provided in the client database is updated every time the client Crimson database is opened Therefore if the server database is modified and new tags are created reopening the client database will update the server tag list and the newly created tags will be available for mapping in the client USING TIME MANAGEMENT Crimson contains facilities to allow you to synchronize the time and date within the CSMSTRSX to a variety of sources The time manager is also capable of maintai
19. View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help 5 gt 4 User Interface Paget x B Pag E Paget Position 064 056 355 296 Size 292 241 SMART ALIGNMENT If you have the Smart Align features of the View menu enabled Crimson will provide you with guidelines to help align a new primitive with existing primitives or with the center of the display In the example shown above the horizontal dotted line indicates that the center of the tank primitive is vertically aligned with the center of the display With a little practice this feature can make it very easy to align primitives as they are created without the need to go back and tweak your display pages to get the various figures into alignment In the example shown below a newly created ellipse is being aligned with two rectangles Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Insert Arange Transform Unk Heb lt 2 2 47 Postion 328 064 480 160 Size 153 097 CAPS INU Guidelines are present at both the edges of the figures and at the center showing that both the edges and the centers are aligned The red rectangle is highlighting the newly created primitive while the blue rectangles are highlighting the primitives to which the guidelines have been drawn Smart Align is also enabled when primitives are moved or re siz
20. 4 nennen nnns nnn nnn inne sanis 218 DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS 1 nnn nina sani nna sans na 219 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM nennen nennen nennen nnns nnn nnn nnn nnn 219 SELECTING LANGUAGES arae aa Eua god 221 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE eee enne nennen nnn nnne nant anh ne hat dina sais nnn a ao sad enn a aa 222 SIMULATING LANGUAGES IN 5 nnne nennen nenne nnnm nnn nn nnn nna 222 DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR eeeee eee nennen nnn nnn ener nha dian nsa d uasa saa sah a aaa ennan 223 BLOCKING DEFAULT ACTIONS eee esee nennen nnn nennen nnns nnn nnn nasa nnne 223 DATAJNUATLABILEDE 224 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS accitis ve E Eua rer 224 CONFIGURING 5 225 USING THE PROGRAM LIST 225 EDITING PROGRAMS eT 225 PROGRAM PROPERTIES 555 de end ode dy Re eed 225 ADDING 5 eene nennen 227 RETUR
21. Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Ei R5232 485 Option Card j R5 232 Comms Port RS 465 Comms Port Addresses SMS swrP General OVER CAPS NUM The Transport Mode property is used to enable or disable the transport Note that the mail manager must be enabled via the General tab before the SMS transport can be enabled Note also that either SMTP or SMS must be enabled if the mail manager is to be able to deliver messages The Message Relay property is used to enable or disable the Master s SMS relay feature If this feature is enabled a user who receives an SMS message that has been sent to several recipients can reply to that message and have the Master relay the message to the other recipients This provides a simple conferencing facility between message recipients REVISION 6 PAGE 81 USING ELECTRONIC MAIL CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Note that for the SMS transport to operate a GSM modem must have been installed on one of the unit s serial ports Refer to later sections of this chapter for details on how to configure such a modem and how multiple modems will interact THE ADDRESS BOOK The Addresses tab is used to define email recipients File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help 2 m c O Programming Port lt Q R5 232 Comms Port 85 485 Comms Port Addresses sms General
22. REVISION 6 PAGE 439 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ETHERNET COMMUNICATION This section is used to troubleshoot the communication between two devices linked via Ethernet TIP For communication troubleshooting it is strongly advised to create a new Crimson database including only one data tag mapped to a known register in the target device PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Values show Incorrect target device IP address Incorrect cable or wrong connection Crimson and target devices are in a different address domain If no routers are present on the network If a router is present the network Incorrect tag mapping Check the target device IP address in Crimson in communications on the PLC symbol to match the target device IP address setup Check the LED on the Crimson device Ethernet port If none are lit there are no connections Check the cable or that the Ethernet port is enabled in Crimson see below Check that the Ethernet port in Crimson is enabled Check that the target device IP address and Crimson device IP address are different but in the same domain For example both start with the same three first numbers ex 192 168 2 xxx if the mask is 255 255 255 0 Check the Crimson device Ethernet port gateway address to match the router IP address Check that the tag is mapped to an
23. The device is busy working on a program The program takes too much time to run Either run it in the background or reduce the workload If it times out the program was stuck in a loop Display shows TIMEOUT Program was unable to run due to unavailable data Make sure that all the tags in the program exist in the target device REVISION 6 PAGE 441 WEB SERVER CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WEB SERVER PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTIONS Internet Browser says Web Server not enabled Check that the Web Server in Crimson Cannot display the is enabled web page Ethernet port disabled or Ethernet settings issue Incorrect PC IP Address Check that the Ethernet port in Crimson is enabled and has a correct IP address See Ethernet Communication troubleshooting Check that the IP address in the browser matches Crimson s Ethernet IP address Check the PC Ethernet Settings for a valid IP address Re Order from Omegamation 888 55 6 888 55 OME omegamation com PAGE 442 http www redlion net controller
24. The example below shows an i statement with a single action if TankFull StartPump 1 The example below shows an i statement with two actions if TankEmpty 1 StartPump OpenValue The example below shows an i statement with an else clause if MotorHot StartFan else StartFan 1 0 Note that it is very important to remember to place the curly brackets actions to be executed in the if or else portion of the statement If you omit the brackets around groups of PAGE 230 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS Crimson will most likely misunderstand exactly which actions you want to be dependent upon the i condition Although line breaks are recommend between actions they are not used to figure out what is and 1s not included within the conditional statement SWITCH STATEMENTS A switch statement is used to compare an integer value against a number of possible constants and to perform an action based upon which value is matched The exact syntax supports a number of options beyond those shown in the example below but for the vast majority of applications this simple form will be acceptable The architecture of the switch statement is as follow switch int var case 1 actionl break case 2 action2 default action3 break This example below will start a motor selected
25. an output of 1 To add more inputs to the symbol double click it and enter a new number The nverter simply reverses the state of the input REVISION 6 PAGE 61 CSDIO DIGITAL I O MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 24 9 The Timer symbol provides run input as well as reset input When the run T input is true the timer increases towards setpoint for up timers and towards zero for down timers When the run input is false the timer stops incrementing Once the setpoint or zero is reached the output becomes true An active reset input causes the timer to reset to zero or preset depending on the type of timer To access the timer s preset value double click the timer symbol When using timers you must assign each timer a unique Map ID number 1 8 When mapping both the actual timer value and the timer preset value via communications the Map ID number will correspond to the variable numbers See Available Data table at the end of this section for more information The Counter symbol provides a count input as well as a reset input The counter increments towards preset up counter or decrements towards zero down counter every time the count input becomes active Once the setpoint or zero is reached the output becomes true active reset input causes the counter to reset to zero or preset depending on the type of
26. e The On Off Hysteresis property is used to eliminate output chatter by separating the on and off points of the output s when performing on off control The hysteresis value is centered around the setpoint that is the transition points of the output will be offset above and below the setpoint by half of the On Off Hysteresis value This value effects outputs programmed for Reverse or Direct During auto tune the controller cycles the process through 4 on off cycles so it is important to set the On Off Hysteresis to an appropriate value before initializing auto tune e The On Off Deadband property provides a means of offsetting the on points of reverse and direct outputs programmed for on off operation This results in a deadband if the value is positive and overlap if the value is negative When determining the actual transition points of the outputs the On Off Hysteresis value must also be taken into consideration AUTO TUNE SETTINGS e Tune Response property is used to ensure that an auto tune yields the optimal P I and D values for varying applications A setting of Very Aggressive results in a PID set that will reach setpoint as fast as possible with no concern for overshoot while a setting of Very Conservative sacrifices speed in order to prevent overshoot Note If the Tune Response property is changed auto tune needs to be reinitiated for the changes to affect the PID settings See the Auto Tuning Section for more in
27. r Get From Tag Data Format r Line Format Line Style Line Color Fixed Owie sg Pick m Fill Format Fil Style E soid Coor 2 Fill Color 1 v Fixed Fick Fill Color 2 Fixed Pie Set As Defaults The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual HMI facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The Type property is used to indicate the type of slider to be displayed The three types of sliders allow data entry via buttons via direct manipulation or via both methods You should note that direct manipulation can be somewhat risky in that accidental touches may result in large changes to process values The Get From Tag property is used to indicate whether the data format should be obtained from the controlling value or from the Format page Note that most of the format values
28. Base Directory 7 Fixed Sync Period 1 hours Sync Delay 0 minutes EET The Log synchronization becomes available and the following settings can be entered The Base Directory defines the directory on the server where the log files will be synchronized This directory is relative to the folder settings given in the FTP server For example if the FTP server is programmed to save any FTP connection under C inetpub ftproot and the Base Directory in Crimson 2 0 is MyFolder then all log files will be saved under C inetpub ftproot MyFolder The G3 will duplicate the folder tree present on the CompactFlash card in the Base Directory so data remains in the same order e The Sync Period is the frequency at which the terminal will synchronize file transfers e The Sync Delay is the offset in minutes past the hour between file transfers Use this property to allow multiple terminals file transfers to be offset to avoid collisions ADVANCED FTP EXCHANGE FUNCTIONS Please refer to Appendix A later in this manual for details on the FtpPutFile and FtpGetFile functions The second function is useful when you plan to load a file from the server to the CompactFlash card Automatic logging only transfers from the CompactFlash card to the server CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER Crimson s FTP Server provides a mean to exchange files between a Modular Controller Master and an FTP client application CSMSTRSX an
29. a creare AE a EREE 330 PAGE X http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS FTPGETFILE SERVER LOG REM DELETE eese eene nnne nnne nennen nnnm nnn nnn nnns 331 FTPPUTFILE SERVER LOG REM DELETE eese eene nnne nnne nnne nnn n nnn nnn 332 GETAEARM l AG JNDEX c E Re EUR A 333 GET BATCH O E 334 GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM esses nennen nnne nnn 335 GETDATE 7172 AND FAMILY Ca eet ede Co 336 GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE aae a a nnn nenne nnne 337 GETDISKFREEPERCENT DRIVE cesses mene nnn nennen nennen 338 GETDISKSIZEBYTES DRIVE eee iode e e EX ERE P Ae Ea UE ERE Ee EUR 339 GETFORMATTED TAG INDEX eeu nue parue eura eura 340 GETINTERFACESTATUS 7 00 mener nnn nnn 341 GETINTTAGCINDEX 5 a 342 ejas cr 343 GETNETGATE PORT 344 GETNETID AZORT 345 346 GETNETMASK PORT a ea is He AS 347 GETNOW ce cines tUe a ente per cas angus REED 348 GETNOWDATE 5 5 63 nS peter i esi dane Adee 349 GETNOWTIMEL i
30. If you are using USB you might also want to ensure that the Master s USB drivers have been correctly installed To do this connect the Master module and if the drivers have not previously been installed follow the instructions at the start of this manual Then open the Device Manager for your operating system and expand the USB icon to show the icon for the Master module device Ensure that this icon does not display a warning symbol If it does remove the device unplug and reconnect the Master module and verify that you have correctly followed the driver installation procedure The illustrations below show typical Device Manager views with the CompactFlash dismounted and mounted respectively 5 x Computer Management ziBixi Aton e gt m gt OO Gl ELE Tree Tree 5 computer Management Loca E coroar 0 o 8 Bom T Display adapters amp DVD CD ROM drives Ever 8 i System Information 8 Performance Logs and Alerts Folders m Device Manager amp MG Local Users and Groups Storage C Disk Management Disk Defragmenter tM System Information 8 Performance Logs and Alerts 65 Shared Folders Device Manager Local Users and Groupe rage 29 9 Services and Applications SanDisk ImageMate CF MS USB Root Hub USB Composite Device USB Root Hub USB Ma
31. Next another block is created to move data from the PLC to the Modular Controller This is done by changing the block s Direction property to Device to MC In the example below Modulel s offset values are mapped to registers 11 0 through 11 7 The Direction property indicates that the MC will get the value from the PLC registers and write them into the module s offset values E Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help 2 m p Block Settings O Programming Port 40 5 232 Comms Port DF Master Start Address No11 0000 Sm Pci Block 1 X 011 0000 gt Module Input Linear Offset X NO11 0001 Module Input Linearoffset2 X 011 0002 Module Input LinearOffset3 X N011 0003 Module Input LinearOffset X NO11 0004 Module Input LinearOffsetS X N011 0005 Modulel Input LinearOffset6 X N011 0006 Module Input LinearOffset7 N011 0007 Modulet Input Linear Offsets X 011 0008 Import From Crimson 1 0 Database X 011 0009 X Noi 0010 X 011 0011 X 011 0012 X 011 0013 X 011 0014 X 011 0015 d 85 485 Comms Port Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 72 Protocol 3 Protocol 4 Services Mail Manager Ti oec server Time Manager OVER CAPS NUM DOWNLOADING To download to the Master via serial is trivial Simply make sure you ve selected t
32. RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Value GetCameraData 4 0 1 Returns parameter 1 on camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 335 GETDATE TIME AND FAMILY CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETDATE 77 AND FAMILY ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION time int The time value to be decoded DESCRIPTION Each member of this family of functions returns some component of a time date value as previously created by GetNow Time or Date The available functions are as follows FUNCTION DESCRIPTION GetDate Returns the day of month portion of time GetDay Returns the day of week portion of time GetDays Returns the number of days in time GetHour Returns the hours portion of time GetMin Returns the minutes portion of time GetMonth Returns the month portion of time GetSec Returns the seconds portion of time GetWeek Returns the week of year portion of time GetWeeks Returns the number of weeks in time GetWeekYear Returns the week year when using week numbers GetYear Returns the year portion of time Note that GetDays and GetWeeks are typically used with the difference between two time values to calculate how long has elapsed in terms of days or weeks Note also that the year returned by GetWeekYear is not always the same as that returned by GetYear as the former may return a smaller value if the last week
33. Set As Defaults e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property is used to define the data to be written In the example above the primitive will set the MotorSpeed tag to 100 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to increase or decrease a data item The options are shown below corRectangle Properties Format Action Action Mode Operation Action Details Write To Tag MotorSpeed 00 Pick v General Limit w General E Ramp Mode increase T Action Control Enable General re Im Remote v Cancel Set As Defaults e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property is used to define the step by which to raise or lower the item e The Limit property is used to define the minimum or maximum data value e The Ramp Mode property is used to define whether to raise or lower the item REVISION 6 PAGE 169 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER In the example above holding the primitive will raise MotorSpeed by 1 until it reaches 100 THE PLAY TUNE ACTION This action plays a selected tune using the Master s internal sounder xi Format Action Action Mode Operation Payme H m Action Details Tune Name InaGaddaDavida v None BadMoo
34. TAN THETA TAN 7 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION theta float The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the tangent of the angle theta FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE yp xp tan theta REVISION 6 PAGE 423 TESTACCESS RIGHTS PROMPT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER TESTACCESS RIGHTS PROMPT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION rights int The required access rights prompt cstring The prompt to be used in the log on popup DESCRIPTION Returns a value of true or false depending on whether the current user has access rights defined by the rights parameter This parameter comprises a bit mask representing the various user defined rights with bit 0 ie the bit with a value of 0x01 representing User Right 1 bit 1 ie the bit with a value of 0x02 representing User Right 2 and so on If no user is currently logged on the system will display a popup to ask for user credentials using the prompt argument to indicate why the popup is being displayed The function is typically used in programs that perform a number of actions that might be subject to security and that might otherwise be interrupted by a log on popup By executing this function before the actions are performed you can provide a better indication to the user as to why a log on is required and you can avoid a security failure part way through a se
35. dora ter ee Y ee av a ES eve a Pn ao ar o n YS THE ALARM VIEWER PRIMITIVE i pu THE FILE VIEWER PRIMITIVE THE REMOTE DISPLAY PRIMITIVE THE CAMERA PRIMITIVE 5 E TRENDING PRIMITIVES 5 deed RAINER GENERAL BUTTON PRIMITIVE A mmmmRmRE A BUTTON PRIMITIVE eeaeee ann eoe ai Ern aaeeea a aaaea RR erar Da y EAEan PAGE VI http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS THE PICTURE PRIMITIVE 209 THE PRIMITIVE 3 C ER DRE RIXA Ra A ORA 213 THE DIAL GAUGE PRIMITIVES 214 SYSTEM PRIMITIVES a a A ae EE 216 THE TOUCH TEST PRIMITIVE c eerie ee eiie ERE EN EP E b n enne 217 THE TOUCH CALIBRATION PRIMITIVE 55 RANK RARO EERCRVRERERT ER censis clas 217 DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES
36. m coe Value property is used to specify the value to be displayed In the example given above the primitive is configured to display the level of a tank Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the range of values to be shown In the example above a range of 0 to 1000 is specified The Show Border property is used to display or hide the primitive s border THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE The Fixed Text primitive is used to add unchanging text to a page The text is displayed in a specified font and color and with a specified justification The text can also be translated for international applications When the text is created a cursor will appear allowing the text to be entered eUntitled File Crimson 2 0 View Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help 7 a 4 User Interface Pagel over fenes vow PAGE 140 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS Only the US English text can be edited directly The international versions of the text must be edited via the properties dialog box which is accessed by selecting the primitive and pressing Alt Enter or by selecting the Properties command from Edit menu cer Display Element Properties Contents 1 Translate Text Format Font Swi
37. CRIMSON 2 UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Re Order from Omegamation 1 888 55 653 888 55 omegamation com red lpn Copyright O 2003 2006 Red Lion Controls Rights Reserved Worldwide The information contained herein is provided in good faith but is subject to change without notice It is supplied with no warranty whatsoever and does not represent a commitment on the part of Red Lion Controls Companies names and data used as examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise stated No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical without the express written permission of Red Lion Controls All trademarks are acknowledged as the property of their respective owners Written by Mike Granby and Jesse Benefiel GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM 52500 av rr e ne re cate eee e aV Dea 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE e erem n ri e ar is 1 CHECKING FOR UPDATES or Eva eve YN ER aV E i i v RO vans YR Y 1 INSTALLING THE USB nennen nennen nnne nn nennen nnn ne 2 QUICK START uPRE M 3 OVERVIEW Senne ule river ert derivative ede 3 MODULES ee ea REELE EAE veh dea da Uitte Sara a 3 GOMMUNICATIONS c v
38. Color 2 v Fixed z Pick Line Format Line Color Fixed C white x Pick Set As Defaults The Text Format properties are used to define the font to be used to display the optional data value and data label and the colors to be used for the text In addition a property is provided to define whether the font should be opaque or whether the pointer should be visible through the text e Fill Format properties are used to define the background color of the dial and the color to be used to draw the interior of the pointer and the scale tick marks Fill Color 1 defines the background Fill Color 2 the other items e The Line Format property is used to define the color of the lines used to demark the pointer the scale tick marks and the outline of the dial gauge itself The third page is used to define the optional label and the minimum and maximum values and the data format for the optional data value This page functions as was previously described for integer data tags and you are referred to that section for further details SYSTEM PRIMITIVES The sections below describe each system primitive These primitives are used to troubleshoot the interface To insert one of the primitives click Insert and select System as shown below PAGE 216 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI SYSTEM PRIMITIVES Insert touch screen test object
39. If a file as multiple lines the string returned by ReadFile will be as many lines as required to reach the number of characters to be read Line feed and carriage return will be part of the returned string FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE string EXAMPLE Text ReadFile hFile 80 PAGE 396 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE READFILELINE FILE READFILELINE FILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Returns a single line of text from file FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text ReadFileLine hFile REVISION 6 PAGE 397 RENAMEFILE HANDLE NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER RENAMEFILE HANDLE NAME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION handle int File handle name cstring New file name DESCRIPTION Returns a non zero value upon a successful rename file operation The file handle is the returned value of the Openfile function After the rename operation the file stays open and should be closed if no further operations are required The file name is maximum 8 characters long excluding the extension which is 3 characters long maximum FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result RenameFile File NewName txt PAGE 398 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE RIGHT S
40. PAGE 371 MAX A B CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER B ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION a int float The first value to be compared b int float The second value to be compared DESCRIPTION Returns the larger of the two arguments FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the arguments EXAMPLE Larger Max Tankl Tank2 PAGE 372 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE MEAN ELEMENT COUNT MEAN ELEMENT COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION element int float The first array element to be processed count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the mean of the count array elements from element onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Average Mean Data 0 10 REVISION 6 PAGE 373 MID STRING POS COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MID STRING POS COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed pos int The position at which to start count int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns count characters from position pos within string where 0 15 the first position FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Exchange Mid Phone 3 3 PAGE 374 http www redlion ne
41. PAGE 411 SGN VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SGN VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value int float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns 1 if value is less than zero 1 if it is greater than zero or 0 if it is equal to zero FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE State Sgn Level 1 PAGE 412 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SHOWMENU NAME SHOWMENU WAME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name Display Page Display page to show as popup menu DESCRIPTION Displays the page specified as a popup menu This function is only available with on units fitted with touch screens Popup menus are shown on top of whatever is already on the screen and are aligned with the left hand side of the display FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ShowMenu Page2 REVISION 6 PAGE 413 SHOWPOPUP NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SHOWPOPUP WAME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name Display Page The page to be displayed as a popup DESCRIPTION Shows page name as a popup on the terminal s display The popup will be centered on the display and shown on top of the existing page The popup can be removed by calling the HidePopup function It will also b
42. Write this bit to 1 level sensitive to reset 0 or 1 bit R W the valley register to the existing PV value LOOP TARE DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PVGross Gross PV value direct result of PV assignment math 30 000 R before tare Inp Gross Gross input value direct result of input scaling before tare 30 000 R Inp2Gross Gross input 2 value direct result of input scaling before tare 30 000 R PVTareTot PV Tare Total The sum of the tared PV values since the 30 000 R last reset of the PV tare total InplTareTot Input 1 Tare Total The sum of the tared input 1 values 30 000 R since the last reset of the input 1 tare total Inp2TareTot Input 2 Tare Total The sum of the tared input 2 values 30 000 R since the last reset of the input 2 tare total TarePV Tare Process Value Write this bit to a 1 edge triggered 0 or 1 bit R W to tare reset the PV value to 0 The tared value is added to the PV tare total TareInpl Write this bit to a 1 edge triggered to tare reset the 0 or 1 bit R W input 1 value to 0 The tared input 1 value is added to the input 1 tare total REVISION 6 PAGE 49 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS TareInp2 Write this bit to a 1 edge triggered to tare reset the 0 or 1 bit R W input 2 value to 0 The tared input 2 value is added to the input 2 tare total RstPVTareTot Write
43. cer Alarm Ticker Properties x Properties rime Priority Colors Ticker Format Pick Ticker Colors No Active Alarms im Black and m Lime TEXT Active Alarm Use Priority Colors Y Active Alarm fo White and O Red MM ois x and Yellow TEXTO Accepted Alarm Ticker Contents No Active Alarms Shown Show Alarm Count Yes m Show Alarm Time Yes m Cancel Set As Defaults The Font property is used to select the font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment The Ticker Colors properties are used to define the foreground and background colors used to display each alarm state The default values should be acceptable for most applications The selection Active Alarm Use Priority Colors can be set to YES in which case the Active Alarm color selection below it will be disabled and color selection based on the tag priority will be enabled on the Priority Colors page The No Active Alarms property is used to indicate whether a message should be displayed when no alarms are present or whether the bar should be left blank in these circumstances The Show Alarm Count property is used to indicate whether the number of currently active alarms should be displayed in the primitive Unless display space is restricted
44. setpoint RanpTinebase x E On Off Hysteresis 10 BE On Off Deadband 0 0 F Auto Tune Settings TneResporse daz 3 User PID Settings Proportional Band 40 Integral Time 1200 secs LEDs outputs Alarms Power Control General Derivative Time 300 secs Power Filter 10 secs Ser eas Nom SETPOINT e The Ramp Timebase property selects seconds minutes or hours as the unit of time for ramping of the process e The Ramp Rate property is used to reduce sudden shock to a process during setpoint changes and system startup a setpoint ramp rate can be used to increase or decrease the Actual Setpoint at a controlled rate The value is entered in units time A value of 0 disables setpoint ramping If the Setpoint Ramp Rate is a non zero value and the Requested Setpoint is changed or the module is powered up the controller sets the Actual Setpoint to the current process measurement and uses that value as its setpoint It then adjusts the Actual Setpoint according to the setpoint Ramp Rate When the Actual Setpoint reaches the Requested Setpoint the controller resumes use of the Requested Setpoint value In a properly designed and functioning system the process will have followed the Actual Setpoint value to the Requested Setpoint value e The On Off Hysteresis property is used to eliminate output chatter by separating the on and off points of the output s wh
45. Black Background White Horizontal center hd Vertical Middle e Value property is used to indicate the time and date value to be displayed If no value is entered the current time and date is shown If an expression is entered it is taken to represent the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 January 1997 Such values are typically obtained using the various time and date functions described in the Function Reference e Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive If no value property has been defined this amounts to changing the current time or date If a value property has been entered the expression entered must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The balance of the properties are as described for tag text primitives While it may look odd to have Get Label and Flash On Alarm properties remember that the value property may be a tag and so Crimson does have access to the tag label and to the tag s alarm state should you decide to use them REVISION 6 PAGE 145 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The second tab is shown below Time and Date Properties Properties Format Data Label Label Text clock Translate Data Format Field Type Da
46. Crimson E D x File Edit View Link Help 2 p Setpoint Ramp Timebase amp Rete On Off Hysteresis On Off Deadband p Auto Tune Settings Tune Response p User PID Settings Proportional Band Integral Time LEDs outputs alarms Power Control General Derivative Time Power Filter OVER CAPS NUM PAGE 36 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING SETPOINT The Ramp Timebase property selects seconds minutes or hours as the unit of time for ramping of the process The Ramp Rate property is used to reduce sudden shock to a process during setpoint changes and system startup a setpoint ramp rate can be used to increase or decrease the Actual Setpoint at a controlled rate The value is entered in units time A value of 0 disables setpoint ramping If the Setpoint Ramp Rate is a non zero value and the Requested Setpoint is changed or the module is powered up the controller sets the Actual Setpoint to the current process measurement and uses that value as its setpoint It then adjusts the Actual Setpoint according to the setpoint Ramp Rate When the Actual Setpoint reaches the Requested Setpoint the controller resumes use of the Requested Setpoint value In a properly designed and functioning system the process will have followed the Actual Setpoint value to the Requested Setpoint value
47. If multiple languages are in use an additional column will be provided for each language The file type drop down can be used to select a Unicode format file if you are using languages that cannot be represented in standard ASCII The file can be subsequently re imported using the Import from File button The Copy from Tag button will display the following dialog box xi List Mukivar Muliarray Create Tag Muti variable 71 Greate OK Cancel This dialog can be used to select another multi tag from which the format information is to be copied This facility will save a lot of typing if the same format is to be used on several tags THE COLORS The Colors tab of a multi tag contains the following properties File 63 Foreground and Background Dee 31 LEJ wwe s LIT Owe mos oo ees moss ond ee ont ees nd reo 2 ie i Triggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Colors Format Data 21 ond fn To include this tag in a custom web page use OVER CAPS NUM various color pairs are used to specify how the tag should be displayed when it is each of the states specified on the Format tab As with the Format tab the Navigation slider can be used to up and down the list of color pairs when m
48. J Solid Color Fil Colori Fixed Wi Red x Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed cray Pick r Line Format Line Color Fixed white x Pick Cancel Set As Defaults REVISION 6 PAGE 187 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Text Format properties are used to define the font and the colors to be used to draw the value and the field label assuming these elements are enabled e Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled areas of the bars are drawn in the pattern and colors indicated while the unfilled areas are drawn with solid Fill Color 2 e The Line Format properties are used to define the style of the primitive s outline The third page contains the label and formatting information for the field Vertical Bar Graph Properties E Properties Additional Format r Data Label Label Text Translate Data Limits Minimum Value General As Per Format Maximum Value General Git v Data Format Number Base Decima 7 Sign Mode unsigned Digits Before DP s Digits After DP o Leading Zeros Fs H Group Digits Prefix 77 Translate Suffix Translate Cancel Set As Defaults The properties shown are as described for an integer tag and you are thus referred to the
49. One Touch Data Entry property defines whether or not the keypad should pop up after one touch or two touches on a data entry field Selecting No requires two touches to allow data entry The Keypad Next Prev Keys property defines whether or not the system keypad popups for data entry should include the Next and Prev keys Next and Prev keys are used to jump from one data entry field to another so as to avoid hiding the keypad between each data entry The Select Languages button is described in Selecting Languages below The Advanced tab provides more evolved parameters explained below e Edt View Key Page Link Help 5 22 2 2 e Watchdog Failure show GMC After Restart z p Database Contents Include Image Files No Store Relative Paths No Image Directory p Maintenance Purge Unused Fonts Purge Unused Images VE APS NOM PAGE 220 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI SELECTING LANGUAGES The Error Recovery properties are used to define the behavior of the system when it encounters a software problem or when the display fails to update for a long period of time as a result of a coding error By default the system will reset and display a so called Guru Meditation Code to help the development engineers in tracking down the problem You may disable the display of this code to allow the system
50. THE TOUCH TEST PRIMITIVE This primitive is used to test the operator interface s touch screen Once the primitive is inserted on the display touching the primitive draws a square dot at the position the touch screen was pressed This provides control of the touch screen precision as the dot should appear under the finger If this is not the case please proceed with the touch calibration primitive Double clicking the primitive accesses the format properties to define colors and line format THE TOUCH CALIBRATION PRIMITIVE This primitive is used to calibrate the operator interface s touch screen Once the primitive is inserted on the display and downloaded in the terminal the page with the Touch Calib will display a set of instructions to calibrate the screen It is required that you touch each of the squares shown on the display The primitive will then inform you as to the success or failure of the calibration Double clicking the primitive will access the format properties to define colors and line format Actions can also be inserted upon success or failure of the test REVISION 6 PAGE 217 DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES dar Page Properties x r General Actions Entry Order Rows Then Columns On Select Popup Location center On Remove Update Rate standard On Tick Background m Black
51. and wish to repair the expression that will have been broken when the tags were deleted ExPORTING TAG MAPPINGS Selecting the Tags icon in the left hand pane of the Tags window will also allow access to the tag import and export facilities The Export to File button can be used to export the tag names and mappings to a CSV file for subsequent editing in Microsoft Excel or some other suitable tool The Import from File button can then be used to re import the file changing the tag mappings in line with the changes made to the file These facilities are useful when porting an application from one PLC to another as it allows all the mappings to be changed in a single operation The import facility can also be used to create tags to correspond to data mappings that have been exported into a CSV file from a Red Lion Modular Controller LoGGING EVENT MESSAGES When the Tags icon is selected in the left hand pane the right hand pane of the Tags window contains options to control the logging of the messages generated by the alarms and events attached to each tag Event Logging Send to Raw Port No hd Save to CompactFlash z New File Ever 60 mins Retain At Mos files e The Send to Raw Port property is used to indicate which communications port events should be printed to The port in question must have a raw port driver bound to it as described in the Using Raw Ports chapter Note that a serial driver or a TCP IP driver may be use
52. direction using the Direction property In our example below registers N7 0 through N7 16 have been allocated REVISION 6 PAGE 5 MAPPING DATA CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help o 4 Programming Port E RS 232 Comms Port DF1 Master EH pict X 007 0000 X No07 0001 X No07 0002 X 007 0003 00210006 Request General X No07 0005 X N007 0006 Acknowledge v General oc EdE won X 007 0008 X 007 0009 Import From Grimson 1 0 Database X N007 0010 X 007 0011 Delete This Block X 007 0012 X NO07 0013 X 007 0014 X No07 0015 4 R5 485 Comms Port Ethernet Y Protocol 1 F Protocol 2 Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 Ry Services Mall Manager Tit OPC Server li Time Manager OVER cars NUM To map module data select one of the registers A list of available data will be shown in the right hand pane 5 gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit Link Help De 25 0 2 e wc Programming Port 8 50 RS 232 Comms Port Master EE PCI Block 1 X NO07 0000 X N007 0001 X NOO7 0002 X Noo7 0003 X N007 0004 X N007 0005 X No07 0006 X NOO7 0007 X Noo7 0008 X N007 0009 X 007 0010 X No07 0011 X 007 0012 X 007 0013 X N007 0014 X 007 0015 48 RS
53. e The Target Page property is used to indicate which page should be displayed You can either choose a specific one to be displayed or choose Previous Page to return to what was displayed before the current page was called e The Show As Popup property causes the target page to be displayed as a popup on top of the current page while the popup is displayed the keys will assume the definitions established for that page with the exception of the exit key The exit key is used to remove the popup from the display REVISION 6 PAGE 151 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE PusH BUTTON ACTION dar Function Key F1 This Page a Pages Action Mode Operation push Button m Action Details Button Type Toggle Button Data Tag output r Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit OK Cancel e The Button Type property is used to define the key s behavior This action is used to emulate a pushbutton The options are shown below BUTTON TYPE THE BUTTON WILL Toggle Change the data state when the key is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the key is pressed Set the data to 0 when the key is released Turn On Set the data to 1 when the key is pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the key is pressed The Button Data property is used to define the data to be changed by the key
54. it is not truly mapped to that register in that it can never be written to and thus cannot be considered to be equivalent to that register The need for this restriction is obvious if you consider a formula such a Temperaturel Temperature2 What would it mean to write to this expression Arrays represent a collection of data items within the Master These are typically used to store recipe data or to build up collections of data for statistical analysis They are not used in the majority of simple applications but provide a powerful tool for more complex projects TAG TYPES Each family contains five tag types each of which holds a different kind of data ALL ABOUT TAGS Lal Flag tags represent a single true or false condition When they are mapped to a register in a remote device they will typically correspond to an internal coil or to a single digital I O point Flag formulae typically represent combinations of such items or comparisons of numeric values REVISION 6 PAGE 103 ALL ABOUT TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER X tt Integer tags represent 32 bit signed numbers These tags can store values between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 Even if a tag is mapped to a PLC register which contains only 16 bits of data Crimson performs its internal operations at the higher level of precision to ensure large intermediate values can be handled with ease Multi tags represent numeric v
55. present on monochrome virtual HMI REVISION 6 PAGE 119 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ALARM WILL ACTIVATE WHEN Data Match The value of the tag is equal to the alarm s Value Data Mismatch The value of tag is not equal to the alarm s Value Absolute High The value of the tag exceeds the alarm s Value Absolute Low The value of the tag falls below the alarm s Value The following modes are only available when a setpoint is defined MODE ALARM WILL ACTIVATE WHEN Deviation High The value of the tag exceeds the tag s Setpoint by an amount equal to or greater than the alarm s Value Deviation Low The value of the tag falls below the tag s Setpoint by an amount equal to or greater than the alarm s Value Out of Band The tag moves outside a band equal in width to twice the alarm s Value and centered on the tag s Setpoint In Band The tag moves inside a band equal in width to twice the alarm s Value and centered on the tag s Setpoint e The Value property is used to define either the absolute value at which the alarm will be activated or the deviation from the setpoint value The exact interpretation depends on the event mode as described above e The Hysteresis property is used to prevent an alarm from oscillating between the on and off states when the process is near the alarm condition For example for an absolute
56. 12 or as its short name ie Jan though Dec Show Year property is used to indicate whether the date field should include the year and if so how many digits should be shown for that element THE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick a The Rich Vertical Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph markers to indicate any associated setpoint PAGE 146 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Rich Horizontal Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The operation of these rich primitives is analogous to that of the various tag text primitives in that they are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives two tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages is shown below value Show Label Yes m Show Value Yes 2 Show Setpoint 7 Get Label From Tag Properties Get Format From Tag Properties x Graph Format File hk o Font fowss7x8 rz Z8PRich Vertical Bar Graph Properties 1 Properties Format Data Source The Value p
57. Align example shown below a newly created ellipse is being aligned with two existing rectangles Guidelines are present at both the edges of the figures and at the center showing that both the edges and the centers are aligned The red rectangle is highlighting the newly created primitive while the blue rectangles are highlighting the primitives to which the guidelines have been drawn 2 gt Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Edit Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help e 8 8 5 5 2 e oven eas num Smart Align is also enabled when primitives are moved or re sized KEYBOARD OPTIONS While creating a display primitive the following keyboard options are available e Holding down the shift key while dragging out the primitive will cause the primitive to be drawn such that it is centered on the initial mouse position with one of its corners defined by the current mouse position If this doesn t make sense go ahead and try it it s a lot easier to see than it is to explain This is useful for drawing symmetrical figures centered on an initial point e Holding down the ctri key while dragging out the primitive will keep its horizontal and vertical sizes the same This is useful when you want to be sure that you draw an exact circle or square using the ellipse or rectangle primitives These options are also active when primitives are re sized Lock INSERT MO
58. BATCH In order to control batch logging some functions are available NewBatch cstring Name will create a batch folder called Name on the CompactFlash card and start batch logging Files recorded after this command will be saved under that folder EndBatch will stop the current running Batch GetBatch will return the name of the current running batch For more information please refer to the functions reference of this manual CREATING DATA LoGs You may use the Create Data Log button to create as many data logs as you need Since each log can record an unlimited number of data tags most applications will only use a single log However since each log has a fixed set of properties in terms of its sample rate you may decide to use multiple logs if you wish to sample different data at different rates USING THE Loc LIST To rename or delete data logs click on the left hand pane of the Data Logger window The commands on the Log menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively you may right click on the required data log and select from the menu Note that the name of a data log must be eight characters or less in length This is because the name will be used to define the directory under which the log files are stored and the Master module is not able to handle names that do not conform to FAT style 8 3 naming To select a data log either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar
59. Count 10 values mX Axis Minimum General o Edit Maximum General 100 r Y Axis General_ o Et Maximum v General 100 r Line Style Options Data Markers Only Hide Regression Line Edk Set As Defaults The X Values property is used to define the array element that contains the first x coordinate to be plotted while the Y Values property is used to define the array element that contains associated y coordinate e The Count property is used to specify the number of values to be shown REVISION 6 PAGE 175 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER X Axis Minimum and X Axis Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling for the horizontal axis while the Y Axis Minimum and Y Axis Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling for the vertical axis The Edit Graph Properties window accessed via the Edit button defines various formatting options Graph Properties E x Format colors Options Graph Style Data Markers Only Regression Line Hide m e The Graph Style property is used to select between a line graph a line graph with data markers or a set of data markers without a line The various other formatting options on the Color page will be enabled or disabled as required e The Regression Line property is used to show
60. DESCRIPTIONS The second page is used to define additional formatting information dar Button Properties Properties Additional Images Action m Fill Format Fill Style E m Fill Color 1 Fixed Pick FilColor 2 veed M Pick Line Format Line Style fsoidcoor e Line Color Fixed Owe 3 Pi Cancel Set As Defaults e The Fill Format properties are used to define the color and pattern to be used to fill the interior of the button For 3D buttons this color is used to draw the button face while the system uses various shades of grey to draw the border so as to get the 3D effect For buttons based on custom images the fill format defines the background that is to be drawn underneath the images The Line Format properties are used to define the style and color of the lines that make up the outlines of the Round and Flat Rectangle styles The properties are not used when other styles are selected The third tab is used for buttons of the Custom Image style to define the images to be shown when the button is in the release and pressed states Image selection is described in detail under the picture primitive and you are thus referred to those sections The fourth tab is used to define the action to be performed by the button You are referred to the earlier section of this chapter for more details THE RICH BUTTON PRIMITIVE state of a flag tag While t
61. Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual HMI facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The Show States property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to attempt to label each of the possible states of the tag The states will only be shown if sufficient space exists at the top of the primitive It is also important to select a small enough font to avoid overlapping text The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the data format and the associated text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The Text Format properties are used to select the font and text colors for the state labels If the primitive is configured to obtain its text colors from the underlying tag the color fields will be disabled PAGE 208 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRI
62. DirPower Output applied to channels assigned for Direct 0 100 0096 R ActSP Actual Setpoint R Error The difference between the Process Value and the R Requested Setpoint AckManual Acknowledge Manual mode 0 or 1 bit R AckTune Acknowledge auto tune request 0 or 1 bit R TuneDone Auto tune completed 0 or 1 bit R TuneFail Auto tune did not finish successfully 0 or 1 bit R Alarml Alarm 1 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm2 Alarm 2 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm3 Alarm 3 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm4 Alarm 4 status 0 or 1 bit R PVAlarm PV out of range 0 or 1 bit R InplAlarm Input 1 out of range 0 or 1 bit R Inp2Alarm Input 1 out of range 0 or 1 bit R LOOP CONTROL DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS ReqSP Requested Setpoint The setpoint value written to the R W controller This value may be different than the Actual Setpoint in applications utilizing Setpoint Ramping Power Manual output power setting 200 00 R W SetHyst Setpoint Hysteresis for On Off Control R W PAGE 46 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS SetDead Setpoint Deadband for On Off Control R W SetRamp Setpoint Ramp Rate R W InputFilter Input Filter 0 60 0 sec R W ReqManual Request Manual Write
63. E PEDES 412 SHOWMENU WAME per mure Ye Re cubes UR NEAR ERREUR 413 PAGE XII http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS EE 414 SINCTHETA 2 deeper eae vale bua ladle eiu eed ad 415 ez eor 416 SEEEP PERIOD v s coxa e ree nex IER ext deve ERE rel Deer Teen d 417 oraque PE 418 STDDEV E EMENT COUNT Lii seta rue esa etd En ele v 419 420 TARGET eue da E E e e Ree RR 421 SUMCELEMENT sarei rane en YARN Ede EA esa aad 422 a 423 TESTACCESS RIGATS PROMPT iesus tec venu Con v Rove ves Eb 424 TEXTTOADDR ADDR 5 eire pe Sce 425 TEXETOEEOATCSTRING esi reir Io E ER eR od 426 TEXTTOINT STRING RADIX dex Dee de yea E IUE AEGA Tai 427 8 ied hee alee eee ieee 428 USECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX 429 EE 430 a aa 431 WAITDATA DATA COUNT 432 WRITEFILE FILES TEXT ELE 433 WRITEFILELINE FILE TEXT e usn A ER Ege
64. ERE eisai A 434 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 52xc ka xa CER REx L ME ERI CR HR RED RR 435 GENERA ea uds oL 435 CRIMSON MESSAGES zs nene PR DRE BAR e Tears compa Pu Dos Ge 438 SERIAL COMMUNICATION atte Riso 439 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION erra Bere 440 PROGRAMS EEE eret a TEE vo fult citare 441 WEB SERVER a 442 REVISION 6 PAGE XIII CRIMSON 2 UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETTING STARTED SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS GETTING STARTED Welcome to Crimson 2 the latest configuration package from Red Lion Controls Crimson is designed to provide quick and easy access to the features of the Modular Controller and Data Station series while still allowing the advanced user to take advantage of high end features such as Crimson s unique programming support SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Crimson 2 is designed to run on PCs with the following specifications A Pentium class processor as required by the chosen operating system e RAM and free disk space as required by the chosen operating system e An additional 50MB of disk space for software installation display of at least 800 by 600 pixels with 256 or more co
65. For more information on the operator used in this example refer to the Writing Expressions section e The Simulation property is a described for flag tags THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a multi array contains the following properties 2 gt Untitled File 6310 Edit yew Tag Link 2 8 Array Data Mapping vici 0000 Edt Elements 16 integers Access Read and Wrte E Non Retentive 7 Simulation g p Communications ReadPolcy Read Adaptively ReadAhead registers ReadBehind 3 p Actions On Write To include this tag in a custom web page use 2 OVER CAPS NOM All of these properties are as described for flag arrays PAGE 122 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING MULTI TAGS THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of a multi tag contains the following properties Edt Tag Link Help 5 Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 281 State ZERO State ONE riggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 colors Format To include this tag in a custom web page use L1 OVER GAPS NU Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label dif
66. GETMONTHDAYS Y M GETMoNTHDAYS M ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION y int The year to be processed in four digit form m int The month to be processed from 1 to 12 DESCRIPTION Returns the number of days in the indicated month accounting for leap years etc FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Days GetMonthDays 2000 3 REVISION 6 PAGE 343 GETNETGATE PORT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETNETGATE PORT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Returns the IP address of the port s default gateway as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE The function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE gate GetNetGate 0 PAGE 344 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNETID PORT PORT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports an Ethernet port s MAC address as 17 character text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE MAC GetNetId 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 345 GETNETIP PORT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PORT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports
67. HELP Translate Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the required font e The Enable Help property activates a Help button to be displayed on the primitive This Help button can be used to provide the operator with information on specific alarms as explained in Using the Help button below e The Button Labels properties are used to override the default label that is shown on each of the four buttons or to enter localized versions of this text on systems that support multiple languages Setting all four of the text items to a single will disable the buttons and blank that area on the display The fourth tab of the properties is used to select the colors of the alarm text when Active Alarm Use Priority Colors is set to YES on the Properties page PAGE 192 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS dar Alarm Viewer Properties E Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors Priority Color Selection Priority 1 Color and Bee gt Priority 2 Color z and iss gt Priority Color White v and Yellow v Priority 4 Color z and gt Priority 5 Color white z and I Fuchsia 7 Priority 6 Color white gt and gt Priority 7 Color white gt and gt 4 Priority 84 Color white gt and cray gt Cancel
68. Imagine what would happen if you say tried to log data from the associated tag and you ll realize that this would not be a good thing Therefore keep programs that return values simple and always consider the context in which they will be run If in doubt avoid doing anything other than simple math and if statements PASSING ARGUMENTS As also mentioned above program can accept arguments As an example suppose you want to write a program called FindMean to take the average of two values The program could be configured to accept two integer arguments a and b as shown the example given when defining the purpose of the Arguments property The program would also be configured so as to return a integer value The code within the program would then be defined as return 2 Once this program has been created and translated you will be able to enter an expression such as FindMean Tagl Tag2 to invoke it with the appropriate arguments In this case the expression will be equal to the average of Tag1 and Tag2 PAGE 228 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS PROGRAMMING TIPS The sections below provide an overview of the programming constructions supported by Crimson The basic syntax used is that of the C programming language Note that the aim is not to try and teach you to become a programmer or to master the subtleties of the C language Such topics are beyond the
69. LANGUAGE To configure a key or primitive to change the language displayed by the virtual HMI select User Defined mode and enter SetLanguage n as the On Pressed property where n is a number between 1 and 8 according to the language to be displayed The display page will be redrawn in the selected language with any text for which translations have been entered including fixed text tag labels and tag formatting information adjusted as appropriate Pages that are subsequently displayed will also be drawn in the selected language SIMULATING LANGUAGES IN CRIMSON Simulating languages provides a way to simulate how translated text will be shown in different languages Therefore required space for text fields or primitives containing text can be adjusted for all languages directly in Crimson To select the language to display click View and Simulate Language Languages set up earlier via the Select Language buttons are displayed Just pick the language and click OK Crimson will switch all the text displayed in pages to the selected translation field Language Simulation r Language gt Korean c i American C 2 French C 3 German C 4 Generic C 5 Generic C 6 Generic C Generic OK Cancel 222 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR In addition to defining actions th
70. Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the virtual HMI e The Minimum Value and Maximum Value properties are used to define limits used for data entry and to provide similar limits for the various graphical primitives that need to know the bounds within which the tag may vary such as when scaling a tag s value for display as a bar graph The Number Base property is used to indicate whether the tag should be displayed in decimal hexadecimal binary octal or passcode Decimal values may be signed or unsigned while all other number bases imply unsigned operation Selecting passcode mode will display asterisks for values being entered and is intended for security purposes The Sign Mode property is used to indicate whether or not a sign should be prefixed to the tag s value If a hard sign is selected either a positive or a negative sign will be prefixed as appropriate If a soft sign is selected a positive sign will not be shown but a space will be prefixed instead e The Digits Before DP property is used to indicate how many digits should be shown before the decimal place or if no digits are to be shown after the decimal place to indicate how many digits should be shown
71. LimitHi 0 None Read When Referenced void Program void USING THE PROGRAM LIST To create rename or delete programs click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Program menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right click on the required program and select from the menu To select a program either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected EDITING PROGRAMS To edit a program simply edit the program text using the large area in the right hand pane of the Programming window When you have finished press the key combination or select the Translate command from the Program menu This will read the program and check it for errors If an error is found a dialog box will be displayed and the cursor will be moved to the approximate position of the error If no errors exist a dialog box will be displayed to confirm this fact and the program will be translated into Crimson s internal format for subsequent execution by the Master PROGRAM PROPERTIES The various fields at the bottom of the right hand pane are used to edit program properties e The Return Type property is used to indicate whether this progr
72. OPERATOR PRIORIT Yoani ninnaa twr es Ae devo EU cu MI E COMPARING VALUES y DEN Ec NR EE CUR zugleich ETE cae nee ex dene ep ere avere exu ex ep eve xe e va CHOOSING VALUES 2 E MANIPULATING vu sea ava aea dove NUEN daa t AND XOR Sides SHIET OPERATORS atia ec to ra ca E P P E E cn e BITWISE NOT t ten Pa n UR RV Cu v t e e d ect d a PAGE VIII http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEXING ARRAYS strc D SERE PEE Ria 266 INDEXING STRINGS 4 5 2 ede esl Pub ede y eure de eva pr eye Ee dere vel cde 266 Pippi escapes 266 CALLING PROGRAMS nn sina sanas ska nana nnn 266 9 266 PRIORITY SUMMARY 4 22 See eate resa e ERR TA ea Dye ie rates CORR Te 266 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS censes nennen nennen nn adn uana sad ER RR ORARE PER ennn Resa sas 267 WRITING ACTIONS 5 52 25555c bii
73. Oea 7 imax ler me ing Port Program Tv one eer tar pea 8 RS 232 Comms Port Mitsubishi FX Driver Generic Program Tiva B 85 485 Comms Port Driver Settings Target Port p Port Settings BaudRate 115200 Eight stop Bits R5232 485 Opti 4 R5 232 Comms Port 5 85 485 Comms Port Party None Port Sharing Share Port No TCP Port 0 Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Port 1 OVER CAPS NUM Note that the Baud rate and other port settings do not have to be the same as those for the port which we are sharing unless the unit being programmed is a PAX meter In that case the PAX and the G3 port MUST be set for 9600 8 N 1 In the configuration shown above data to and from the programming software is sent at a higher Baud rate than the data to and from the PLC with the Master module doing the appropriate buffering and conversion In this example to make use of the shared port you would connect a spare serial port on your PC to the programming port of the Master and configure the PLC programming software to talk to this COM port As soon as the PC begins to talk to the PLC communications between the Master and the PLC will be suspended and the Master s two ports will be connected in software such that the PC will appear to be talking directly to the PLC If no data is transferred for more t
74. Only Why USE TAGS Given all these various options you may wonder why you would want to use tags in the first place After all Crimson allows you to directly place a module or PLC register on a display page so you can in fact configure a simple database without ever opening the Data Tags icon The basic answers are as follows e Tags allow you to name data items so you know which data item within the PLC you are referring to Further if the data in the PLC moves or if you decide to switch to an entirely different family of PLC you can simply re map the tags and avoid having to make any other changes to your database PAGE 104 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS CREATING TAGS Tags allow you to avoid re entering the same information again and again When you create a tag you specify how the tag is to be displayed In the case of an integer tag this means you tell Crimson how many decimal places are to be used and what units if any are to be appended to the value When you place a tag on a display page Crimson knows how to format it without you having to do anything further Similarly if you decide to change the formatting and perhaps switch from one set of units to another you can do this in one place without having to edit each display page in turn e On Masters configured to have a color virtual HMI tags are used as the basis for color animation The various colors that are defi
75. PAGE 4 http www redlion net controller QUICK START MAPPING DATA To create a Gateway Block click and then click the Add Gateway Block button on the right hand pane This creates a single gateway block for mapping data S Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit Link Help 2 Block Settings O Programming Port Ej A 5 232 Comms Port DF1 Master Start Address None Edt i Em 2727 eS es Pat Direction Sata Device Block Control maet General EE Acknowledge General tt Time Manager Import From Grimson 1 0 Database Delete This Block Joven cars NUM Next you ll need to identify the register locations that you wish to map data to or from starting with a register address Click the Edit button to see the registers supported by Crimson for the selected protocol ZE Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit View Link Help Deu on5ax 4 Block Settings 59 Programming Port E R5 232 Comms Port DFI Master Start Address None Edt LIN E CMS MS HAE TE Dreco ato Device EB El Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 SR Services 281 Mail Manager ly OPC Server Bl Time Manager OVER cars NUM Enter the desired number of registers in the Block Size property as well as the desired
76. Ramp Mode property is used to define whether to raise or lower the item In the example above holding the key will raise MotorSpeed by 1 until it reaches 100 THE PLAY TUNE ACTION This action plays a selected tune using the Master s internal sounder LT x This Page all Pages Action Mode Operation Play Tune m Action Details Tune Name None h InaGaddaDaVida j Action Control ch orrpesherirt JailhouseRock hz Enable Cancel vO REVISION 6 PAGE 153 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER e Tune Name selects the tune to be played Customized tunes may be played using PlayRTTTL function THE USER DEFINED ACTION This action is used to do anything else you desire The options are shown below erFunction Key F1 This Page All Pages Action Mode Operation Action Details On Pressed Output 1 On Auto Repeat Mone On Released Output 0 r Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit e On Pressed property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program e The On Auto Repeat property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is pr
77. ReqTune high 2 Module starts auto tuning sets AckTune high 3 Auto tune is complete AckTune goes low TuneDone goes high 4 PLC sees TuneDone high sets ReqTune low 5 Module sees ReqTune go low and sets the TuneDone low REVISION 6 PAGE 29 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers Decimal places are used to denote resolution only and are not read or written ie a Power value of 10000 is interpreted as 100 00 Note The following table shows available data for the CSPID1 module In most cases the CSPID2 module contains the same data for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 e g Instead of listing only Module1 PV the CSPID2 will list Module1 Loop1 PV and Modulel Loop2 PV LOOP STATUS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PV Process Value The input value x R Output Output Power Calculated output power of the PID loop 200 00 R prior to Gain Offsets and Limits HeatPower Output applied to channels assigned for Heat 0 100 00 R CoolPower Output applied to channels assigned for Cooling 0 100 0096 R ActSP Actual Setpoint R Error The difference between the Process Value and the R Requested Setpoint ColdJunc Cold Junction Calibration Value N A R HCMValue Heater Current mA Input Value 0 100 00 mA R AckMan
78. Soft Key 1 0x95 Function Key 6 0x81 Soft Key 2 0x96 Function Key 7 0x82 Soft Key 3 0x97 Function Key 8 0x83 Soft Key 4 0 ALARMS 0x84 Soft Key 5 OxAl MUTE 0x85 Soft Key 6 0x86 Soft Key 7 0xA2 MENU 0x90 Function Key 1 0xA3 RAISE 0x91 Function Key 2 4 LOWER 0x92 Function Key 3 0x09 NEXT 0x93 Function Key 4 0x08 PREV 0x94 Function Key 5 0 0 TRANSITION OPERATION 0 Post key down then key up 1 Post key down only 2 Post key up only 3 Post key repeat only REVISION 6 PAGE 391 POWER VALUE POWER CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PowER VALUE POWER ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value int float The value to be processed power int float The power to which value is to be raised DESCRIPTION Returns value raised to the power th power FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Volume Power Length 3 PAGE 392 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE RAD2DEG THETA RAD2DEG 7HETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION theta float The angle to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns theta converted from radians to degrees FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Right Rad2Deg Pi 2 REVISION 6 PAGE 393 RANDOM RANGE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODUL
79. a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports EDITING INTEGER TAGS You will recall that integer tags represent a 32 bit signed value The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing one of the various kinds of integer tags PAGE 114 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of an integer variable contains the following properties kE Untitled Fle G310 Crimson 2 0 dpi xd View Tag Link Help Dag miux e t 5252 Variable Data Mapping 00100 Edt SionMode Rend ard ree zi Simulation o Y MotorStopped Motori Scaling and Transforms wedom 21 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use CAPS NUI e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the Master If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected The Sign Mode property is used to override the default behavior of the comms driver when reading 16 bit values from
80. a target device other than CSMSTRSXC use the New command on the File menu OVER GAPS NUM The software is designed such that the first three icons are the only ones required for the majority of simple applications The remainder of the icons provide access to the Master s more advanced features such as programming data logging and the web server MAIN SCREEN ICONS The sections below provide an overview of each icon in turn MODULES This icon is used to configure the modules within the system Modules may be added deleted or have their order on the rail modified Each module may then be accessed in order to configure their specific properties This icon is used to specify which protocols are to be used on the Master s serial ports and on the Ethernet port Where master protocols are used ie protocols by which the Master module initiates data transfer to and from a remote device you can also use this icon to specify one or more devices to be accessed Where slave protocols are used ie protocols by which the Master receives and responds to requests from remote devices or computer systems you can specify which data items are to be exposed for read or write access You can also use this icon to move data between one remote device and another via Crimson s protocol converter REVISION 6 PAGE 9 MAIN SCREEN ICONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DATA TAGS This icon is used to rename data items
81. a time This is particularly handy to visualize Data Log files allowing the user to move from one file to another for the desired log Only files with CSV TXT and LOG extensions are supported The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cerFile Viewer Properties Properties r Format Viewer Font Line Numbers shown Sort Order Files First Button Font Swiss 7x12 Pick Contents gt Root Directory 1 065 061 r File Types CSV Files TXT Files LOG Files Set As Defaults Font property is used to select font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment e The Line Numbers property defines if the line number should be shown or not in front of each file line The Sort Order property is used to choose whether files residing under the folder should be displayed or not and if the order 15 from the newest or the oldest file The selection New File First will display the files from the newest to the oldest when moving through the folder with the primitive The selection Old Files First will do the contrary REVISION 6 PAGE 197 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Button Font property is used to select the required font for the navigation buttons of the primitive The Roo
82. a write is in progress the CompactFlash card may be corrupted To ensure that such corruption is not permanent the Master module uses a journaling system that caches writes to additional non volatile memory within the Master If the Master detects that a write was interrupted during power down the write will be repeated when power is reapplied thereby reversing any corruption and repairing the CompactFlash card This means that if you want to remove a CompactFlash card from a Master performing data logging you must observe the procedure described above with respect to the activity LED and only remove power when the activity has ceased If you are not sure if the Master was powered down correctly reapply power allow a CompactFlash write sequence to complete and power down according to the correct procedure The card can then be removed safely Since the gyrations required to remove a CompactFlash card are somewhat complex Crimson provides two other mechanisms for accessing log files thereby eliminating the need for such removals These methods are described below ACCESSING LOG FILES There are three additional methods of accessing log files e The less preferable method is to mount the card as a drive on a PC via the process described at the start of this manual so that the logs can be copied using REVISION 6 PAGE 241 USING WEBSYNC CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Windows Explorer Note that Windows 2
83. advised to create a new Crimson database including only one data tag mapped to a known register in the target device PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Values show Port settings do not match Incorrect communication port Communication port connector pins bent inward Incorrect tag mapping Check that the port settings of the Crimson device match the target device i e Baud Parity etc Check that the target device address in Crimson in communications on the PLC symbol matches the target device address setup Check the cable part number or cabling to match your protocol If the above is correct check that the protocol settings are on the right communication port in Crimson Although unlikely check the communication port connector pins on the Red Lion device in case some are bent inward resulting in a bad contact with the cable Check that the tag is mapped to an existing register in the target device Values blink between the data and Incorrect tag mapping on one of the tags on the display Communications times out Delete tags one after another and download in between When the values on the screen stop blinking the last deleted tag was mapped incorrectly or accessed an unknown register in the target device Increase the Slave Response or Device Timeout on the communication port or target device in Crimson
84. alarm being signaled As an example if an alarm is set to activate when a speed switch indicates that a motor is not running even when the motor has been requested to start this property can be used to provide the motor with time to run up before the alarm is activated Accept property is used to indicate whether the user will be required to explicitly accept an alarm before it will no longer be displayed Edge triggered alarms must always be manually accepted e Priority property is used to control the order in which alarms are displayed by Crimson s alarm viewer The lower the numerical value of the priority field the nearer to the top the alarm will be displayed The Email property is used to specify the email address book entry to which a message should be sent when this alarm is activated Refer to the Advanced Communications chapter for information on configuring email THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of a flag variable or formula contains the following properties Untitled File Crimson 2 0 1000 ms PLC1 D0100 1 le Active z 1000 ms Bc 1 f TPLC1 D0100 0 1 ove pes e The Trigger Mode property is as described for the Alarms tab The Delay property is as described for the Alarms tab Action property is used to indicate what action should be performed when the trigger is activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for
85. are unused save the minimum and maximum values The Line Format properties are used to define the style of the primitive s outline The Fill Format properties are used to define the color and style of the primitive s background and of the slider itself The background is drawn in Fill Color 2 while the slider is drawn in either Fill Color 1 or the combination of the two colors that is specified by the Fill Style The second page is used to control data entry and functions are as for tag text primitives You are thus referred to the earlier section for more information The third page is used to define REVISION 6 PAGE 189 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER the optional label and the minimum and maximum values possibly by means of a complete data format This page functions as was previously discussed for integer data tags and you are referred to that section for further details THE ALARM VIEWER PRIMITIVE The Alarm Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to view and accept active alarms Differing color pairs are used to show the various alarm states Additional data about the alarms may be displayed if required If you use manual accept alarms in your system you should provide a page that contains an alarm viewer to make sure the operator can accept these alarms You may wish to consider creating a popup page and using it to display the alarm viewer although the size re
86. available for editing the display The r4 key toggles the page list on and off Hold Aspect command be used to control whether or not Crimson attempts to maintain the aspect ratio of the display If aspect holding is enabled a figure that would appear as say a circle on the G303 will appear as a perfect REVISION 6 PAGE 133 USING THE PAGE LIST CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER circle on your PC If this mode is not selected Crimson can expand the display page to use more of the PC s screen but at the expense of some distortion Other options are available during page editing and are described below USING THE PAGE LIST To create rename or delete display pages click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Page menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right click on the required display page and select from the menu To select a page either click on the page in the page list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected DISPLAY EDITOR TOOLBOXES To edit the contents of a display page first select the page as described above Then click on the green rectangle that represents the Master s display A white rectangle will appear around the display to indicate that it h
87. be added to the tag list To edit the tag s name select the tag in the left hand pane and type in the new name Tag names must conform to the following rules Tag names may not contain spaces or punctuation names must start with a letter of the alphabet or an underscore e Subsequent characters must be digits letters or underscores e Names must not exceed 24 characters in length REVISION 6 PAGE 105 EDITING TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER EDITING TAGS When a tag is selected in the left hand pane the right hand pane will change to display a number of tabs each of which shows certain properties of the tag Depending on the family and type of the tag different tabs may be present and each tab may contain different fields No matter what kind of tag is selected the first tab in the right hand pane is always the Data tab This tab contains fields that indicate what data the tag is to represent and how that data is to be stored and perhaps transferred to or from a remote device The exact contents of the tab will vary according to the family and type of the tag in question The second tab is always the Format tab This indicates how the data in the tag is to be formatted when shown on the virtual HMI or when presented to a user via any other mechanism such as a web page The Format tab will take the same form for all tags of the same type such that all integer tags for example share the same s
88. by Power Transfer values such as gains and offsets that would otherwise limit the outputs to less than their maximums e The Download Scaling property determines which scaling values if any will be downloaded to the module To avoid overwriting the scaling values of a calibrated process set this value to No SMARTONOFF SmartOnOff is designed for situations where on off control would normally be used but where the advantages of PID are also desired When the reverse or direct output is placed into this mode the control output will either be driven on or off with no intermediate values or time proportioning However rather than use the process value to decide when to turn the output on SmartOnOff looks at the output of the PID calculation and activates the output when it exceeds half the defined gain for that channel For example with default settings SmartOnOff for the reverse output would turn the output on once the PID algorithm called for 50 power or more with the hysteresis value being used to ensure that small changes in the PID calculation do not produce relay chatter e The Hysteresis property is used to eliminate output chatter by separating the on and off points of the output s when performing SmartOnOff control The Hysteresis value is centered around the setpoint that is the transition points of the output will be offset above and below the setpoint by half of the Hysteresis value THE CONTROL TAB 3P Untitled File
89. by the value in the MotorIndex tag switch MotorIndex case 1 MotorA 1 break case 2 case 3 otorB 1 break case 4 s 1 break default otorD 1 break A value of 1 will start motor A a value of 2 or 3 will start motor B and a value of 4 will start motor C Any value which is not explicitly listed will start motor D Things to note about the syntax are the use of curly brackets around the case statements the use of break to end each conditional block the use of two sequential case statements to match more than one value and the use of the optional de ault statement to indicate an action to perform if none of the specified values is matched by the value in the controlling expression If this syntax looks REVISION 6 PAGE 231 PROGRAMMING TIPS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER too intimidating a series of i statements can be used instead to produce the same results but with marginally lower performance and somewhat less readability LOCAL VARIABLES Some programs use variables to store intermediate results or to control one of the various loop constructs described below Rather than defining a tag to hold these values you can declare what are known as local variables using the syntax shown below int a Declare local integer a float b Declare local real cstring c Declare local string c Local
90. by typing an PAGE 106 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING PROPERTIES expression directly into the edit box Most users though will choose to press the arrowed button and select from the menu of options that is presented Selecting Tag will display a dialog box containing a list of data tags You can select the tag that you want to be used to control this property In some cases you will also be given the chance to create a new tag and define its basic properties This is not available when editing properties that belong directly to other data tags as it 1s otherwise too easy to forget which tag you re editing Selecting a device name will display a dialog box allowing you to choose a register within that remote communications device The various communications devices are listed at the end of the menu in the order in which they were created Selecting Next will set the property to be equal to the register which follows the last selected register within the last selected device For example if you have used the device name option to set a previous property to N7 10 of PLCI selecting Next will set the current property to N7 11 of the same device TRANSLATABLE STRINGS Crimson databases are designed to support multi lingual operation whereby any string that will be presented to the user of the virtual HMI is capable of being displayed in one of many different languages To allow you to def
91. card when the drive is first mounted whether or not a write is performed Again this lock will be released within a minute or so ACCESSING THE WEB SERVER The web server can be accessed by multiple means depending on your application PAGE 248 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER ACCESSING THE WEB SERVER USING ETHERNET The principal and easiest way to access the web server is via Ethernet If your G3 is connected to the Local Area Network LAN and has a valid IP address start your Web Browser and type the G3 Ethernet IP address to connect to the G3 web server The browser will then display the menu page or require login if authentication is activated In case the TCP port defined in the Web Server module is different from 80 the IP address entered in the web browser has to be followed by a colon and the port required For example http 192 168 1 10 81 UsiNG MODEMS The second way to access the web server is via a modem connection The G3 supports multiple types of modems such as Landline GSM and GPRS The G3 Ethernet port does NOT have to be activated if you only plan to access the web server via modem Please refer to the Advanced Communication Working With Modems section for more details about modem configuration For a PPP and modem server configuration once the PC and the modem are connected the IP address required in the browser is NOT the G3 Ethernet port IP address but the L
92. certain PCs Tactical Software s Serial IP is thus the only package that we are able to support and the following information assumes that you are using this package To create a virtual serial port open Serial IP s configuration screen and select the name of the COM port you wish to define This will typically be the first free COM port after those allocated to the physical ports and modems installed in your PC Next enter the IP address of the Master and enter the TCP IP port number that you allocated when sharing the port The example below is configured as required by the previous samples in this document Finally ensure Raw TCP Connection is selected and close the Serial IP dialog Serial IP Control Panel 4 1 2 22 IP Address of Server Port Number 182 3 200 52 4004 Configuration Wizard Credentials 4 No Login Required Use Windows Credentials Prompt at Login Prompt Now Use Credentials Below Usemame Password zl Connection Protocol C Telnet C Telnet with CE Padding SEES 1 Raw TCP Connection Port Monitor COM Port Options DTR modem escape Licensing DSR always high DCD always high Advanced Restore Failed Connections Cose Hep About You will now be able to configure any Windows based software to use the newly cr
93. data low value 30 000 R W DataLo2 Output 2 data low value 30 000 R W DataLo3 Output 3 data low value 30 000 R W DataLo4 Output 4 data low value 30 000 R W DataHil Output 1 data high value 30 000 R W DataHi2 Output 2 data high value 30 000 R W DataHi3 Output 3 data high value 30 000 R W DataHi4 Output 4 data high value 30 000 R W OutputLol Output 1 output low value R W OutputLo2 Output 2 output low value R W OutputLo3 Output 3 output low value R W OutputLo4 Output 4 output low value R W OutputHil Output 1 output high value R W OutputHi2 Output 2 output high value R W OutputHi3 Output 3 output high value R W OutputHi4 Output 4 output high value i R W Dependent on the output type selected TYPE RANGE 0 5 V 0 to 5 000 1 mV 0 10 V 0 to 10 000 mV 10 V 10 000 to 10 000 1 mV 0 20mA 0 to 20 000 uA 4 20mA 4 000 to 20 000 uA RESOLUTION PAGE 58 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSOUT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING ALARMS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS Alarml Output 1 alarm status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm2 Output 2 alarm status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm3 Output 3 alarm status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm4 Output 4 alarm status 0 or 1 bit R REVISION 6 PAGE 59 CSDIO DIGITAL I O MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CSDIO DIGITAL I O MODULE PROGRAMMING To access a module s conf
94. difficult to edit the most deeply nested primitives EDITING PRIMITIVES In addition to the above primitives can be edited in various ways The various clipboard commands on the Edit menu eg Cut Copy and Paste or the corresponding toolbar icons can be used to duplicate items or move them around on a page or between pages The Duplicate command can be used to perform a Copy operation immediately followed by a Paste operation Note that when a Paste is performed Crimson will offset the newly pasted item if it will exactly overlay an item of the same type more detailed properties of a primitive can be edited by double clicking the primitive or by using the Properties command on the Edit menu A dialog box will be displayed allowing all of the primitives to be accessed The properties associated with each primitive will be described below DEFINING COLORS Many properties of primitives relate to the colors in which the primitive is to be drawn The example below shows one of the fill colors from a Rectangle primitive Fill Color 1i Fixed m Gray Fick PAGE 164 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI DEFINING FILL PATTERNS You will note that the color property is presented by means of a drop down menu button a drop down list and the Pick button The drop down menu is used to select the color mode which can be any one ofthe following e In Fixed mode the col
95. earlier section of the manual that refers to Data Tags for more information Note that the existence of this primitive explains why one must enter minimum and maximum values for formulae when such tags can never be the subject of data entry If such limits were not defined how would Crimson know how to scale the bar THE RICH SLIDER PRIMITIVES slider that can either display a value or allow it to be manipulated by touching a The Vertical Slider primitive displays value typically from an integer tag as a specific location on the primitive or by pressing buttons at either end The Horizontal Slider primitive displays a value typically from an integer tag as Lr a slider that can either display a value or allow it to be manipulated by touching a specific location on the primitive or by pressing buttons at either end Just as with other rich primitives the slider primitives are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties PAGE 188 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The first of these pages 1s shown below Vertical Slider Properties Properties Entry Format Data Source Value Speed Pick Data Entry m Type Touch with Buttons
96. edited via the command found on the Transform menu THE TANK PRIMITIVES The Conical Tank primitive is a conical tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected additional handles appear allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handles as required The Round Bottomed Tank primitive is a tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected an additional handle appears allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handle as required The properties for these primitives need little further explanation THE SIMPLE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES The Simple Vertical Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a vertical bar graph between specified minimum and maximum values An additional property allows the primitive s border to be displayed or hidden The Simple Horizontal Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a horizontal bar graph between specified minimum and maximum values An additional property allows the primitive s border to be displayed or hidden REVISION 6 PAGE 139 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive Simple Vertical Bar Graph Properties Control TankLevel Pi Value Minimum General o Edit il Maximum General 1000 Edit m Format Show Border
97. element 3 This syntax results in something similar to the FOR NEXT loop found in BASIC and other such languages The architecture of the for loop statement is as follow for initialization condition control actionl Using this statement the example given above can be rewritten as ints il X for i t 0 1 lt 10 i t Data i return t REVISION 6 PAGE 233 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER You will notice that the for statement contains three distinct elements each separated by semicolons The first element 1s the initialization step which is performed once when the loop first begins the next is the condition which is tested at the start of each loop iteration to see 1f the loop should continue the final element is the induction step which is used to make a change to the control variable to move the loop on to its next iteration Again remember that if you want more than one action to be included in the loop include them in curly brackets THE Do LooP This type of loop is similar to the while loop except that the condition is tested at the end of the loop This means that the loop will always execute at least once The architecture of the do loop statement is as follow do actionl while condition The example below shows the example from above rewritten to use a do loop int 0 t 0 do 4 t
98. execute in the foreground or background as defined by the program s properties USING FUNCTIONS Crimson provides a number of predefined functions that can be used to perform various operations These functions are defined in detail in the Function Reference They are invoked using a syntax similar to that for programs with any arguments to the function being enclosed within the parentheses For example SetLanguage 1 will set the Master language to 1 OPERATOR PRIORITY assignment operators fall into Group 14 In other words they will be evaluated after all other operators in an action They are also unique in that they group right to left This means that code such as 1 942 43 0 can be used to clear all three tags at once NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e operator can now be used instead of the operator PAGE 270 http www redlion net controller USING RAW PORTS CONFIGURING A SERIAL PORT USING RAW PORTS In order to allow customers to implement simple ASCII protocols without having to ask Red Lion to develop custom drivers Crimson provides a new facility whereby the software s programming language can be used to directly control either serial ports or TCP IP network sockets This functionality known as raw port access replaces the driver and functions used to support the Roll Your Own Protocol facility within Edict 97 It also replaces th
99. for adding tags to a page It first displays the dialog box shown below to allow tag selection and then creates one of the five tag text primitives described in the next section The new primitive will be configured so as to display the tag in question using its label and its formatting properties as defined when the tag was created Select Tag xj r Tag List co X TankLevel Create Tag Flag Variable Ed Create THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES The tag text primitives are used to display or edit an expression in textual form Primarily they are used to display tags in which case the default format is taken from the Format tab associated with that tag in the Data Tags window If a non tag expression is entered or if you want the formatting to differ from the default values for a tag the format data can be overridden as required There is one type of tag text for each tag family The Flag Text primitive is used to display a true or false condition The nteger Text primitive is used to display an integer expression The Real Text primitive is used to display a floating point expression The Multi Text primitive is used to display a multi state condition The String Text primitive is used to display a string expression The properties of a tag text primitive are displayed using three tabbed pages PAGE 180 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTI
100. high alarm the alarm will become active when the tag exceeds the alarm s value but will only deactivate when the tag falls below the value by an amount greater than or equal to the alarm s hysteresis Remember that the property always acts to maintain an alarm once the alarm is activated and not to modify the point at which the activation occurs remainder of the properties are as described for the Alarms tab of flag tags THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of an integer variable or formula contains the following properties Osa vinaxi a 4 2 er Taggers alarm 2 alarm 1 Format PAGE 120 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING MULTI TAGS e The Trigger Mode property is as described for the Alarm tabs The Delay property is as described for a flag tag s Alarms tab e Action property is used to indicate what action should be performed when the trigger is activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports EDITING MULTI TAGS You will recall that multi tags represent a 32 bit signed value but are used to select between one of a number of text strings The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing a multi tag THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of a mu
101. index number switch Tag Look a the tag index case 0 Tag index is 0 if Alarm Alarm number is 1 GotoPage Helpl break case 9 Tag index is 9 if Alarm 2 Alarm number is 2 GotoPage Help2 break default Tag index not found GotoPage NoHelp In this sample if alarm 1 of the tag with index 0 is selected in the alarm viewer and the operator presses the Help button the display will go to the page with name Helpl If alarm 2 of the tag with index 9 is selected in the alarm viewer and the operator presses the Help button the display will go to the page with name Help2 In the event another alarm is selected and the Help button is pressed the display will go to the page with name NoHelp Note GotoPage functions can be replaced by ShowPopup functions to display a popup window instead of a page Note The index number of a tag can be found in the status bar in the Data Tags when a tag is selected THE ALARM TICKER PRIMITIVE The Alarm Ticker primitive scrolls through the active alarms in the system It takes up a single line and is typically placed at the bottom of the display perhaps on every page It does not allow the operator to accept the alarms REVISION 6 PAGE 195 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The properties of the alarm ticker are displayed on three tabbed pages The first of these pages 15 shown below
102. is such a value required directly emulate GAF use a program similar to the example shown above but store the received string in a string tag and increment an integer tag Such direct emulation is not recommended as you will nearly always then have a trigger to respond to the change in the sequence number in which case you might as well handle this logic within the communications program e Crimson s enhanced programming support allows much higher performance levels when using raw port drivers Performance typically exceeds that of the equivalent Edict configuration by an order of magnitude or more REVISION 6 PAGE 273 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES USED SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE The following pages describe the various system variables that exist within Crimson These system variables can be invoked within actions or expressions as described in the previous two chapters HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES USED System variables are used either to reflect the state of the system or to modify the behavior of the system in some way The former type of variable will be read only while the latter type can have a value assigned to it REVISION 6 PAGE 275 ACTIVEALARMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ACTIVEALARMS DESCRIPTION Returns a count of the currently active alarms VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only PAGE 276 http www redlion net controlle
103. may be used to limit controller power due to process disturbances or setpoint changes Enter the safe output power limits for the process You may enter values in excess of 100 and 100 to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwise limit the output to less than their maximums The Cool Low Limit and Cool High Limit properties may be used to limit controller power due to process disturbances or setpoint changes Enter the safe output power limits for the process You may enter values in excess of 100 and 100 to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwise limit the output to less than their maximums TRANSFER GRAPH The power transfer graph illustrates the results of changes made to the power settings The blue line represents the cooling while the red line represents the heating THE ALARMS TAB F Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edt View Link Help 2 LEDs outputs Alarms Power control General 1 i 1 Set Output To 0 00 Latching ven cars NM The four soft process alarms may be used to monitor process status and may be used to actuate the module s physical outputs Otherwise the bit alone may be monitored via the system itself or via external devices The Mode property determines what behavior the a
104. module Selecting allows modification and download of databases at will without accidentally overwriting the output values Data 1 to Data 4 properties are the initial output values used for Output 1 to Output 4 respectively These values are scaled as per the Data Low Data High Output Low and Output High properties OUTPUT ACTION The output will rail at the Output Low and Output High values i e If a Data value that is less than the Data Low value is written to the module the output will remain at Output Low and the alarm will turn on Conversely if a Data value that is greater than Data High value is written to the module the output will remain at Output High and the alarm will turn on Output OutputHigh Output Low Data Value Data Low Data High Alarm OFF ON REVISION 6 PAGE 57 CSOUT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers DATA DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS Datal Output 1 scaled value DataLol to DataHil R W Data2 Output 2 scaled value DataLo2 to DataHi2 R W Data3 Output 3 scaled value DataLo3 to DataHi3 R W Data4 Output 4 scaled value DataLo4 to DataHi4 R W SCALING DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS DataLol Output 1
105. net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DELETEDIRECTORY NAME DELETEDIRECTORY ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name cstring The directory to be deleted DESCRIPTION Remove a directory its subdirectories and contents from the CompactFlash Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero if it fails FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success DeleteDirectory logs custom REVISION 6 PAGE 313 DELETEFILE FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DELETEFILE FILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Closes and then deletes a file located on the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result DeleteFile hFile PAGE 314 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DEVCTRL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA DEVCTRL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION device int The index of the d
106. not allow the operator to accept the alarms The Event Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to view the events recorded in the system s event log It will always take up the whole of the display width but can be restricted to less than the full height if required If you use manual accept alarms in your system you should provide a page that contains an alarm viewer to make sure the operator can accept these alarms You may also wish to add the alarm ticker to other pages to make the operator aware of alarms while they are viewing other pages Similarly if you use events you should provide a page that contains an event viewer to allow the operator to see what events have occurred PAGE 148 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES Each page has a number of properties that can be accessed via the Page menu Actions On Select None Parent Page 7 Remove one Next Page None had On Tick None Previous Page x Timeout 4 r Miscellaneous aaa Period 0 secs Entry Order Rows Then Columns Timeout Mone Update Rate standard m Cancel e On Select and On Remove properties are used to define actions to be performed when the page is first selected for display or when the page is re
107. of a value coupled with noisy signal processes may cause the output to fluctuate too greatly yielding poor control Setting the time to zero disables derivative action The optimal Derivative Time may be established by invoking auto tune The value is adjustable from 0 to 600 0 seconds REVISION 6 PAGE 21 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING The Power Filter is a time constant entered in seconds that dampens the calculated output power Increasing the value increases the dampening effect Generally a Power Filter in the range of one twentieth to one fiftieth of the controller s integral time or process time constant is effective Values longer than these may cause controller instability due to the added lag effect THE POWER TAB 3P Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Vew Link 2 e j Power Transfer Output Offset 0 00 Output Deadband Output Heat Gain 100 00 Output Cool Gain Heat Low Limit 0 00 9 amp Cool Low Limits Heat High Limit 100 00 Cool High Limit Transfer Graph LEDs outputs Alarms Power control General OVER caes NUM POWER TRANSFER The Output Offset value effectively shifts the zero output point of the module s output power calculation This feature is most commonly used in proportional only applications to remove steady state error The Output Deadband property defines the are
108. or data manipulation operations based upon any data items within the system They serve to extend the functionality of Crimson beyond that of the standard functions included in the software thereby ensuring that even the most complex applications can be tackled with ease DATA LOGGER This icon is used to create and manage data logs each of which can record any number of variables to the Master s CompactFlash card Data may be recorded as quickly as once per second The recorded values will be stored in CSV comma separated variable files that can easily be imported into applications such as Microsoft Excel The files can be accessed by swapping out the CompactFlash card by mounting the card as a drive on a PC connected on the Master s USB port or by accessing them via Crimson s web server via the Ethernet port WEB SERVER This icon is used to configure Crimson s web server and to create and edit web pages The web server is capable of providing remote access to the Master via a number of mechanisms First you can use Crimson to create automatic web pages which contain lists of tags each formatted according to the tag s properties Second you can create a custom site using a third party PAGE 10 http www redlion net controller CRIMSON BASICS SELECTING THE MODULAR CONTROLLER HTML editor such as Microsoft FrontPage and then include special text to instruct Crimson to insert live tag values Finally yo
109. or hide the regression line for the data sets If the line is enabled the software will calculate a best fit line based upon the least squares method and draw it on top of the data sets e The remaining properties are used to define the background color of the primitive and whether or not an outline should be drawn around its outer edge The Colors tab defines the colors of the various chart elements for this graph Graph Properties Format Colors Data Points Fill Style Solid Color E Fill Color 1 Fixed Mi red Pick Color 2 v Fixed Black 71 Pick Data Line Line Style Solid Color Line Color Fixed Regression Line Line Style soia Color 71 Line Color Fixed im White zi Pick PAGE 176 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI The Data Points properties are used to define the pattern and colors used to create the data point markers These properties will only be accessible if the chart has these data point markers enabled The Data Line properties are used to define the format and color of the line drawn between the data points These properties will only be accessible if the chart has this line enabled The Regression Line properties are used to define the format and color of the line drawn as a best fit to the data points These properties will only be accessible if the chart has
110. or out as required and may thus choose to show more or less data The Show Channels and Show Item properties are as defined for the data logger primitive e The Show Data property indicates whether or not tag values from visible traces should be displayed at the bottom of the viewer The value will be the latest sample value in live mode or the value at the crossing point of the trace and the cursor when the cursor is used The Label Font property is used to define the font used to draw the various labels that adorn the primitive The default font will typically be too large for applications where the primitive does not take up the entire screen The Fill Format properties define the background of the primitive Please make sure that the background color is not identical to a pen color otherwise the trace will not appear The time page is used to specify the time and date format that will be used to indicate the extremities of the displayed data PAGE 202 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The gridline page defines the horizontal and vertical divisions to be shown on the trend viewer cer Trend Viewer Properties Properties Time Gridines Pens Cursor r Major Data Gridlines Divisions Line Color Fixed a Silver 71 Pich 1 m Minor Data Gridlines Divisions il Line Color Fixed Black 71 Pick m Time Gridli
111. or when the user deselected the field by selecting another The actions may invoke any of the various functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or may run a program PAGE 182 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e The On Entry Complete and On Entry Error properties are used respectively to define actions to be executed when data entry is completed successfully or when an invalid value is entered The actions may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or may run a program The Keypad Type property is used to select the type of keypad to be displayed when the value is edited By default a full keypad with raise and lower keys will be shown The options available will vary according to the primitive type The Keypad Style property is used to override the default color scheme associated with the popup keypad and to substitute a high contrast version in its place This is used in low visibility applications such as direct sunlight The third page varies according to the primitive in question and displays the same information as the Format tab of the associated tag type Different sections of the page will be enabled according to the settings provided for the Get Label and Get Format properties The example below sho
112. overlay an item of the same type The various formatting properties eg fill pattern outline color text justification and so on can be changed by selecting a primitive and then either clicking the various buttons in the appropriate toolboxes or by using the associated commands on the Format menu If multiple primitives have been selected Crimson will apply the changes to all selected primitives The more detailed properties of a primitive can be edited by double clicking the primitive or by using the Properties command on the Edit menu A dialog box will be displayed allowing all of the primitives to be accessed The properties associated with each primitive will be described below PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each primitive found in the drawing toolbox THE LINE PRIMITIVE The Line primitive is line drawn between two points Its only property is style of line to be used In addition to the solid colors shown on the line toolbox a number of dotted styles can also be accessed via the properties dialog box THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES The Rectangle primitive is a rectangle with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Round Rectangle primitive is similar to the rectangle but has rounded corners When the primitive is selected an additional handle appears al
113. red squares ie at the bottom of the z order In the second example it has been moved to the front of the order and appears in front of the other figures REVISION 6 PAGE 163 GROUPING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER To move items the z order select the items and then use the various commands on the Arrange menu The Move Forward and Move Backward commands move the selection one step in the indicated direction while the Move To Front and Move To Back commands move the selection to the indicated end of the z order Alternatively if you have a mouse that is equipped with a wheel the wheel can be used to move the selection Scrolling up moves the selection to the back of the z order scrolling down moves the selection to the front GROUPING PRIMITIVES If you have several primitives that you wish to treat as a single object you may select them as described above and then use the Group command on the Arrange menu You can perform the same operation by pressing the Ctr1 G key combination Once a group has been created it can be moved sized and copied just like a single object A group can be broken into its component primitives by selecting it and using the Ungroup command or ctr1 u key combination Note that groups can comprise both primitives and other groups and that groups can be nested indefinitely You should typically avoid excessive levels of grouping however as it can make it
114. region The alarm is automatically disabled when a setpoint change occurs or when the module is first powered up This prevents nuisance alarms from occurring The alarm remains disabled until the process enters a non alarm state The next time the measured value enters an alarm condition the alarm will activate accordingly The AlarmAccept bit disables the alarm regardless of state If the alarm condition exists and the bit is written to a 0 the alarm activates Once activated the alarm stays active until accepted The alarm is automatically disabled when a setpoint change occurs or when the module is first powered up This prevents nuisance alarms from occurring The alarm remains disabled until the process enters a non alarm state The next time the measured value enters an alarm condition the alarm will activate accordingly Momentarily writing the AlarmAccept bit to 1 turns off an active alarm If the alarm condition still exists the alarm remains off and is placed into standby mode That is the alarm will remain off until the alarm condition goes away and is then reentered If the AlarmAccept bit remains 1 the alarm is disabled and will not function REVISION 6 PAGE 41 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER INPUT FAULT The Input Fault section is used to define the response of the CSSG module s control outputs
115. require that auto tune be reinitialized An auto tune request cycle looks like the following ReqTune PLC L i i 1 AckTune module _ EA 1 I I 1 1 1 I 1 TuneDone module ME 1 p 4 1 kot 3 b o4 kK ff 1 2 34 5 PAGE 44 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING 1 PLC sets ReqTune high 2 Module starts auto tuning sets AckTune high 3 Auto tune is complete AckTune goes low TuneDone goes high 4 PLC sees TuneDone high sets ReqTune low 5 Module sees ReqTune go low and sets the TuneDone low REVISION 6 PAGE 45 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers Decimal places are used to denote resolution only and are not read or written ie a Power value of 10000 is interpreted as 100 0096 LOOP STATUS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PV Process Value The value being controlled by the PID loop R Input 1 scaled value R Input2 Input 2 scaled value R Output Output Power Calculated output power of the PID loop 200 00 R prior to Gain Offsets and Limits RevPower Output applied to channels assigned for Reverse 0 100 00 R
116. scope of this manual Rather the aim is to provide a quick overview of the facilities available so that the interested user might experiment further MULTIPLE ACTIONS The simplest type of program comprises a list of actions with each action taking up a single line and being followed by a semicolon of the various actions defined in the Writing Actions section are available for use Simple programs like this are typically used where combining the actions in a single action definition would otherwise prove unreadable REVISION 6 PAGE 229 PROGRAMMING TIPS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The sample shown below sets several variables and then changes the display page Motorl 0 Motor2 1 Motor3 0 GotoPage Pagel The actions will be executed in order and the program will then return to the caller IF STATEMENTS This type of statement is used within a program to make a decision The construct consists of an if statement with a condition in parentheses followed by an action or actions to be executed if the condition is true If more than one action is specified each should be placed on a separate line and curly brackets should be used to group the statements together An optional else clause can be used to provide for code to be run if the condition is false The architecture of the if statement is as follow if condition actionl else action2
117. tab of a string formula contains the following properties Z gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 View Tag Link Help t 25 To include this tag in custom web page use OVER CARS NOM e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked together using math operators or functions In the example above the tag is set equal to the combination of two strings variables separated by a space For more information on the operators and functions that can be used with strings refer to the Writing Expressions section and the Function Reference at the end of this document e The Simulation property is as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a string array contains the following properties Edit Tag Link Help OSa vsbhaxie 4 er Array Data Mapping vici 0000 Edt Elements 16 stings Encoding unpacked Accessi Read and Write Storage NowRetentive 7 16 characters i Read adaptively 1 strings To include this tag in a custom web page use 211 cacar The Length and Encoding properties are as described for string variables remainder of the properties are as described for flag arrays REVISION 6 PAGE 127 EDIT
118. tag in a custom web page use APS NUM e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the Master If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected Encoding property is used to specify how text will be packed into mapped registers that contain more than 8 bits of data Selecting unpacked will store one character per register no matter how large the register leaving the high order bits empty Selecting low to high packed mode will store one character in each 8 bits of the target register storing the first character in the lowest order bits Selecting high to low packed mode will store one character in each 8 bits of the target register storing the first character in the highest order bits e The Length property is used to indicate how many characters of storage should be allocated for this string A value need only be entered if you have configured the variable for retentive storage Strings that are kept in the Master s RAM and not committed to FLASH have no practical limit on their length PAGE 126 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING STRING TAGS The remainder of the properties are as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data
119. tag to be changed value int or real The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function sets the specified tag to the specified value It differs from the more normally used assignment operator in that it deletes any queued writes to this tag and replaces them with an immediate write of the specified value It is thus used in situations where Crimson s normal write behavior is not required FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Set Tagl 100 PAGE 404 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SETINTTAG INDEX VALUE SETINTTAG INDEX VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number value int The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function sets the tag specified by index to the specified value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetIntTag 5 1234 Set the tag of index 5 with value 1234 REVISION 6 PAGE 405 SETLANGUAGE CODE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SETLANGUAGE CODE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION code int The language to be selected DESCRIPTION Set the terminal s current language to that indicated by code FUNCTION TYPE This function is act
120. the module performs on off control during auto tune it is important to set a suitable On Off Hysteresis value prior to invoking auto tune Customization of the PID set that auto tune will yield is possible by adjusting the Tune Response setting The Tune Response setting can be set to Very Aggressive Aggressive Default Conservative or Very Conservative Further the Tune Response setting can be adjusted by writing 0 4 respectively to the Tune Response register INVOKING AUTO TUNE The auto tune sequence uses request acknowledgement handshaking To invoke auto tune write the ReqTune bit to a 1 The module signifies that auto tune is running by setting the AckTune bit high When auto tune is complete the TuneDone bit goes high The external logic should be written to turn off the auto tune request bit when the TuneDone bit goes high At this point the module sets the AckTune bit back to 0 If for some reason auto tune fails to complete TuneDone and TuneFail bits both go high This situation may occur if for example an input fault occurs and will require that auto tune be reinitialized An auto tune request cycle looks like the following ReqTune PLC L i i 1 AckTune module _ EA 1 I I 1 1 1 I 1 TuneDone module ME 1 p 4 1 kot 3 b o4 kK ff 1 2 34 5 PAGE 28 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING 1 PLC sets
121. the operation again In practice communications updates normally take place quickly enough that even the most nimble fingered operator will be hard pressed to get the message to appear but since it may on occasions be seen it is worth explaining A slightly more complex issue comes about if the action defined by a page s On Select property is unable to proceed because it also finds that required data is not available Here Crimson will wait up to thirty seconds for the data to arrive If it does not the action will not be performed and a TIMEOUT message will be displayed for the operator This timeout mechanism is required to avoid problems should a communications link become severed NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Pages no longer have text and graphic layers as all primitives are graphical in nature This means that the concept of a page format is similarly redundant e Page categories have been replaced with system primitives Where Edict would use an entire page for its alarm viewer for example the corresponding system primitive can be used to allocate as little or as much of the display as is required The actions defined by double clicking a key replace the global and local event maps If your application used more than one row per event you will most likely need to use a program to implement the required logic e Events such as comms update complete and one second tick h
122. this bit to a 1 to invoke manual 0 or 1 bit R W mode In manual mode writing to the Power register controls the output power ReqTune Request auto tune Write this bit to a 1 to invoke auto tune 0 or 1 bit R W ReqUserPID Request User PID Set High loads User Values into 0 or 1 bit R W Active set Low loads Auto Tune Results into Active set LOOP ALARMS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS AlarmDatal Alarm 1 Value R W AlarmData2 Alarm 2 Value R W AlarmData3 Alarm 3 Value R W AlarmData4 Alarm 4 Value 3 R W AlarmHystl Alarm 1 Hysteresis value R W AlarmHyst2 Alarm 2 Hysteresis value R W AlarmHyst3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis value R W AlarmHyst4 Alarm 4 Hysteresis value R W AlarmAcceptl Alarm 1 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept2 Alarm 2 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept3 Alarm 3 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept4 Alarm 4 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W InputAccept Input s out of range alarm accept 0 or 1 bit R W LooP PID DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS TuneCode Tune Response Code 0 4 R W UserConstP User Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R W UserConstl User Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R W UserConstD User Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R W UserFilter User Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R W AutoConstP Auto tuned Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R AutoConstI Auto tuned Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R REVISION 6 PAGE 47 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTRO
123. to allow tag selection and then creates one of the five tag text primitives described in the next section The new primitive will be configured so as to display the tag in question using its label and its formatting properties as defined when the tag was created REVISION 6 PAGE 141 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Select Tag x List X TankLevel Create Tag Flag Variable Create THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES The tag text primitives are used to display or edit an expression in textual form Primarily they are used to display tags in which case the default format is taken from the Format tab associated with that tag in the Data Tags window If a non tag expression is entered or if you want the formatting to differ from the default values for a tag the format data can be overridden as required There is one type of tag text for each tag family The Flag Text primitive is used to display a true or false condition The Integer Text primitive is used to display an integer expression The Real Text primitive is used to display a floating point expression The Multi Text primitive is used to display a multi state condition The String Text primitive is used to display a string expression The properties of a tag text primitive are displayed using two tabbed pages PAGE 142 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONO
124. to recover more quickly and without user intervention The Include Image Files property is used to indicate that Crimson should save within the database file a copy of any disk based images that have been imported into the project By default the filename alone of the image is stored thereby requiring you to have the images available on disk whenever you are working on the project If you wish to create a single file that contains all the required data for the project enable this option Note that databases that contain image files will typically be very large and may prevent upload support from working The Store Relative paths property indicates whether or not image paths should be stored relative to the mage Directory Enabling this setting allows images to be stored in different directories on different PCs without the need to browse for each individual image when moving between machines Image Directory specifies the root directory to be used when loading images if relative paths have been enabled Note that this is a per machine setting not a property of each individual database file You should thus select a directory below which the images for all databases will be stored e The Maintenance buttons can be used to remove unused fonts or images from the database thereby reducing file size and lowering memory usage You should typically use these options before releasing a database for use in the field as they wi
125. treated as unsigned PV ReqSP ActSP and AlarmData 1 4 when configured for absolute operation REVISION 6 PAGE 33 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING The CSSG module s parameters are broken into groups each with their own page Use the tabs on the left hand side of the window to view the various pages THE GENERAL TAB amp gt Untitled File Crimson ziBixi Edt View Link 2 212 2 Inputs Range mV Excitation Display Low Display High Signal Low Signal High r Operation Control Type PY Assignment PV Limit Low PY Limit High Input Filter Decimal Places Reverse Only Input 100 00 100 00 1 0 secs Process Units 2 Initialization SmartOnOff Include in Download No Reverse LEDs outputs alarms Power Control General Direct 50 00 9 Input 1 x Download Scaling OVER CAPS NUM INPUTS The input parameters section contains settings for both inputs If the module does not have the optional secondary input fitted the secondary input parameters are ignored e The Range property is used to configure the input for various signal levels This allows the module to reconfigure its A D converter for optimal resolution e The Ex
126. used to emulate a pushbutton The options are shown below cerRectangle Properties x Format Action Action Mode Operation Action Details Button Type Toggle Button Data Tag output Pick r Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit jl Remote Enabled x Cancel Set As Defaults e The Button Type property is used to define the primitive s behavior BUTTON TYPE THE BUTTON WILL Toggle Change the data state when the primitive is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Set the data to 0 when the primitive is released Turn On Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the primitive is pressed e The Button Data property is used to define the data to be changed In the example above the primitive will toggle the value of the output tag PAGE 168 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI ACTION DESCRIPTIONS THE CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to write an integer value to a data item The options are shown below ePRectangle Properties xj Format Action m Action Mode Operation Action Details Write To v Tag MotorSpeed Pick Data w General 100 Edit Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled
127. variables may optionally be initialized when they are declared by following the variable name with and the value to be assigned Variables that are not initialized in this manner are set to zero or an empty string as appropriate Note that local variables are truly local in both scope and lifetime This means that they cannot be referenced outside the program and they do not retain their values between function invocations If a function is called recursively each invocation has its own variables LooP CONSTRUCTS The three different loop constructs can be used to perform a given section of code while a certain condition is true The while loop tests its condition before the code is executed while the do loop tests the condition afterwards The for loop is a quicker way of defining a while loop allowing you to combine three common elements into one statement You should note that some care is required when using loops within your programs as you may make a programming error which results in a loop that never terminates Depending on the situation in which the program is invoked this may seriously disrupt the Master s user interface activity or its communications Loops which iterate too many times may also cause performance issues for the subsystem that invokes them THE WHILE LOOP This type of loop repeats the action that follows it while the condition in the while statement remains true If the condition is never true the action wi
128. via a dedicated CompactFlash drive connected to your PC If you use this method be sure to instruct Windows to format the card using FAT16 For very small or very large cards Windows will most likely choose the wrong format by default Worse still some versions of Windows Explorer will not allow you to override the default format forcing you to use the command line version FORMAT instead REVISION 6 PAGE 15 UPDATING VIA COMPACTFLASH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SENDING THE TIME AND DATE The Link Send Time command can be used to set the Master s clock to match that of the PC on which Crimson is executing Obviously make sure your clock is right before you do this UPDATING VIA COMPACTFLASH If you need to update the database within a unit that is already installed at a customer s site Crimson allows you to save a copy of the database to a CompactFlash card ship that card to your customer and have the G3 load the database from that card The process is performed via the Save Image command on the File menu aix Save in J Desktop Jedem fr jp Work Docs Manual The Network This Computer Documents Documents This Computer A we 5 3 7 File name oxd 220 The Network Saveastpe Image Files cd z 2 The Save Image command will create Crimson database image file with a CDI extension It will also create three other files with extensions of BIN LDR and The imag
129. will open at the last accessed page allowing an image to be selected NEZTITTEIIITTITITTTO x Preview Symbols Options 96069009 QoQuugeo 906006200 2 nei dm m eo fd vf E Fri Double click on image to select and then drag out required size of image as you would when inserting any other kind of primitive The software will automatically create a Picture primitive containing the selected image You should refer to the later sections of this manual for details on how this primitive might be further manipulated REVISION 6 PAGE 161 SELECTING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SELECTING PRIMITIVES To select a display primitive simply move your mouse pointer over the primitive in question and perform a left click You will notice that while your pointer is hovering over a primitive a bounding rectangle is drawn in blue to help show what will be selected When the actual selection is performed the rectangle will change to red and handles will appear so as to allow you to re size the primitive as required If you find that the primitive you want to select is hidden below another primitive press the Alt key to allow the selection to be made To select several primitives either drag out a selection re
130. 000 or above is recommended when using this method as earlier versions of Windows may otherwise lock the CompactFlash card and disrupt data logging The preferred method is to use the web server as described in the next chapter With the web server enabled log files can be accessed over the Master s Ethernet port using either a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or by using the automated process implemented by the WebSync utility that is provided with the Crimson configuration software e Another preferred method especially over networks is to use the Synchronization Manager This advanced feature uses the File Transfer Protocol FTP to synchronize the Master s CompactFlash card with an FTP server The Master in this case will be an FTP client thus allowing the Master to initiate the file transfer as opposed to the PC initiating the transfer via WebSync Please refer to the section Advanced Communication Configuring the Synchronization Manager of this manual for details on this feature UsING WEBSYNC The WebSync utility which will be stored in the directory specified when the software was installed can be executed to synchronize a directory on a PC with the contents of an Master s data logs You may decide to configure an application such as the Windows Scheduler or perhaps a cron daemon to run this utility on a regular basis or you may use a command line switch to instruct WebSync to perform the polli
131. 1 to invoke auto tune O or 1 bit R W ReqUserPID Request User PID Set High loads User Values into Active 0 or 1 bit R W set Low loads Auto Tune Results into Active set LOOP ALARMS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS AlarmDatal Alarm 1 Value R W AlarmData2 Alarm 2 Value R W AlarmData3 Alarm 3 Value M R W AlarmData4 Alarm 4 Value R W AlarmHystl Alarm 1 Hysteresis value gt R W AlarmHyst2 Alarm 2 Hysteresis value R W AlarmHyst3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis value R W AlarmHyst4 Alarm 4 Hysteresis value R W AlarmAcceptl Alarm 1 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept2 Alarm 2 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept3 Alarm 3 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W AlarmAccept4 Alarm 4 Accept bit 0 or 1 bit R W HCMLimitLo Heater Current Low Limit Alarm value 0 100 00 mA R W HCMLimitHi Heater Current Low Limit Alarm value 0 100 00 mA R W HCMAcceptLo Heater Current Low Limit Alarm Accept 0 or 1 bit R W HCMAcceptHi Heater Current High Limit Alarm Accept 0 or 1 bit R W InputAccept Input out of range alarm accept 0 or 1 bit R W REVISION 6 PAGE 31 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Loop PID DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS TuneCode Tune Response Code 0 4 R W UserConstP User Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R W UserConstl User Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R W UserConstD User Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R W UserFilter
132. 100 00 mA that represents the allowable circuit off current If the heater current monitor input measures a current value greater than the Limit Low value during the off state of the output the alarm becomes active The Limit High property is the desired mA value from 0 100 00 mA that represents the required circuit on current value If the heater current monitor input measures a current value less than the Limit High value during the on state of the output the alarm becomes active The Latching property determines whether an activated alarm will stay active until accepted To accept a latched alarm its AlarmAccept bit must be written to a 1 If latching is not selected the alarm will automatically deactivate when the alarm condition no longer exists and the AlarmAccept bit may be used as a means of disabling the alarm REVISION 6 PAGE 25 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER INPUT FAULT The Input Fault section is used to define the response of the CSPID module s control outputs in the event of an input failure The Input Fault alarm is considered a process alarm for items that may be mapped to process alarm The Set Output To property is the output value that the controller will assume in the event of an input sensor failure Values in excess of 100 and 100 may be entered to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwis
133. 13 3 65 35 0016 2006 08 01 16 28 51 55 13 3 65 35 0017 2006 08 01 16 28 52 93 45 42 39 0018 2006 08 01 16 28 53 98 50 28 96 THE REMOTE DISPLAY PRIMITIVE display to an external large display such as the BFD Big Flexible display or The Remote Display Primitive is used to send part of the operator interface LFD Large Flexible display This primitive sends the graphical information within its area to the slave large display It is used in combination with the Red Lion Big Flexible Display serial port driver This driver is selected in Communication Each pixel on the graphic area represents an LED on the remote display matrix Remote displays being monochrome in the case of a color unit controlling the display any colors will be a lit LED only black will be an off LED PAGE 198 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS More than one remote display is programmable on a single screen as each can have a single unit address The properties of the remote display are available when double clicking the primitive Display Properties Display Type Model Configuration Port 1 Address 0 Set As Defaults The Model defines the type of slave display the graphical area will be sent to The big flexible display will cover an area of 128 x 64 pixels on the screen where
134. 2 the Alarm 2 Note tag index can be found from the tag name using FindTagIndex function FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE AlarmsInTag GetAlarmTag 12 In this example the function returns the states of Alarm 1 and 2 for the tag with index 12 REVISION 6 PAGE 333 GETBATCH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETBATCH ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the name of the current batch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE CurrentBatch GetBatch PAGE 334 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The port number where the camera is connected camera int The camera number on the port param int The camera parameter to be read DESCRIPTION This function returns the value of the parameter number param for a Banner camera connected on the operator interface The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera 1s selected More than one camera can be connected under the driver The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound Please see Banner documentation for parameter numbers and details FUNCTION TYPE This function is active
135. 30 000 R W ProcessMax1 8 Desired PV at maximum input signal level 30 000 R W LinearSlopel 8 Slope value applied to PV 001 10 000 R W LinearOffsetl 8 Offset value applied to PV 30 000 R W Models with linearizer only REVISION 6 PAGE 55 CSOUT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CSOUT ANALOG OuTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING The CSOUT module s parameters are broken into two groups each with their own page Use the tabs on the left hand side of the window to view the different pages THE CONFIGURATION TAB lt ErUntitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help E 5 0 4 Properties p Output 1 Output Type Decimal Places Data Low Data High Output Low output Configuration Output Hight Output 3 Output Type 0 Decimal Places Data Low Data High Output Low Output High 10000 y oves CAPs NUM OUTPUT 1 TO OUTPUT 4 These settings allow independent customization of each output s parameters e The Output Type property is used to select between 0 5 V 0 10 V 10 V 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA outputs e The Decimal Places property is used to allow Crimson to display the data values in the proper resolution This is only used to display the appropriate resolution within Crimson and is not used within the module T
136. 3State State of Output 3 0 or 1 bit R Configuration dependent Resolution is dependent on the user scaling values PAGE 50 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSTC CSRTD TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CSTC CSRTD TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING To access a module s configuration double click it of the module parameters are visible on a single page THE CONFIGURATION TAB F Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit yew Link Osa sbax s pr General Temperature Units Fahrenhet Input Fiter 20 secs configuration p Inputs Enabled Thermocouple Slope Channel 1 V Type 21 ree Channel 2 V m roe Channela v we row Channel4 v 1 000 Channels 7 IType Channel 6 V Type 3 100 Channel7 2 Channel v i Joven cars NOM GENERAL The settings apply to all of the module s inputs e Temperature Units is used to select between the Kelvin Fahrenheit or Celsius temperature scale Filter is a time constant used to stabilize fluctuating input signals INPUTS These settings allow independent customization of each input s parameters e The Enabled property provides a means to disable unused inputs thereby increasing the rate at which the remaining inpu
137. 6 PAGE 271 USING RAW PORTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The On Update property is configured as described above while the Port property should be configured to indicate which TCP port you want the driver to monitor The driver will accept connections on this port and then call the On Update program to handle communications READING CHARACTERS To read data from a raw port a character at a time use the PortRead function as documented in the Function Reference section of this manual As with all raw port functions the port argument for this function is calculated by counting down the list of ports in the left hand pane of the Communications window with the programming port being port 1 The example below shows to use PortRead to accept characters int Data for 1 if Data PortRead 2 100 gt 0 Add code to process data Note that by passing a non zero value for the period argument the need to call the Sleep function is removed If you use a zero value for this argument you must make sure that you suspend the communications task at some point or you will disrupt system operation READING ENTIRE FRAMES To read an entire frame from a raw port use the PortInput function as documented in the Function Reference section of this manual This function allows you to specify frame delimiters the required frame length and a frame timeout thereby removing the need to w
138. 65 Comms Port Mail Manager Tl OPC Server Al Time Manager s OVER CAPS NUM To map items from the right hand pane to the items on the left simply double click them one at a time The cursor will automatically move to the next consecutive register allowing you to quickly map all of the items Instead of clicking the data in the right hand pane you may also drag and drop the data onto specific registers PAGE 6 http www redlion net controller QUICK START DOWNLOADING E Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit View Link Help Da H Zmmx s pr Available Mappings 59 Programming Port Ej f R5 232 Comms Port DF1 Master Sm pict Ew Block 1 NOO7 0000 Module Input PV X NO07 0001 Modulet Input PY2 X NO07 0002 Module X NO07 0003 Modulet Input PY X NO07 0004 Module Input PYS X 007 0005 Module Input PY6 Module Input PV7 lt Module Input PVS X N007 0010 X N007 0011 X Noo7 0012 X 07 0013 X 007 0014 X No07 0015 4 R5 485 Comms Port 658 Ethernet Y Protocol 1 F Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 E y Services A Mall Manager Tit OPC Server lil Time Manager EN ER cars NM In the example above each of the first module s input values have been mapped to registers N7 0 through N7 7 The direction of the arrows indicates that the Modular Controller will write these values into the PLC
139. 839 50gal 400 gal 75gal 10 0140303 022840 50gal 40051 75 gal 41 010303 022841 50gal 40044 75gal 12 0103 03 022842 50 gal 400 gal 75gal 13 0103 03 022843 50gal 40044 75gal 141 010303 022844 50gal 400 gal 75gal 15 01 0303 022845 50gal 400 gal 75gal 16 0103 03 022846 50gal 40044 75gal AZ 0103 03 022847 50gal 40044 75gal 18 01 0303 022848 50gal 400441 75gal 19 01 0303 022849 50gal 40044 75gal 20 010303 022880 50gal 400 gal 75gal 21 01 03 03 022851 50gal 400gal 75gal 22 010303 022852 50gal 00 75gal 23 010303 022853 50gal 400gal 75 gal 24 0103 03 022854 50gal 00 gal 75gal 25 010303 022855 50 gal 40051 75 gal z 4 47 MNo1030228 14 fa Unknown zone REVISION 6 PAGE 251 WEB SERVER SAMPLES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The picture below shows a custom page containing three tags New Page 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer iri xj File Edit Favorites Tools Help Peak A Qsearch Favorites 9 Links a Address http 192 9 200 163 user default z eso www g3panels com Tank 1 50 gal Tank 2 400 gal Tank 3 75 gal IS Microsoft FrontPage http localhost Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Frames Window Help 0 67 90 Normal Tahoma 6040 2 0 ee 2 g3 de
140. AR CONTROLLER RANDOM RANGE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION range int The range of random values to produce DESCRIPTION Returns a pseudo random value between 0 and range 1 FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Noise Random 100 PAGE 394 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE READDATA DATA COUNT READDATA DA7A COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data any First array element to be read count int Number of elements to be read DESCRIPTION Requests that count elements from array element data onwards to read on the next comms scan This function is used with arrays that have been mapped to external data and which have their read policy set to Read Manually The function returns immediately and does not wait for the data to be read FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ReadData array1 8 10 REVISION 6 PAGE 395 READFILE FILE CHARS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER READFILE FILE CHARS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as required by OpenFile chars int Number of characters to be read DESCRIPTION Reads a string up to 512 characters in length from the specified file This function does not look for a line feed and carriage return therefore allowing line read of more than 510 characters ReadFileLine limit
141. ATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of a flag formula contains the following properties E Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Edt Tag Link Help 5 aX 2 8 ee ffoi is tag a aston web pape ae fores ses om e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value that is to be represented by this tag It is typically set to a logical combination of other tags or PLC registers or to a comparison between numeric values In the example shown above the tag is configured to be true when a motor speed exceeds a certain value The Setpoint and Simulation properties are as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a flag array contains the following properties Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Edt Tag Link Help DnemH72sxmmx e t 2 o 8 Array Data scons FRET mom a 16 bts cess Resdandwte 7 NonRetentive Simulation y Communications ReadPolcy Readadaptvey z Read Ahead 3 registers Read Behind 3 registers p Actions On write ior ffoi istam we pape ue Gre ses om PAGE 110 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS e The Elements property is used to indicate how many data items the array should hold Array elements are referred to using square brackets such that Array 0 is
142. ATA TAB VARIABLES THE DATA TAB FORMULAE THE DATA TAB ARRAYS def eti dere tene e esce tree ceto co aou d a a fara eR e nee ded THEIFORMAT AB rcs het de dade E ni nri m cs ette D setocu MORE THAN TWO ALARMS VALIDATING TAGS an oa DCN CEA EXPORTING TAG MAPPINGS 22 52 6 ceo fea oa uda 130 LOGGING EVENT MESSAGES eere nnne nr rin E a HH E n 130 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS ccececceccucuvauecusueaueueeueaususaueuuaesuueusaueusausuususavausausavansas 130 CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL 133 CONTROLLING THE VIEW vc ere vow er anao E eee pa dx e A EN ERE RU cw E VR DEA Dd 133 OTHER VIEW OPTIONS eta aa e bec diee ie ee an edic 133 USING THE PAGE LIST eene meme nemen rene me nnne nn na n n a nnn 134 DISPLAY EDITOR TOQE BOXES tex ege Ee on das e bw eR va EN Fe YR AERE ER USA 134 THE DRAWING TOOLBOX det the utes Soviets er cR etta tarde ta THE FILL FORMAT TOOLBOX THE LINE FORMAT TOOLBOX THE STEXTARORMAT TOOLBOX CTI 135 THE FOREGROUND TOOLBOX faded tiunt toutou eter red ue a 135 TTHE BACKGROUND OOLBOX dtm 135 PAGE IV http www redlion net controller GETTING STARTED TABLE OF CONTENTS ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITEVE
143. Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected PAGE 238 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING DATA LOG PROPERTIES DATA Loc PROPERTIES Each data log has the following properties e The Update Type property defines if this data log will record data continuously or on a trigger edge Continuous Sample data logging saves tags values at regular time intervals as define by the Update Rate property Triggered Snapshot saves tags values when the expression in the Log Trigger property goes from false to true Since the log trigger is looking at the change in the expression only one set of data will be recorded at the time of change the expression has to return to false and back to true again to save another set Each set is a line of data in a CSV file The Update Rate property is used to indicate how often Crimson will take a sample of the data items to be logged The fastest sample rate is one second but note that using such a high rate will produce very large amounts of data All of the tags in the log will be sampled at the same rate e The Each File Holds property is used to indicate how many samples will be included in each log file When this many samples have been recorded a new log file will be created using a different na
144. C and Ctrl V MoviNG MODULES Modules may be deleted or moved through use of the Module drop down menu Simply select a module and then from the menu select Delete Move Left or Move Right MODULES To edit a specific module s properties double click it For a description of the various modules and their properties refer to the following sections REVISION 6 PAGE 17 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING The CSPID module s parameters are broken into groups each with their own page The CSPID2 module has several extra tabs for configuration of the second loop Use the tabs on the left hand side of the window to view the various pages THE GENERAL TAB Ele Edit View Link Help Deu oe x 4 pr LEDs Outputs Alarms Power Control General 1 nuto Tune Results Joven cars NM OPERATION UNITS The Control Type property allows you to choose from Heat Cool or Heat and Cool depending on the type of process to be controlled For processes other than thermal applications select Heat for reverse acting applications and Cool for direct acting applications The Type property is used to configure input for RTD Thermocouple or the proper process input type The TC RTD property is used to select the sensor standard being used The nput Filter is a t
145. CHROME VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The first page is more or less the same for all five primitive types cer Integer Text Properties xj Properties Format Data Source Value TankLevel Pick Data Entry Disabled Show Label ad Get Label From Tag Properties E Get Format From Tag Properties Text Format Font Swiss 7x8 Flash on Alarm E Foreground Black bi Background white Horizontal center E Vertical Middle m Cancel e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for an integer text primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The Show Label property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed If this property is set to yes the label will be left justified within the primitive
146. CLEAREVENTS CLEAREVENTS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Clears the list of events displayed in the event log FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ClearEvents REVISION 6 PAGE 299 CLOSEFILE FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CLOSEFILE FILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Closes a file previously opened in a call to FileOpen FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE CloseFile hFile PAGE 300 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE COMMITANDRESET CoMMITANDRESET ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION This function will force all retentive tags to be written on the internal flash memory and then will reset the unit NOTE THIS FUNCTION SHOULD IN NO CASE BE CALLED ON A REGULAR BASIS AS FREQUENT WRITING TO THE FLASH MEMORY WILL END UP IN A FAILURE THIS FUNCTION IS TO BE USED IN COMBINATION WITH SetPortConfig AND SetNetConfig SO NEW PARAMETERS ARE SAVED AND SHOULD ONLY BE CALLED ONCE FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE CommitAndReset REVISION 6 PAGE 301 COMPACTFLASHEJECT CRIM
147. CLIENT E Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Settings Programming Port 40 5 232 Comms Port VV Enable Sync Manager 48 RS 495 Comms Port mie ET pum Server IP Address Fixed 192 166 200 1 Port Number Fixed 21 Logon Username Logon Password Data Connection Keep Alive Record Log File Log Synchronization Base Directory ved Syre Penod hours T pres The Server IP address indicates the IP address of the FTP server In most applications this address will be a computer server IP address The Port Number represents the TCP port to which the Master FTP client service connects This port number is setup in the FTP server The default value is suitable for most applications e The Logon Username and Logon Password are credentials required by the server for a client to connect It has to match a user set up in the Server Both are case sensitive For anonymous login enter anonymous in Username and leave the password blank The Data Connection provides a choice between standard and PASV mode You can enable the PASV mode to have the FTP client initiate all data connections rather than waiting for incoming connections from the server This mode is sometimes required when working behind non FTP aware firewalls or when using certain forms of network address translation It is also used when working ove
148. CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI Now that you have configured your communications options and created data tags for the various items that you wish to display you can create display pages to allow the user to view or edit these data items These pages are manipulated by selecting the User Interface icon from the main screen Please note that this chapter refers specifically to the monochrome virtual HMI If you are configuring the Master to have a color display please refer to the next chapter for configuration details CONTROLLING THE VIEW By default the User Interface window shows the entire front panel of the mono HMI including the display and all the available keys If you want to allocate more of your PC s screen to show the HMI s display you can use the four different zoom levels as shown below akafa 2200 2000 qvem Pe e s e A As you can see at each level fewer keys are shown and more of window is allocated to the display itself The zoom level can be controlled from the View menu by using the magnifying glass icon or by pressing the A1t key together with the digits 1 through 4 OTHER VIEW OPTIONS As well as controlling the zoom the View menu contains the following options e The Page List command can be used to show or hide the left hand pane of the User Interface window If the page list is disabled even more space is made
149. Cancel Set As Defaults In this example setting XPos to 0 will place the image at the left of the primitive while setting it to 100 will place it at the far right Similar behavior in respect of the up and down limits of the primitive can be obtained via the value stored in YPos The fourth tab of the primitive s properties is used to control basic formatting cer Image Properties Images Additional Movement Format action m Fill Format Fill Style Solid Color m Fill Color 1 Fixed im Black Fill Color 2 veed White z Line Format Line Style Line Line Color Fixed Bn write 71 Fick Set As Defaults PAGE 212 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Fill Format properties are used to define the background pattern for the primitive Note that if you want to animate the primitive in any way you should specify some sort of background color so that the system can erase old images The Line Format properties are used to define the primitive s outline style The final tab of the primitive s properties is used to define an optional action that can be triggered when the operator touches the image You are referred to the earlier section on assigning actions to primitives for more details of how to configure this functionality THE CF IMAGE PRIMITIVE The CF Image prim
150. Crimson will always constrain resizing operations so as to ensure that primitives stay on the screen and to make sure that items do not exceed their maximum permitted size or shrink below the minimum size appropriate to their format PAGE 162 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI ALIGNING PRIMITIVES ALIGNING PRIMITIVES While the Smart Alignment options discussed above allow many alignment operations to be performed by hand there are times that you will want the software to perform the alignment for you This can be done by selecting a number of primitives starting with the primitive that you wish to use as the reference point for the alignment operation Note that the reference primitive is always shown with a double square at its center Once you have made your selection use the Align command on the Arrange menu to display the following dialog box Align to Reference Object X Horizontal c C Left Center C Right Vertical None Top Middle C Bottom Operation Move Size L Cancel The Horizontal and Vertical settings can be used to indicate what type of alignment is to be performed while the Operation setting indicates whether the primitives should be resized or moved to achieve the desired result As an example in Move mode selecting Left for Horizontal will align the left hand edges of all the primitives with th
151. Cycle Time of 10 seconds the output will be on for 6 5 seconds and off for 3 5 seconds A Cycle Time equal to or less than one tenth of the process time constant is recommended PAGE 26 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING LINEAR OUTPUT CSPID1 ONLY e The Output Type property is used to select between 0 10 V 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA outputs Make sure that the output jumpers located on the side of the module are set for the same output type e The Mapping property is used to assign the module s analog output to one of various internal properties or values eg the Mapping property should be set to Heat Power to control a heat only process via the analog output Drive Min At and Drive Max At values are used to scale the analog output The units expressed are the same as those of the Mapping value so the numerical limits vary eg values of 0 and 100 are typically used to control a valve s position in heat only applications e The Output Filter is a time constant entered in seconds that dampens the response of the analog output Increasing the value increases the dampening e The Output Deadband value can be used to prevent the analog output from changing when only small adjustments are called for This is useful in preventing mechanical wear when driving a linear input valve The analog output will not adjust unless the change called for exceeds half of deadban
152. D COMMUNICATIONS 7D USING EXPANSION CARDS i5 4 s eei oe ener vx dus uel veda ave rayon geni een 75 SHARING SERTAI PORTS iiiter Rer EE gebe E PRO 76 ENABLING TCP IP osito ce aa d nn n V a REDE ED E CREE EO RO DR DR 76 SHARING THE iced ri D D n OE C OE E RR Rt 76 CONNECTING VIA ANOTHER PORT usssssssssssessessesseseesseseeseesseseeseessassessessassessasseesaesaesaesaesatsaesaesansansateatsas 77 CONNECTING VIA ETHERNET per E EXER MXN EE ER 77 P RE VIRTUAE PORTS c A E EP E D DE D RE LE POUR 78 LIMETATIONS ss ae ev ne Eve Ev a RE t ava be QN 79 USING ELECTRONIC MAIL Qe SER deo CONFIGURING SMTP CONFIG RING SMS cec creer ro idee d e ertet eite a e t ctp est THE ADDRESS BOOK y ner dicen Oath tte e e ee WORKING WITH MODEMS nn n n d n nn SOME TYPICAL APPLICATIONS cesscssecssecssecsevcssccsecceusseusseusccusccusccusccscccssccusseusseusseuseossecaseousecseesuavsaessaes ADDING A DIAE IN CONNECTION a poete ee xo Teneo n daa e ADDING A DIAL OUT CONNECTION ADDING AN SMS CONNECTION riva rra rae ora Deva sepa pev a cov ee
153. DATA Koc 238 USING THE LOG LIST D E 238 DATA EOG PROPERTIES 5 6 ER LER Gad E De anes 239 EOGIFIEE STORAGE eee a tee e ees eee ua C da dees th ees 240 THE LOGGING PROCESS e eet oce ev ei ER e EE ET ea ee Doa Rad 241 ACCESSING LOG nennen nnnm nnn nnn nnns 241 USINGAWEBSYNG t Fea ke 242 WEBSYNCOSYNTAX v a VE E a Ea e aae o ra an 242 OPTIONAL SWITCHES 5 34 aii van va nh a n nonu nh nini na n na nan anao na aa a aa a sa sa ada Ea a ada na o 242 EXAMPLE USAGE Ue EE AN ER TR ERU ER IR RR ERR 243 REVISION 6 PAGE VII TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER NOTES FOR EDICT USERS xen v exon eve pad a gun go 243 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER 11 eene rennen nnne nnns 249 WEB SERVER PROPERTIES DENN e 245 ADDING WEB rec cweuaetaestineden chen nia E EEE 247 USING A CUSTOM WEB SITE 247 CREATING THE crai a ese ede ence n e D Mei dedi eden EMBEDDING DATA a ite ERE He ees bebe oret dee Te ted on dne DEPLOYING THE SITE
154. DE The padlock icon on the drawing toolbox can be used to add a number of primitives of the same basic type without having to click the toolbox icon for each item in turn To cancel lock mode click the padlock icon again or press the Escape key The same operation can be performed by using the Lock Mode command on the Insert menu SELECTING PRIMITIVES To select a display primitive simply move your mouse pointer over the primitive in question and perform a left click You will notice that while your pointer is hovering over a primitive PAGE 136 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI MOVING AND RESIZING a bounding rectangle is drawn in blue to help show what will be selected When the actual selection is performed the rectangle will change to red and handles will appear so as to allow you to re size the primitive as required If you find that the primitive you want to select is hidden below another primitive press the Alt key to allow the selection to be made To select several primitives either drag out a selection rectangle around the primitives you want to select or select each primitive in turn holding down the shift key to indicate that you want each primitive to be added to the selection If multiple primitives are selected the red rectangle will surround all of the primitives and the handles can then be used to resize the primitives as a group The relative size and position of the prim
155. E INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING e The Output Deadband property defines the area in which both the reverse and direct outputs are inactive known as deadband or the area in which they will both be active known as overlap A positive value results in a deadband while a negative value results in an overlap e The Output Reverse Gain defines the gain of the reverse output relative to the gain established by the Proportional Band A value of 10096 causes the reverse gain to mimic the gain determined by the proportional band A value less than 10096 can be used in applications in which the output device is oversized while a value greater than 10096 can be used when the device is undersized For the majority of applications the default value of 10096 is adequate and adjustments should only be made if the process requires it The Output Direct Gain defines the gain of the direct output relative to the gain established by the Proportional Band value of 100 causes the direct gain to mimic the gain determined by the proportional band A value less than 10096 can be used in applications in which the output device is oversized while a value greater than 100 can be used when the output device is undersized For the majority of applications the default value of 100 is adequate and adjustments should only be made if the process requires it The Reverse Low Limit and Reverse High Limit properties may be used to limit controller power due to pr
156. EM DELETE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER FTPPUTFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION server int FTP connection number always 0 loc cstring Local file name on the CompactFlash card rem cstring Remote file name on the FTP server delete int If true the source will be deleted after the transfer otherwise it will remain on the source disk DESCRIPTION This function will transfer the defined file from the operator interface CompactFlash card to the FTP server It will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise The source and destination file name can be different The remote path 1s relative to the FTP server setting root path See Synchronization Manager for details FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success FtpPutFile 0 LOGS Report txt Reports Report txt 1 In this example the file Report txt will be sent to the FTP server and deleted from the CompactFlash Card upon success of the transfer PAGE 332 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETALARMTAG INDEX GETALARMTAG INDEX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns a bit mask integer representing the tag alarms state for the tag identified with index Bit 0 1e the bit with a value of 0x01 represents the Alarm 1 state and bit 1 1e the bit with a value of 0x0
157. ENCE PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS MANIPULATING BIT OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Bitwise AND Group 8 Data amp Mask Bitwise OR Group 9 Data Mask Bitwise XOR Group 10 Data Mask Shift Left Group 5 Data 2 Shift Right Group 5 Data gt gt 2 Bitwise NOT Group 2 Mask PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS LOCAL VARIABLES IN PROGRAMS int a Declare local integer float b Declare local real cstring c Declare local string IF STATEMENT if condition actionl else action2 SWITCH STATEMENT switch int var case 1 actionl break case 2 action2 break default action3 break REVISION 6 PAGE 289 PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WHILE LOOP while condition Action FOR LOOP for initialization condition actionl control Do LooP do actionl while condition LOOP CONTROL COMMAND DESCRIPTION Break Will cause a loop to break if called PRIORITY SUMMARY GROUP OPERATORS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Operators in the lower numbered groups are applied first http www redlion net co
158. EW OPTIONS USING THE PAGE LIST Decent tut 158 WORKING WITH THE GRID 159 THE DRAWING TOOLBOX esito er da und 159 ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES 160 SMART ALIGNMENT 555555 e AY 160 KEYBOARD 2 E SEE SERES ERES ERE M ERE ERR PEE papa 161 REVISION 6 PAGE V TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER L OCKXINSERT eren ip 161 USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY i5 22222 iiri tisk Ga eo Eve en a FN ER eara 161 SELECTING PRIMITIVES 52 2 Ene e Pe NR SOR NES DEE RARE ce TUR Mo e MOVING AND RESIZING eire a ae o Pe DER eR o RE er Ro ALIGNING PRIMITIVES cro 52 123 02 62 90 erar Da Y ey SPACING driving scm REORDERING PRIMITIVES GROUPING PRIMETIVES epa coe rex a petu aves gea Vua EDITING PRIMITIVES M EC DEFINING FILL PATTERNS DEFININGAGTIONS REESE ENABLING ACTIONS EE ACTION DESCRIPTIONS sie Acct Weta aoa eee eee een THE GOTO ACTION reu
159. EnableDevice 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 321 ENDBATCH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ENDBATCH ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Stops the current batch Note Starting a new batch within less than 10 seconds of ending or starting the last one will produce undefined behavior To go straight from one batch to another call NewBatch without an intervening call to EndBatch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Result EndBatch PAGE 322 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE EXP VALUE EXP VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns e 2 7183 raised to the power of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable2 exp 1 609 REVISION 6 PAGE 323 EXP10 VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER EXP10 VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns 10 raised to the power of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable4 exp10 0 699 PAGE 324 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE FILL ELEMENT DATA COUNT FILL ELEMENT DATA COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCR
160. GE 354 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETUPDOWNDATA DATA LIMIT GETUPDOWNDATA DATA LIMIT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data int A steadily increasing source value limit int The number of values to generate DESCRIPTION This function takes a steadily increasing value and converts it to a value that oscillates between 0 and limit l It is typically used within a demonstration database to generate realistic looking animation often by passing DispCount as the data parameter so that the resulting value changes on each display update If the GetUpDownStep function is called with the same arguments it will return a value indicating the direction of change of the data returned by GetUpDownData FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data GetUpDownData DispCount 100 REVISION 6 PAGE 355 GETUPDOWNSTEP DATA LIMIT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETUPDOWNSTEP DA7A LIMIT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data int A steadily increasing source value limit int The number of values to generate DESCRIPTION See GetUpDownData for a description of this function FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Delta GetUpDownStep DispCount 100 PAGE 356 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GOTOPAGE NAME GOTOPAGE NAME ARGUME
161. GS LSPUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Edit View Teg Link Help D Create New Variable Create New Formula 3 Flag Integer Muti Real String Create New Array mm net Variable Mappings Export to Import from File p Maintenance Validate Al Tags Event Logging Send to Raw Port Save to CompactFlash New File Ever Retain At Most VER nes NOM TAG FAMILIES The three families of tags are listed below Variables represent a single data item within the Master Variables may be mapped to PLC registers and may be configured as retentive in which case their values will be kept in memory even when the Master is powered off The defining characteristics of a variable are that they contain a single item and that it is in theory possible to write to this item even if in practice the variable is configured as read only If this seems confusing read on and you ll see how this contrasts to a formula which does not have this property Formulae represent derived values They are a combination of other data items typically combined using one or more math operations For example a formula might represent the sum of two tank levels While a formula can be set to be equal to the contents of a module register
162. GS ARE CALCULATED AND LOADED INTO MEMORY TIME PHASE 1 2 3 4 Output 1 OP1 ON OFF ON OFF On Off Control Hysteresis As shown above the setpoint used during auto tune is the value 75 above the difference between the current PV and the setpoint This allows the oscillations to occur close to setpoint while avoiding excessive overshoot Since the module performs on off control during auto tune it is important to set a suitable On Off Hysteresis value prior to invoking auto tune Customization of the PID set that auto tune will yield is possible by adjusting the Tune Response setting The Tune Response setting can be set to Very Aggressive Aggressive Default Conservative or Very Conservative Further the Tune Response setting can be adjusted by writing 0 4 respectively to the Tune Response register INVOKING AUTO TUNE The auto tune sequence uses request acknowledgement handshaking To invoke auto tune write the ReqTune bit to a 1 The module signifies that auto tune is running by setting the AckTune bit high When auto tune is complete the TuneDone bit goes high The external logic should be written to turn off the auto tune request bit when the TuneDone bit goes high At this point the module sets the AckTune bit back to 0 If for some reason auto tune fails to complete TuneDone and TuneFail bits both go high This situation may occur if for example an input fault occurs and will
163. H MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SMS MESSAGE PROCESSING When SMS messaging is enabled the Master will instruct the GSM modem to check for new incoming or outgoing messages every five seconds Incoming messages are forwarded to the mail manager which will optionally forward them to other users according to its configuration Note that it is not possible to check for messages while the modem is connected to a CSD or GPRS session so you will want to avoid using permanent connections when working with SMS Note also that if more than one GSM modem is configured all will be able to receive messages but only the second modem will be used for sending UsiNG MULTIPLE INTERFACES Each Master module can support up to two modem independent connections When combined with the Ethernet port this gives a total of up to three distinct IP interfaces all of which will operate according to the configuration parameters defined for each connection This section describes how these multiple interfaces will interact and how the Master will decide where to send each packet of data INTERFACE SELECTION Each interface has an IP address and a network mask which are used to decide whether to forward packets to that interface For example if the Ethernet interface is configured with an IP address of 192 168 1 0 and a network mask of 255 255 255 0 any packets for IP addresses starting with 192 168 1 will be sent to this interface Likewise if
164. IABLES The Data tab of a flag variable contains the following properties Edt yew Tag Unk Heo D GH m amp x e 2 2 To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 GAPS jvc e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the Master If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected e The Bit Number property is used when a flag variable is mapped to a PLC register which contains more than a single bit of information The property is then used to indicate which bit within the register is to be accessed by the tag e The Access property is used to specify what sort of data transfers should be performed for a mapped variable You may indicate that data is to be both read and written or just read or written as appropriate Write only tags can be used to avoid unnecessary read operations on data that can only be changed by the Master They will typically be set to retentive as their value cannot be obtained from the PLC and must therefore be stored by the Master e The Storage property is used to indicate whether Crimson should allocate FLASH memory within the Master in order to retain the value of the tag during power down Mapped tags that are n
165. ING STRING TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of a string tag contains the following properties entitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 lolx View Tag Link Help 2 7 Data Tags Data Label Lebel text EE Data Format Template 000 000 0000 4 on left To include this tag in a custom web page use TO caes NUI The Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the virtual HMI e The Template property is used to provide a picture of the string thereby indicating what kind of characters can occur in each position If a template is specified data entry will be limited such that only the correct kind of character can be selected for each character in the string The table below shows the meaning of the various special characters that can be included in a template Character Permitted Characters In Template A Z a z 0 9 Space Misc A Yes z S Yes s Yes 2 5 Yes Yes Yes N Yes Yes n Yes Yes Yes a M Yes Yes Ye
166. INING FILL PATTERNS A fill pattern is defined as shown below Fill Style Solid Color The Fill Style property is used to select the hatch or dotted pattern to be used while the two color properties are used to define the colors to be used to form the pattern Each color is defined as explained above The second color is not required when a solid fill is selected REVISION 6 PAGE 165 DEFINING ACTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DEFINING ACTIONS Many primitives can be made touch sensitive such that certain actions will occur when they are pressed held down or released To define the actions to be performed by a primitive display the properties of that primitive and select the Action tab cerRectangle Properties Format Action Action Mode Operation oto Page Mo Action User Defined Goto Page Push Button Change Integer Value Ramp Integer Value Play Tune r Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled x Action Detail Target Show As Cancel Set As Defaults The drop down list is used to select the action mode each of which is described below ENABLING ACTIONS If you want to make a particular action dependent on some condition being true enter an expression for that condition in the Enable field for the action in question This expression may reference a flag tag directly or may use any of the comp
167. ION To add a dial in connection to your database open the Communications window and select the serial port to which the connection will be made Click on the Edit button of the Driver field in the right hand pane and select the PPP and Modem Server driver from the System section of the selection dialog Driver Picker for Serial Port Manufacturer No Driver Selected Generic Program Thru Version 1 00 PPP and Modem Client Version 1 00 PPP and Modem Server Version 1 00 Raw Serial Port Version 1 00 SMS via GSM Modem Version 1 00 Virtual Serial Port Version 1 00 The right hand pane will now show the modem configuration srUntitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Lo File Edit view Link Help Deal vibax y e 5 1 Driver Selection Programming Port R5 232 Comms Port PPP Server Driver PPP and Modem Server R5 485 Comms Port Ej a amp Ethernet Connection Protocol 1 Protocol 2 Connect Using Generic Landline Modem M Y Protocol 3 Activity Timeout 240 secs Y Protocol 4 By Services Init String amp C1 amp D08R18S08K0 Edit Mail Manager Ty OPC Server Additional Init None 8 Tine Mansqet sms Support pisabied bd Log Support Disabled X Authentication Logon Username None Logon Password None Configuration Local Address 192 168 200 1 Remote Address 192 168 200 2 Remote Mask 255 255 255 255 Clear Port Settings
168. IPTION element int float The first array element to be processed data int float The data value to be written count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Sets count array elements from element onwards to be equal to data FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Fill List 0 0 100 REVISION 6 PAGE 325 FIND STRING CHAR SKIP CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER FIND STRING CHAR SKIP ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed char int The character to be found Skip int The number of times the character is skipped DESCRIPTION Returns the position of char in string taking into account the number of skip occurrences specified The first position counted is 0 Returns 1 if char is not found In the example below the position of skipping the first occurrence is 7 FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Position Find one two three 1 PAGE 326 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE FINDFILEFIRST DIR FINDFILEFIRST DIR ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION dir cstring Directory to be used in search DESCRIPTION Returns the filename of name of the first file or directory located in the dir directory on the CompactFlash card Returns an empty string if no files
169. L MODULAR CONTROLLER OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Less Than Group 6 Data 100 Less Than or Equal To Group 6 Data 100 Logical AND Group 11 gt 10 amp amp gt 10 Logical OR Group 12 gt 10 gt 10 Logical NOT Group 2 Flagl Selection Group 13 Fast 2000 500 OTHER OPERATORS OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Grouping Operator Group 1 2 Tagl Tag2 Array Access Group 1 Array 4 Bit Selection Group 1 Input 2 ACTION OPERATORS SIMPLE MATH OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Assignment Not applicable Tagl Tag2 Addition Group 4 Tagl Tag2 Subtraction Group 4 Tagl Tag2 Multiplication Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Division Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Remainder Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Post Increment Group 4 Tagl Pre Increment Group 4 Tagl Post Decrement Group 4 41 Pre Decrement Group 4 Tagl Increment and Assign Group 4 Tagl 4 Decrement and Assign Group 4 Tagl 3 Multiply and Assign Group 4 Tagl 5 Divide and Assign Group 4 Tagl 2 Bit Shift Left and Assign Group 4 Tagl lt lt 8 Bit Shift Right and Assign Group 4 Tagl gt gt 16 Exclusive OR and Assign Group 4 Tagl 1 Bitwise AND and Assign Group 4 Tagl amp tag2 Modulo and Assign Group 4 Tagl tag2 Normal Or and Assign Group 4 Tagl tag2 PAGE 288 http www redlion net controller PROGRAMMING REFER
170. LAR CONTROLLER INDEXING ARRAYS Elements within an array tag can be selected by following the array name with square brackets that contain an indexing expression This expression must range from 0 to one less than the number of elements in the array If you create a 10 element array for example the first element will be Name 0 and the last will be Name 9 INDEXING STRINGS Square brackets can also be used to select characters within a string For example if you have a tag called Text that contains the string ABCD then the expression Text 0 will return a value of 65 this being equal to the ASCII value of the first character Index values beyond the end of the string will always return zero ADDING STRINGS As well as adding numbers the addition operator can be used to concatenate strings Thus the expression evaluates to ABCD You may also use the addition operator to add an integer to a string in which case a single character equal to the ASCII code represented by the integer is appended to the data in the string CALLING PROGRAMS Programs that return values may be invoked within expressions by following the program name with a pair of parentheses For example Program1 10 will invoke the associated program and multiply the return value by 10 Obviously the return type for Program1 must be set to integer or floating point for this to make sense USING FUNCTIONS Crimson provides a number of pre
171. LLER DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS AutoConstD Auto tuned Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R AutoFilter Auto tuned Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R ActConstP Active Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R ActConstl Active Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R ActConstD Active Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R ActFilter Active Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R LOOP POWER DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PowerFault Power Output value for input fault 200 00 R W PowerOffset Power Output Offset value 100 00 R W PowerDead Power Output Deadband value 100 00 R W PowerRevGain Power Output Reverse Gain value 0 500 00 R W PowerDirGain Power Output Direct Gain value 0 500 00 R W PowerRevHyst Power Output SmartOnOff Reverse Hysteresis 0 50 00 R W PowerDirHyst Power Output SmartOnOff Direct Hysteresis 0 50 00 R W RevLimitLo Reverse Low Limit 0 200 0096 R W RevLimitHi Reverse High Limit 0 200 0096 R W DirLimitLo Direct Low Limit 0 200 0096 R W DirLimitHi Direct High Limit 0 200 00 R W LOOP SCALEINPUT1 DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS DispLol Input 1 display low value 30 000 R W DispHil Input 1 display high value 30 000 R W SiglLoKeyl Input 1 signal low keyed in entered value 30 000 R W SigHiKeyl Input 1 signal high keyed in entered value 30 000 R W SigLoAppl Input 1 signal low applied v
172. LORS The Colors tab of a flag tag contains the following properties Untitled File 6910 Crimson 2 0 View Tag Unk Help 5 2 9 Text Colors Foreground and Background Ton Tag of white x and IN Red To include this tag in a custom web page use L1 OVER CAPS NU The Tag On property is used to define the color pair to be used to display the tag when it is in the on state present on monochrome virtual PAGE 112 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS The Tag Off property is used to define the color pair to be used to display the tag when it is in the off state THE ALARMS TAB The Alarms tab of a flag variable or formula contains the following properties K Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 active off tor Stopped level Alar zi Manual Disabled To include this tag in a custom web page use 3 The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The tables below list the available modes MODE ALARM WILL ACTIVATE WHEN Active On The tag is true Active Off The tag is false The following modes are only available when a setpoint is defined
173. LogSave REVISION 6 PAGE 369 MAKEFLOAT VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MAKEFLOAT VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value int The value to be converted DESCRIPTION Reinterprets the integer argument as a floating point value This function does not perform a type conversion but instead takes the bit pattern stored in the argument and assumes that rather than representing an integer it actually represents a floating point value It can be used to manipulate data from a remote device that might actually have a different data type from that expected by the communications driver FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE fp MakeFloat n PAGE 370 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE MAKEINT VALUE MA KEINT VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be converted DESCRIPTION Reinterprets the floating point argument as an integer This function does not perform a type conversion but instead takes the bit pattern stored in the argument and assumes that rather than representing a floating point value it actually represents an integer It can be used to manipulate data from a remote device that might actually have a different data type from that expected by the communications driver FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE n MakeInt fp REVISION 6
174. MITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The second tab contains additional formatting information daPRich 2 State Selector Properties Properties Additional Entry Format Fill Format Fill Color 1 g Red x Pick z r Line Format Line Color Fixed LI white Pick Cancel Set As Defaults e The Fill Color 1 property is used to define the color of the rectangular portion of the selector that moves in order to indicate the tag state The Fill Color 2 property is used to define the color of the rest of the primitive The Line Format property is used to define the color of the various lines that used to draw the primitive These include the circle around the selector and the four lines that define the rectangle within the primitive The fourth page defines a number of properties specific to data entry These are as defined for the tag text primitives and you should refer to that section for details The fourth page defines the label and format to be used for the primitive and is as defined for flag tags or multi state tags depending on which type of selector is being configured You are once again referred to the chapter of Tags for information on the various formatting options THE PICTURE PRIMITIVE The Picture primitive is used to display one of a number of images based upon an optional data value The images may be manipulated in various ways a
175. N TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortClose 6 PAGE 384 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTGETCTS PORT PORTGETCTS PORT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to get the CTS state from DESCRIPTION Returns the CTS state of the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver and be one of the serial ports Note The communication port number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when the port is selected FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE CtsState PortgetCTS 2 In this example the function returns the CTS state of the RS232 communication port in the variable CtsState REVISION 6 PAGE 385 PORTINPUT PORT START END TIMEOUT LENGTH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PoRTINPUT PORT START END TIMEOUT LENGTH ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to be read start int The start character to match if any end int The end character to match if any timeout int The inter character timeout in milliseconds if any length int The maximum number of characters to read if any DESCRIPTION Reads a string of characters from the port indicated by port using the various other parameters to control the input process If start is non zero the process begins by waitin
176. NING VALUES meressa M 228 HERE BE DRAGONS 5 adl dea EE URS RE MON ORAE SNC 228 PASSING ARGUMENTS 1e cien e nn SER RR RRDAR AN RR RR Rena asa 228 PROGRAMMING 5 nennen nnn nnne nn anna 229 MUETIPEE ACTIONS iix oia in 229 STATEMENTS siii mh de Fe cc Don Ve en Ore ere da d o D or ca ec 230 SWITCH STATEMENTS cvevevsavevavasavcvarscdcactevedcacdsvcdevdveaaccedcuavenedousaddacscauedscauesesedsdsctuavevesavevectevevadevetsts 231 LOCAL VARIABLES ainina nS ra va kh anao rero vy ea vy eap uei enean 232 5 errorae rev A 232 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS cp ea aa Lue 234 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING 1er e eeee nene nnne nun 237 BATGH LOGGING cave sentence exeo Westies Madson PER 237 GONTROLLING A BATCH ccnetssuisnsicacduecctexcievsisvctexcivedasccacddaecdevdgancduanesscthesescctbacehenudioncuautauadecatenacede 238 CREATING
177. NPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING The Value property is the point at which the alarm will turn on The alarm values are entered in the same units of measure as those used to scale the variable chosen in the Assignment property The Hysteresis value separates on and off points of the alarm ie a high acting alarm programmed to turn on at 500 with a Hysteresis of 10 will turn off when the PV falls below 490 e The Latching property dictates how the alarm behaves once activated See the Alarm Behavior Chart below for more information The Standby property provides a means of preventing so called nuisance alarms during power up See the Alarm Behavior Chart below for more information ALARM BEHAVIOR CHART LATCHING STANDBY ALARM BEHAVIOR Alarm automatically turns on and off as the measured value crosses in and out of the alarm region The AlarmAccept bit disables alarm regardless of the state of the process If the alarm condition exists and the bit is written to a 0 the alarm activates Once activated the alarm stays active until accepted If the alarm condition no longer exists writing the Alarm Accept bit to 1 resets the alarm condition As long as the Alarm Accept bit is 17 the alarm automatically turns on and off as the measured value crosses in and out of the alarm region Alarm automatically turns on and off as the measured value crosses in and out of the alarm
178. NT TvPE DESCRIPTION name Display Page The page to be displayed DESCRIPTION Selects page name to be shown on the terminal s display FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE GotoPage Pagel REVISION 6 PAGE 357 GOTOPREVIOUS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GOTOPREVIOUS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Causes the panel to return to the previous page shown on the terminal s display FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE GotoPrevious PAGE 358 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE HASACCESS RIGHTS HASACCESS RIGHTS ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION rights int The required access rights DESCRIPTION Returns a value of true or false depending on whether the current user has access rights defined by the rights parameter This parameter comprises a bit mask representing the various user defined rights with bit O 1e the bit with a value of 0x01 representing User Right 1 bit 1 1e the bit with a value of 0x02 representing User Right 2 and so on The function is typically used in programs that perform a number of actions that might be subject to security and that might otherwise not occur FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE if HasAccess 1
179. Note that downloading via TCP IP relies on a CompactFlash card being installed in the Master if the device s firmware is to be upgraded Since you may want to perform such upgrades at some point in time it is highly recommended that you install a CompactFlash card in any device to which TCP IP downloads are likely to be performed EXTRACTING DATABASES The Link Support Upload command can be used to instruct Crimson whether or not it should include the information necessary to support database upload when sending a database to a Master module Supporting upload will slow the download process somewhat and may fail with extremely large databases containing many embedded images but it will ensure that if you lose your database file you will be able to extract an editable image from the terminal Save jn CX Temp 1 emerE3 FrontPageTempDir athrsvc History vee 6 8 iesse Desktop 2 BI test Documents This Computer A we File name 9 m The Network Save as type Crimson 2 0 Database 42 Cancel 2 Note that if you lose your database file and you do not have upload support enabled you will not be able to reconstruct your file without starting from scratch To extract a database from a Master use the Link Extract command This command will upload the database and then prompt you for a name under which to save the file The file will then be op
180. OA Asearch 22 Eby SO Links 9 Address http 192 9 200 163 z ee Demo Web Server Option Description View Data Display a list showing available data pages View Logs Download files from the G303 s data logger Remote View Display a view of the G303 s display and keyboard Custom Site Display the home page of the custom website 1992 2009 Red Lion Controle a E Done Op 1 E The picture below shows a list of standard web pages of Available Pages Microsoft Internet Explorer Edt Favorites Tools Back gt 0 2 Favorites Ameda D SO Links Address hetp 192 9 200 163 auto default htm zc ee Directory of Available Pages Name Sample Web Page BACK 1989 2003 Red Lon Controls zi Ele O internet 2 The picture below shows standard web page containing three tags Favorites Tools Help Heak OA Qsearch Favorites Medea D SG Links gt Address hetps 192 9 200 163fauto 001 Sample Web Page Name Value Tanki 50 Tank 2 400 gal Tank3 75 1993 2003 Red Lion Control zi PAGE 250 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER WEB SERVER SAMPLES The picture below shows t
181. OL OPTIONS Some protocols require additional configuration of parameters specific to that protocol These appear in the right hand pane of the Communications window when the corresponding port icon is selected The example below shows the additional parameters for the Allen Bradley DH 485 driver which appear under the Driver Settings section of the window ELE Driver Selection Programing Port 4E R5 232 Comms Port DH485 Alen Brady SLC S00 via DHAGS Edi Driver Settings Number of Terminal a port Stings BoudRate ox z o gt wes Even 7 Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Add Additional Device WORKING WITH DEVICES As mentioned above when a communications protocol is selected a single device is created under the corresponding port icon In the case of a master protocol this represents the initial remote device to be addressed via the protocol If the protocol supports access to more than one device you can use the Add Additional Device button included with the port icon s properties to add further target devices Each device is represented via an icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and depending on the protocol in question may have a number of properties to be configured E Untitled Fle Crimson 2 0 Edt yew Link Hep 2 8 d Programming Port 8 90 RS 232 Comms Po
182. OLDEVICE DEVICE ENABLE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CONTROLDEVICE D VICE ENABLE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION device int Device to be enabled or disabled enable int Determines if device is enabled or disabled DESCRIPTION Allows the database to disable or enable a specified communications device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ControlDevice 1 true PAGE 304 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE COPY DEST SRC COUNT Copy DEST SRC COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION dest int float The first array element to be copied to src int float The first array element to be copied from count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Copies count array elements from src onwards to dest onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE 0 Work 0 100 REVISION 6 305 COS THETA CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER COS 7 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION theta float The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the cosine of the angle thet
183. ONS The first page is more or less the same for all five primitive types dar Integer Text Properties 1 Properties Data Entry Format Data Source Value TankLevel Pick DataEntry E Flash on Alarm hd Show Label ves hd Show Value Yes gt r Get From Tag Field Label v Data Format Text Colors Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Foreground Fixed Pick Background Fixed Gray 71 Pick Justification Horizontal center Vertical middle m Set As Defaults The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for an integer text primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual HMI facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The Show Label property is use
184. PE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortPrint 1 ABCD REVISION 6 PAGE 387 PORTREAD PORT PERIOD CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PORTREAD PORT PERIOD ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to be read period int The time to wait in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Attempts to read a character from the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers If no data is available within the indicated time period a value of 1 will be returned Setting period to zero will result in any queued data being returned but will prevent Crimson from waiting for data to arrive if none is available FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data PortRead 1 100 PAGE 388 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTSETRTS PORT STATE PORTSETRTS PORT STATE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to control state int The state of the RTS true 1 or false 0 DESCRIPTION Sets the RTS of the port indicated by port with the setting in state The port must be configured to use a raw driver and be on of the serial ports The state argument can take values 0 or 1 only Note The communication port number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when the port is selected FUNCTION TYPE This fu
185. PTION string cstring The string to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the number of characters in string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Size Len Input REVISION 6 PAGE 365 LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The port number where the camera is connected camera int The camera device number index int Inspection file number in the camera file cstring Path and filename for the inspection file on the operator interface CompactFlash card DESCRIPTION This function loads the inspection file from the operator interface CompactFlash card to the camera memory The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera where the file will be loaded in The fiie is the path and filename for the source inspection file on the CompactFlash card This function will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise Note This function should be called in a user program that runs in the background so the G3 has enough time to access the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This
186. Process Value after Slope and Offset calculation R ColdJunc Cold Junction Calibration Value N A R InputAlarml 8 Input out of range 0 or 1 bit R Dependent on selected sensor type Model CSTC only INPUT CONTROL DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS InputFilter Input Filter 0 60 0 sec R W InputOffset1 8 Offset value added to PV 100 0 deg R W InputSlopel 8 Slope value applied to PV 001 10 000 R W PAGE 52 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSINI CSINV ANALOG INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CSINI CSINV ANALOG INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING To access a module s configuration double click it THE CONFIGURATION TAB Scale Beyond Enabled Decimals 100 PV Points E 5 i Channeli v 2 10 00 Channel 2 v 2 Channel 3 v 2 Channela v 2 Channels v 2 I 100 00 2 100 00 100 00 100 00 Channel v 100 00 m m m Channel 7 v 2 I 100 00 Channels v 2 100 00 ven cars MM GENERAL The settings apply to all of the module s inputs e The nput Range property selects between 0 20mA and 4 20mA for the CSINI module and between 0 10V and 10V for the CSINV module Filter is a time constant used to stabilize fluctuating input signals INPUTS These settings allow independent customizati
187. Quadrant primitive is one quadrant of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse quadrant has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse Half primitive is one half of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse half has a property to indicate which of the four possible halves think about it will be drawn The properties for these primitives need little further explanation other than to point out that the quadrant or half rendered by the Wedge Ellipse Quadrant or Ellipse Half primitives can also be edited via the command found on the Transform menu THE TANK PRIMITIVES The Conical Tank primitive is a conical tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected additional handles appear allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handles as required The Round Bottomed Tank primitive is a tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected an additional handle appears allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handle as required The properties for these primitives need little further explanation THE SIMPLE BAR PRIMITIVES The Simple Vertical Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a vertical bar graph between specified limits Additional properties allow the primitive s fill color and border style be defined The Simple Horizontal Bar primiti
188. R PID SETTINGS The Proportional Band property entered as a percentage of the full input range is the amount of input change required to vary the output full scale For temperature inputs the input range is fixed per the entered thermocouple or RTD type For process inputs the input range is the difference between the Process at 0 and Process at 100 values The Proportional Band is adjustable from 0 096 to 1000 0 and should be set to a value that provides the best response to a process disturbance while minimizing overshoot A Proportional Band of 0 096 forces the controller into On Off Control with its characteristic cycling at setpoint The optimal value may be established by invoking Auto tune e Integral Time is the time in seconds that it takes the integral action to equal the proportional action during a constant process error As long as the error exists integral action is repeated each Integral Time The higher the value the slower the response The optimal value may be established by invoking auto tune The ntegral Time is adjustable from 0 to 6000 0 seconds The Derivative Time is the seconds per repeat that the controller looks ahead at the ramping error to see what the proportional contribution will be and it matches that value every Derivative Time As long as the ramping error exists the derivative contribution is repeated every derivative time Increasing the value helps to stabilize the response but too high
189. R5 232 Comms Port Mitsubishi FX Driver Mitsubishi Electric FXSerles Poit to Po Edt mac 46 5 465 Comms Port Port Settings Ethernet Y Protocol 1 gens gt DataBts Seven Stop Bits Parity Time Manager Port Sharing 55 5 5232 485 Option Card 3 49 5 232 Comms Port Share Port fff v teprot 4000 44 RS 485 Comms Port Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Device Port 2 ER CAPS NUM If you leave the port setting at zero a number of 4000 plus the logical index of the port will be used To obtain the logical index of the port count the port s position in the list noting that the programming port is always logical port 1 You may use any number that is not already used by another TCP IP protocol If you are stuck for ideas we recommend numbers between 4000 and 4099 PAGE 76 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS SHARING SERIAL PORTS CONNECTING VIA ANOTHER PORT If you want to use another port on the Master to route data to the shared port you must select the Generic Program Thru driver for that port and configure this driver with the TCP IP port number of the serial port that you have shared In the example below we are routing data from the programming port to a PLC that is connected via the RS 232 comms port E Untitled File CSMSTRSK Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help
190. ROLLER ISSIRENON DESCRIPTION Returns true if the panel s sounder is on or false otherwise VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only PAGE 282 http www redlion net controller SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE PI PI DESCRIPTION Returns pi as a floating point number VARIABLE TYPE Floating point ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 6 PAGE 283 TIMEZONE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER TIMEZONE DESCRIPTION Returns the Time Zone in hours from 12 to 12 Using Link Send Time command in Crimson will set the unit time and time zone to the computer s values Changing the Time Zone afterwards will increment or decrement the unit time Note TimeZone can only be viewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 284 http www redlion net controller SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE TIMEZONEMINS TIMEZONEMINS DESCRIPTION Returns the Time Zone in minutes from 720 to 720 Using the Link Send Time command in Crimson will set the unit time and time zone to the computer s values Changing the Time Zone afterwards will increment or decrement the unit time Note TimeZoneMins can only be viewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write REVISION 6 PAGE 285 UsEDST CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER USEDST DESCRIPTION Returns the unit daylight sav
191. S 135 SMART ALIGNMENT cs s sse eset n eR PREPARA Pr Enni noni need rend need serene v pn eat rra gar KEYBOARD OPTIONS LOCK INSERT MODE SELECTING PRIMITIVES S dne M acta tae pu M E Med 136 MOWING AND RESIZING nd eai e eS EHE 137 REORDERING PRIMITIVES SS t ap or at DRM 137 EDITING PRIMITIVES sedes 138 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS oci erp tuis 138 THE EINE PRIMEITIVE 138 SIMPLE GEOMETRIG PRIMITIVES Y e vers vae aee a dee een rin rast 138 THE eeu ore deo P ieu sevo oe end uo 139 THE SIMPLE 139 THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE THEAUTO TAG PRIMITIVE 55 tiet iei Le e EY ud THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES te DD E Dos UP D ede cA e RR rahe EDITING THE UNDEREVING TAG 7 0t eon fee coc ree oce ote ere ain dala a eeu THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE E o geste e otn eee ees cer usu eee io cese cc THE RICH BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES THESYSTEM PRIMITIVES as E SERE
192. SE SENE PY ER PNE RES DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES sein Octo Led bes DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS nux eux en Re VR cave DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR cei Ere uae rbd p eta did ENABLING ACTIONS a recu ENS ecu RD ACTION DESCRIPTIONS oS ti ntt terere ET THE GOTO PAGE ACTION iis inseri goin oin n Srt ro vo aoo ET ET YT TRY REP ep an Fe wn ve ea d ea nn ea ee ru npn YE YEN eas TAE PUSA BUTTON AOT ON 5 a e aa a EMMTEERR THE CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION er E eu Ne EY n e NN NE Ve aur ex aaan ivy n ron 152 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE 2 506 ide eere eret titania re mte Ene eee bee e 153 THE PLAY TUNEZAGTION one auno eere e oco cree Ere e oliin unn 153 THE USER DEFINED ACTION ida edet ke e nsu ee pae epa sena exa n o oae insu a Depas pe rub AOAR AANE anus 154 BLEOCK DEFAUPT ACTION 154 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ict cle Dres dun bd xul td eiae nd 155 ADVANCED TOPICS 155 ACTION PROGESSING ERR 155 DATAFAVAILABILT p RED HELPER PM IM 156 CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI eene 157 CONTROLBING THE VIEW aca Gerona D an a 157 ZOOM FUNCTION E IEEE OTHER VI
193. SON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER COMPACTFLASHEJECT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Ceases all access of the CompactFlash card allowing safe removal of the card FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE CompactFlashEject PAGE 302 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE COMPACTFLASHSTATUS CoMPAcTFLAsHSTATUS ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the current status of the CompactFlash slot as an integer VALUE STATE DESCRIPTION 0 Empty Either no card is installed or the card has been ejected via a call to the CompactFlashEject function 1 Invalid The card is damaged incorrectly formatted or not formatted at all Remember only FAT16 is supported 2 Checking The G3 is checking the status of the card This state occurs when a card is first inserted into the G3 3 Formatting The G3 is formatting the card This state occurs when a format operation is requested by the programming PC 4 Locked The operator interface is either writing to the card or the card is mounted and Windows is accessing the card 5 Mounted A valid card is installed but it is not locked by either the operator interface or Windows FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d CompactFlashStatus REVISION 6 PAGE 303 CONTR
194. SS vavscavasavsvardvactanctenctevcdscsvescacedavacncecedecsccsausenncdecadaasdacadecadacaravavevavedversudversievs SENDING THE DATABASE EXTRACTING DATABASES A e ERI ae ER OR Cop MOUNTING THE COMPACTFLASH FORMATTING THE COMPACTFLASH SENDING THE TIME AND DATE sccsesssssssucceuecaseuencuesencususeuaeseecucecenacesenceeseucusensuereucucususaerensauerenauerensas WORKING WITH MODULES ERR 17 INSERTING MODULES Freonen Ren ete edet ete eu P E tad uteri v ri Ee 17 MovING MODULES EDITING MODULES CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING eene nenne nnne nnne nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn 18 THE GENERAL C 18 THE CONTROL TAB iier e n ge teo t Re e E DR RH 20 REVISION 6 PAGE I TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THEPOWER TAB ROTE REOR RETE CE PERPE D ea orco d o dar 22 EAE sc n Om Meet res caeco a s La e rd be 23 THEOUTPUTS TAB dde doen ugue cte cavae eth o Eae svat E Cea e 26 FUTOSTONING ep tread dle ergeben te nee E E E AR M REIN Ee 27 2 5 5 545 eo pcd der e x OO OR E CO
195. Set As Defaults Up to eight pairs of colors may be assigned to tags with priorities 1 through 8 A priority value greater than 8 will use the setting for priority 8 USING THE HELP BUTTON The Alarm Viewer includes a Help button to provide context help on alarms For example when multiple alarms are active in the viewer the operator can select one of the alarms and push the Help button to get more information or eventual solution for this alarm To use this functionality the help button has to be activated in the Alarm Viewer as shown below Alarm Help v Enable Help Button OnHelp Program1 Data The actions in the OnHelp field will be launched when the Help button is pressed on the alarm viewer Any actions can be entered in the OnHelp field however to use contextual help the following design as to be followed Get alarm selected by user Run a program passing the alarm number Display proper information REVISION 6 PAGE 193 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The first step is achieved using the system variable Data This system variable is only available for the OnHelp field and contains information on the alarm selected Data is a Long Double word and contains the following information e Low word the tag index this alarm is related to High word the alarm number for this tag Remember there are two alarms per tag The second step is thus achieved b
196. THE CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION This Page Jat Pages Action Mode Operation change Integer Value Action Details Write To H MotorSpeed Pick Data v General 100 Edit Action Control Enable General Edit In the example above the key will toggle the value of the output tag This action is used to write an integer value to a data item The options are shown below PAGE 152 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI ACTION DESCRIPTIONS e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e Data property is used to define the data to be written In the example above the key will set the MotorSpeed tag to 100 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to increase or decrease a data item The options are shown below Key F1 x This Page all Pages Action Mode Operation Ramp Integer Value x Action Details Write To Data General B j Eit Limit General Est Ramp Mode increase gt Action Control Enable General TR UE Edit Cancel e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property is used to define the step by which to raise or lower the item e The Limit property is used to define the minimum or maximum data value e The
197. TRING COUNT STRING COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed count int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns the last count characters from string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Local Right Phone 7 REVISION 6 PAGE 399 SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The port number where the camera is connected camera int The camera device number index int Inspection file number in the camera file cstring Path and filename for the inspection file on the operator interface CompactFlash card DESCRIPTION This function saves the inspection file uploaded from the camera on the operator interface CompactFlash card The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera The file is the path and filename where the inspection file should be saved on CompactFlash card This function will return true if the transfer 1s successful false otherwise Note This function should be called
198. Timeout 240 secs amp CI amp DOSRI amp SOBK Edit None Disabled T Disabled Init String Additional Init Number or APN Log Support SM5 Support r Authentication Logon Username none Logon Password None Configuration Route Type Default Gateway z ki 92 Clear Port Settings The modem has the following properties that are distinct from those for dial in connections OvER The Connect Using property is as for dial in connections with the addition of support for GPRS connections via a GSM modem These connections differ from CSD connections in that they achieve much higher speeds and are typically charged on the basis of how much data is transferred rather than how long the connection is maintained GPRS connections may thus be configured for permanent connection unless there is a need to provide downtime to allow SMS messages to be transferred The No Firewall property is used to turn off the firewall protection that is otherwise provided for dial out connections This protection prevents incoming connections from being made to this interface and prevents the Master from sending certain diagnostic packets that might either provide a hacker with information about the system or might be used by an attacker to keep a connection active in the absence of actual data transfer If you are connecting directly to the Internet by means of this connection you should
199. Tone 7 codeBusy 8 codeNoAnswer 12 codeClient 13 codeServer 14 codeExtended 15 codePrompt 16 codeEcho 99 codeNone PAGE 92 http www redlion net controller OPC COMMUNICATION OPC COMMUNICATION Crimson s OPC support provides two different features First with the combination of Red Lion s software OPCWorx OPC becomes a standard and user friendly communication tool to exchange data with SCADA packages Second OPC can be used as a data exchange protocol between Red Lion Controls products such as G3s Modular Controllers and Data Station Plus series The protocol is tag based allowing units to exchange tag values seamlessly thus avoiding complex programming Note OPC communication can only be used other Ethernet Please make sure the Ethernet port is active OPC SERVER SETTINGS Once the OPC Server is enabled clients are able to access the unit s tags The connection to the server is done via the TCP port setup TCP port 790 is suitable for most applications The Session Limit indicates the maximum number of clients connecting simultaneously on this server The maximum possible is four The Security properties are used to restrict OPC server access to hosts whose IP address matches the mask and data indicated All access may be restricted or the filter may be used to restrict only attempts to write data in the server The filter works in the following way Perm
200. User Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R W AutoConstP Auto tuned Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R AutoConstl Auto tuned Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R AutoConstD Auto tuned Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R AutoFilter Auto tuned Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R ActConstP Active Proportional Value 0 1000 0 R ActConstl Active Integral Value 0 6000 0 sec R ActConstD Active Derivative Value 0 600 0 sec R ActFilter Active Power Filter Value 0 60 0 sec R LOOP POWER DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PowerFault Power Output value for input fault 200 00 R W PowerOffset Power Output Offset value 100 00 R W PowerDead Power Output Deadband value 100 00 R W PowerHeatGain Power Output Heat Gain value 0 500 00 R W PowerCoolGain Power Output Cool Gain value 0 500 0096 R W PowerHeatHyst Power Output SmartOnOff Heat Hysteresis 0 50 00 R W PowerCoolHyst Power Output SmartOnOff Cool Hysteresis 0 50 0096 R W HeatLimitLo Heat Low Limit 0 200 0096 R W HeatLimitHi Heat High Limit 0 200 0096 R W CoolLimitLo Cool Low Limit 0 200 0095 R W CoolLimitHi Cool High Limit 0 200 0096 R W PAGE 32 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING OUTPUTS CYCLE TIMES DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS CycleTimel Cycle Time for Output 1 0 1 60 0 sec R W CycleTime2 Cy
201. VANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING ELECTRONIC MAIL The Record Log File property can be enabled to keep a log of all SMTP interactions in the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging SMTP operations but it will tend to degrade performance slightly The Initial Timeout property is used to specify how long the mail client will wait for the SMTP server to send its welcome banner Some Microsoft servers attempt to negotiate Microsoft specific authentication with mail clients thereby delaying the point at which the banner appears You may want to extend this time period to 2 minutes or more when working with such servers CONFIGURING SMS The SMS tab is used to configure the Short Messaging Service This transport is used to send text messages to cell phones via a GSM modem Email addresses for SMS comprise an international format telephone number minus the introductory plus sign An example address in the United States would be 17175551234 while an example in the UK would be 441246555555 In each case the address comprises the country code followed by the area code and the subscriber number The configuration options for SMS are shown below E Untitled Fle 6310 Crimson 2 0 View Link Help SMS Transport ESSERE T MessageRelay Disabled v Programming Port 4 R5 232 Comms Port d RS 485 Comms Port
202. a FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE radius cos theta PAGE 306 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE CREATEDIRECTORY NAME CREATEDIRECTORY ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name cstring The directory to be created DESCRIPTION Creates a new directory on the CompactFlash card Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero if it fails FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result CreateDirectory LOGS LOG1 REVISION 6 PAGE 307 CREATEFILE NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CREATEFILE WAME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name cstring The file to be created DESCRIPTION Creates an empty file on CompactFlash Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described i
203. a Tags for more information on each property EDITING THE UNDERLYING TAG If you want to edit a tag text primitive s properties either double click on the primitive or right click and select the Properties command from the resulting menu If however you want to edit the properties of the tag that is being used to control the primitive right click and select the Tag Details command instead The resulting dialog box will show the Data and Format tab from the Data Tags window and allow you to change the various properties Note that a change made via this mechanism will change all the primitives controlled by that tag if those primitives have the Get Label or Get Format properties set to From Tag Properties PAGE 144 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE The Time and Date primitive is used to display the current time and date or to display the contents of a time and date expression It can also be used to edit such an expression or to set the Master s real time clock The properties of a time and date primitive are displayed using two tabbed pages The first page is shown below cer Time and Date Properties Properties Format Data Source EE Value Data Entry Disabled v Show Label ki Get Labe From Format Page Text Format Font Swiss 7x8 Flash on Alarm Foreground
204. a in which both the heating and cooling outputs are inactive known as deadband or the area in which they will both be active known as overlap A positive value results in a deadband while a negative value results in an overlap The Output Heat Gain defines the gain of the heating output relative to the gain established by the Proportional Band A value of 10096 causes the heat gain to mimic the gain determined by the proportional band A value less than 10096 can be used in applications in which the heater is oversized while a value greater than 10096 can be used when the heater is undersized For the majority of applications the default value of 100 is adequate and adjustments should only be made if the process requires it The Output Cool Gain defines the gain of the cooling output relative to the gain established by the Proportional Band value of 10096 causes the cool gain to mimic the gain determined by the proportional band A value less than 10096 can be used in applications in which the cooling device is oversized while a value greater than 100 can be used when the cooling device is undersized For the majority of applications the default value of 10096 is adequate and adjustments should only be made if the process requires it PAGE 22 http www redlion net controller CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING The Heat Low Limit and Heat High Limit properties
205. a remote device The driver will normally make a decision about whether to treat these values as signed or unsigned based upon how the data is normally used within the device If you want to override this decision set this property as required The Access property is as described for flag variables The Storage property is as described for flag variables Simulation property is as described for flag variables The Scaling and Transforms properties are used to modify the data value as it is read and written from the remote device When the linear scaling mode is selected the Store As range indicates the upper and lower bounds of the variable within the PLC while the Display As range indicates the corresponding values as they will be presented to the operator The Source Data property can also be used in this mode to force Crimson to treat the underlying data as a floating point value before performing the scaling The other modes are as follows MODE DESCRIPTION BCD to Binary The BCD value is converted to binary Binary to BCD The binary value is converted to BCD Swap Bytes in Word The lower two bytes of the value are swapped Swap Bytes in Long four bytes of the value are swapped Swap Words The upper and lower words of the value are swapped REVISION 6 PAGE 115 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MODE DESCRIPTION Reverse Bits
206. ablish the working range of the PV value and subsequently the range over which the module can control The reported PV value remains frozen at either limit as the process continues to move outside these boundaries Exceeding either limit by more than 5 of the full range results in the module assuming a process fault at which time the PV value reported becomes equal to the PV Limit High value upscale drive response e The Filter is a time constant used to stabilize fluctuating input signals e The Process Units property allows you to enter the engineering units for the process This is only used to identify the appropriate fields throughout the software This parameter is saved as part of the Crimson file but is not used within the module e The Decimal Places property is used to allow Crimson to display the engineering units in the proper resolution This is only used to display the appropriate resolution throughout the software and is not used within the module INITIALIZATION The initialization parameters provide initial values for settings usually controlled by a PC or PLC In typical applications these settings will only be used until communications is established for the first time e The Include in Download property is used to determine whether the initialization values will be downloaded to the module Selecting allows modification and download of databases at will without accidental overwriting of establishe
207. ade and update your software automatically You may also manually download the upgrade from Red Lion s website by visiting the Downloads page within the Support section Either way when the upgrade package executes be sure to select the Repair option to update your installation REVISION 6 PAGE 1 INSTALLING THE USB DRIVERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER INSTALLING THE USB DRIVERS When you first connect a Master module to your PC using a USB cable Windows will prompt you for the location of the drivers for the device The default location for these drivers is C Program Files Red Lion Controls Crimson 2 0 Device When the Hardware Setup Wizard appears choose the Browse option and either point the Wizard at that location or whatever other location you specified during installation of the software It is important that you perform this step correctly or you may have to manually remove the drivers using the Device Manager and repeat the installation once more Windows XP users should note that Crimson s USB drivers have not been digitally signed by Microsoft and you will therefore a dialog offering you the chance to stop the installation You should be sure to select the Continue option to indicate that you do indeed wish to install the drivers PAGE 2 http www redlion net controller QUICK START OVERVIEW Quick START The Modular Controller is a versatile platform truly requiring a 300 page manual However y
208. ade to any device connected to it For example you may be using the Master with a small programmable controller but since the PLC has only a single serial port you may find yourself continually swapping cables when modifying the PLC s ladder program By sharing the Master module s communications port you can send data directly to the PLC either from another serial port on the Master or by means of a virtual serial connection made over an Ethernet link ENABLING TCP IP The first configuration step when using port sharing is to enable the Master s Ethernet port as described in the previous chapter While you may not choose to use the virtual serial port facility even the local sharing of ports is based upon the TCP IP protocol which will not be available unless Ethernet is enabled To enable Ethernet select the Ethernet icon in the Communications window and select the required configuration mode For installations where Ethernet is not actually being used you can select Manual Configuration and leave the rest of the options at their defaults SHARING THE REQUIRED PORT The next step is to share the required port which is done by selecting Yes in the Share Port property and by optionally entering a suitable TCP IP port number This number represents the virtual port that will be used to expose the serial port for access via TCP IP gdt View Link gt 7 2 HINC Driver Selection Programming Port 5 0
209. ag with index 10 in a string Value GetFormattedTag FindTagIndex Power Returns the value from the tag with label Power in a string PAGE 340 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETINTERFACESTATUS PORT GETINTERFACESTATUS PORT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION interface int The interface to be queried DESCRIPTION Returns a string indicating the status of the specified TCP IP interface Refer to the earlier chapter on Advanced Communications for details of how to calculate the value to be placed in the interface parameter and of how to interpret the returned value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE EthernentStatus GetInterfaceStatus 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 341 GETINTTAG INDEX CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETINTTAG INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the integer tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Value GetIntTag 10 Returns the value of the tag with index 10 Value GetIntTag FindTagIndex Power Returns the value from the tag with label Power PAGE 342 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE
210. ajority of the actions in a database will relate to key presses and since Crimson provides a simple method of defining commonly used actions via the dialog box discussed in the User Interface section you will often be able to avoid writing actions by hand Actions are needed though if you want to use triggers write programs or use a key in User Defined mode CHANGING PAGE To create an action that changes the page shown on the Master s virtual HMI use the syntax GotoPage Name where Name is the name of the display page in question The current page will be removed and the new page will be displayed in its place CHANGING NUMERIC VALUES Crimson provides several ways of changing data values SIMPLE ASSIGNMENT To create an action that assigns a new value to a tag or to a register in a communications device use the syntax Data Value where Data is the data item to be changed and value is the value to be assigned Note that value need not just be a constant value but can be any valid expression of the correct type Refer to the previous section for details of how to write expressions For example code such as N7 0 Tank1 Tank2 can be used to add two tank levels and store the total quantity directly in a PLC register COMPOUND ASSIGNMENT To create an action that sets a data value equal to its current value combined with another value by means of any of the operators defined in the previous section use the syntax Dataop Va
211. al bits Crimson will expand the word into those bits The flag variable will be placed into the first bit position You may then map other flags into the remaining exposed bits PAGE 70 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL CONVERSION READ WRITE VARIABLES ms Pert Ears Certain module data are read write variables allowing them to be controlled by the PLC HMI to which the MC is connected To map writeable variables follow the same procedure as shown above but this time set the Direction property to Device to MC Note that with the Direction property set for Device to MC only writable variables will appear in the right pane In the above example modules one through four have their setpoints mapped to PLC registers N011 0000 through N011 0003 As a result the Master will poll the contents of the PLC registers and write them into the respective module variables PROTOCOL CONVERSION In addition to mapping module data Gateway Blocks can also be used to expose data that is obtained from other remote devices or to move data between two such devices This unique protocol conversion feature allows much tighter integration between elements of your control system even when using simple low cost devices MASTER AND SLAVE mac Era Ethemet Protsed TCP IP Slave am we SL N0D7 0004 lt SLC NOD7 2005
212. alse value used to hide or show the image If you want the image to be hidden you must not select No Fill for the background when defining the background format REVISION 6 PAGE 213 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Show property is a true or false value used to hide or show the primitive A value of zero will hide the primitive Fill Format properties are used to define the background of the primitive e The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive The second tab of the primitive s properties is used to define optional actions that can be triggered when the operator touches the image You are referred to the earlier section on assigning actions to the primitives for more details of how to configure this functionality CONVERTING IMAGES FOR THE COMPACTFLASH In order to prepare images for the CF Image primitive the makepic utility is used This utility can be found under Crimson 2 0 installation folder and is a command line based utility Makepic can only convert BMP images and it is strongly recommended to resize the image to its final appearance on the panel before the conversion The syntax for makepic is as follow makepic switches lt input file gt lt picture number gt Where lt input file gt is the path and file name of the image you whish to convert and lt picture number gt the number assigne
213. alue 30 000 R SigHiAppl Input 1 signal high applied value 30 000 R StoreSigLol Store input 1 signal low edge triggered on the positive 0 or 1 bit R W going edge the millivolt signal applied to input 1 is saved as SigLoAppl StoreSigHil Store input 1 signal high edge triggered on the positive 0 or 1 bit R W going edge the millivolt signal applied to input 1 is saved as SigHiAppl PAGE 48 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS SelectScalingl Select input 1 applied signals level sensitive when 0 or 1 bit R W high the applied signal values are active when low the keyed in signal values are active LOOP SCALEINPUT2 The available data for ScaleInput2 is the same as ScaleInputl LOOP PEAKVALLEY DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS PVPeak The maximum PV value measured since the last peak reset 30 000 R PVVall The minimum PV value measured since the last valley reset 30 000 R ResetPkVall Reset Peak and Valley Write this bit to 1 level 0 or 1 bit R W sensitive to reset the peak and valley registers to the existing PV value ResetPeak Reset Peak Write this bit to 1 level sensitive to reset 0 or 1 bit R W the peak register to the existing PV value ResetVall Reset Valley
214. alues that correspond to a number of distinct states Thus while an integer might represent a tank level a multi tag will represent say one of three states of a machine such as Stopped Running or Paused The distinction is obvious when you consider that a multi tag is displayed as one of a set of strings while an integer is displayed as a number Real tags represent 32 bit single precision floating point numbers These tags can store values between 107 and 2107 with a precision of about 7 significant figures While it is seldom necessary to use real tags to represent physical quantities which typically have more tightly defined ranges they are useful for performing statistical operations or other math functions String tags represent an item of text made up of a number of characters They are used to store such things as recipe names or to process data received using Raw Port device drivers Strings cannot be mapped to PLC registers but can be used to store such data within the Master itself TAG COLORS The color of the tag depends of its family and mapping with a communication device The table below shows the different colors by family and access for an integer tag The same color scheme is used on all tag types only the symbol is then different as shown above VARIABLE FORMULA ARRAY Internal X Blue X Olive X Purple Mapped as Read only X Green N A X Green Mapped as Read Write X Red N A X Red or Write
215. am should simply perform a series of actions or whether it will perform a calculation and return REVISION 6 PAGE 225 PROGRAM PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER the value of that calculation to the user Programs that return values are described in more detail below e The Run In Background property is used to indicate whether Crimson should wait for the program to complete execution before continuing with processing whatever task invoked the program For example if this property is set to No running a program in response to a key being pressed will result in a pause in display updates until the program completes Since most programs take very little time to execute this may not even be noticeable If this property 18 set to Yes display updates will continue immediately and the program will execute at a lower priority in the background Only one background program will run at once so subsequent requests are queued for later execution Note also that programs that return values cannot be run in the background as their return value would then not be available for the caller to use The External Data and Timeout properties are used to control how the program interacts with Crimson s communication infrastructure with respect to external data items to which the program makes reference You will recall that Crimson only reads data items when they are used This property is used to control the exact interpretation
216. an Ethernet port s IP address as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE IP GetNetIp 0 PAGE 346 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNETMASK PORT lt ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports an Ethernet port s IP address mask as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE mask GetNetMask 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 347 GErNow CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETNow ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the current time and date as the number of seconds elapsed since the datum point of 1 January 1997 This value can then be used with other time date functions FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t GetNow PAGE 348 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNOWDATE GETNOWDATE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the number of seconds in the days that have passed since 1 of January 1997 FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d GetNowDate REVISION 6 PAGE 349 GETNOWTIME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER
217. an on demand modem connection has a remote IP address of 192 168 2 2 and a netmask of 255 255 255 255 sending a packet to address 192 168 2 2 will result in the connection being established DEFAULT ROUTE In addition one single interface may also define a default route which will be used to handle packets that do not specifically match any other interface The method used to configure the route varies according to the interface type as shown in the table below INTERFACE To DEFINE DEFAULT ROUTE Ethernet Enter a non zero value for the Gateway property Dial In Enter 0 0 0 0 for the Remote Mask Dial Out Select Default Gateway for the Route Type property Note again that only a single interface may define a default route For example a Master module may be connected to a number of Ethernet devices using an IP address of 192 168 1 0 and a netmask of 255 255 255 0 with no gateway defined An on demand modem connection may be configured to access an Internet Service Provider so as to send alarm emails Its Route Type is set to Default Gateway making it the route for any packets for IP addresses that do not match the network defined for the Ethernet port The SMTP server is configured as 24 104 0 39 resulting in a dial out connection when an attempt is made to send a message PAGE 88 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS IP ROUTING The Ethernet icon in the Commun
218. and made up of characters that are valid FAT16 filename Restarting a batch already on the CF card will append the data If a new batch exceeds the maximum number of batches to be kept the oldest batch i e The one last changed will be deleted If name is empty the function is equivalent to EndBatch Note Batch status is retained during a power cycle Starting a new batch within less than 10 seconds of ending or starting the last one will produce undefined behavior To go straight from one batch to another call NewBatch without an intervening call to EndBatch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE NewBatch ProdA PAGE 378 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE NoP NoP ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION This function does nothing FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Nop REVISION 6 PAGE 379 OPENFILE NAME MODE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER OPENFILE NAME MODE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION name cstring The file to be opened mode int The mode in which the file is to be opened 0 Read Only 1 Read Write at Start of File 2 Read Write at End of File DESCRIPTION Returns a handle to the file name located on the CompactFlash card This function is rest
219. animation The second tab of the Picture primitive s properties contains any additional images that could not be displayed on the first page It is only required when the Image Count is set to a value greater than four The third tab controls movement of the image within the primitive To enable this facility drag either or both of the shaded rectangular handles in the top left corner of the primitive so as to define a sub region in which the image should reside E gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help 2 2 2 s amp 5 S Position 136 072 496 304 Size 361 233 Image Selected REVISION 6 PAGE 211 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The now reduced image can be moved within the whole primitive by defining values to control its horizontal and vertical position These values are defined together with minimum and maximum limits that specify the values corresponding to the extremes of the image s movement within the primitive s bounding rectangle cer Image Properties Images Additional Movement Format Action Pick Minimum cv General 0 Em Maximum Y General 100 Vertical Position Tag L c Pick Minimum General C Maximum General Jo Eit Horizontal Position
220. applied to a display page or to a tag and not to the user interface element that accesses the page or makes a change to the tag The alternative subject based approach typically means that you have to be careful to apply security settings to every single user interface element that might change restricted data Crimson s approach avoids this duplication and ensures that once you have decided to protect a tag it will remain protected throughout your database NAMED USERS Crimson supports the ability to create any number of users each of whom will have a username a real name and a password The username is a case insensitive string with no embedded spaces that is used to identify the user when logging on while the real name is typically a longer string that is used within logon files to record the human readable identity of the user making a change Note that you are free to use these fields in other ways if it suits your application You may for example create users that represent groups of individuals or perhaps roles such as Operators Supervisors and Managers You may also decide to use the real name to hold an item such as a clock number to tie user identities into your MRP system eUntitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 View User Link Help OSG 2 e User Details RealName John Doe i Credentials Password wen Override Existing System Rights T Change Own Passwo
221. arison or logical operators defined in the Writing Expressions section If you need more complex logic such that one of several actions is performed based on more complex decision making configure the primitive in user defined mode and use it to invoke a program that implements the required logic In addition the Remote property can be used to enable or disable this action via the web server s virtual panel facility In order for remote access to be allowed the Enable expression must evaluate to a non zero value and the Remote property must be set to Enabled ACTION DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each available type of action When each type is selected the Action Details portion of the action dialog box will change to show the available options PAGE 166 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI ACTION DESCRIPTIONS THE GOTO PAGE ACTION This action is used to instruct the G3 to show a new page The options are shown below cerRectangle Properties 1 Format Action Action Mode Operation hus Action Details Target Page 2 Show As Previous Page r Action Control Enable w General TRUE Edi Remote Enabled x Set As Defaults e The Target Page property is used to indicate which page should be displayed You can either choose a specific one to be displayed or choose Previous Page to retu
222. as been selected and a number of toolboxes will appear THE DRAWING TOOLBOX The drawing toolbox is used to add various elements known as primitives 4 788 to the display page The first two icons control the insertion mode while 2 re n uu the balance of the icons represent individual primitives primitives shown in yellow basic geometric and animation items while the ones E mng shown in green are rich primitives that use formatting and other information from a data tag to control their operation The primitives shown in red are system items such as the active alarm viewer of the commands contained in the toolbox can also be accessed via the Insert menu THE FILL FORMAT TOOLBOX The fill format toolbox is used to control the pattern that will be used to fill a re display primitive If one or more primitives is selected clicking on fill ZA N Bmssmg pattern will change all the selected items to use that pattern If nothing is currently selected clicking on a pattern will set the default pattern for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu or via the paint can icon on the toolbar THE LINE FORMAT TOOLBOX The line format toolbox is used to control the color that will be used to draw an outline around a display primitive If one or more primitives is selected clicking on a line co
223. at occur when primitives are touched you may define actions to be executed when keys are pressed To do this first change the zoom level so that the required key can be seen Then double click the key to produce the following dialog box Z8 MENU Key This Page All Pages Action Mode Operation Action Details Target Page Page Show As Normal Page m r Action Control Enable General TRUE Ede Remote Enabled x You will note that this dialog box is similar to that shown earlier in respect of primitives but that it has two tabbed pages The first page is used to define what will happen when the key in question is pressed when the current page is selected The second page is used to define what will happen if the key is pressed when any page is selected The first type of action is called a local action while the second type is called a global action The color used to display the key will change according to which actions are defined If the key is displayed in PURPLE a local action is defined for this PAGE If the key is displayed in GREEN a GLOBAL action is defined 1 If the key is displayed in BLUE local and global actions are BOTH defined 1 Once you have defined an action you can right click on the key and use the resulting menu to select either Make Global or Make Local to change the action type These options will not be available if both type
224. ata Availability section in this chapter for details of a timeout than can occur when using these properties The On Tick property is used to define an action that will run every second while this page is displayed Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute it will be skipped and retried one second later The On Update property is use to define an action that will be run each time the page is redrawn Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute it will be skipped and retried on the next PAGE 218 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS update You should note that you can severely reduce system performance by performing complex actions on every display update You should also note that in many cases actions that you may think need to be run on each update can be performed using triggers or by using mapping blocks The Parent Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Exit key is pressed while this page is active Selection of this page can be overridden using the techniques below The Next Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Next key
225. authenticated Users and Programs Display Pages Unauthenticated Users Edt Default Logging Mapped Tags Do Not Log Changes Edt Internal Tags Do Not Log Changes p Logging Control Enable Logging ws New Fle Ever i s T The available properties are as follows The nactivity Timeout property is used to indicate how much time must pass without user input before the current user is automatically logged off Too high a value for this setting will produce an insecure system while too low a value will produce a system that is awkward for operators Clear Logon Name property is used to indicate whether or not the username should be cleared before asking the operator to logon If this setting is disabled the previous username will be displayed and only the password will need to be REVISION 6 PAGE 257 CREATING USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER re entered Enabling this feature produces higher security and may be required to comply with security standards in certain industries e The Default Access properties are used to indicate the access to be provided to various objects should no specific access be defined for that item The settings are as described in the Access Control section above Default Logging properties are used to indicate whether changes to mapped and unmapped tags should be logged should no specific
226. ave been removed as most of the actions performed by such events can now be handled via other mechanisms For example comms update complete was often used to move data between devices This can now be performed using the protocol conversion functionality of the Communications window In addition these events were often misused and led to the creation of overly complex databases e While Edict would typically manage something between two and five display updates per second Crimson is designed to redraw the display every 100msec thus providing for example smoother operator feedback during data entry PAGE 224 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS USING THE PROGRAM LIST CONFIGURING PROGRAMS The previous sections of this manual describe how you can use actions to perform all manner of operations in response to key presses or changes in data tags If you need to perform an action that is too complex to fit on a single line or that demands more complex decision making logic you can use the Programming icon from the main screen to create and manipulate programs You should note that many applications will not need programs You may thus choose to skip this chapter if desired 20 6306 2 0 Program Link Help DegH xoe mx s v if TankLevel lt 100 Limitlo 1 else Limitlo 0 if TankLevel gt 500 LimitHi 1 else
227. cic Dg e d n Kg A e dr e ar E LR ORC alin 30 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING eene 34 THE GENERAL TAB THE CONTROL TAB THE POWER MN TTE THE ALARMS ere nere nere eec acci c eie a ka desde ER rr EE va chore ep eee lv a CR THE OurPUTS TAB 2 AVAILABUE Ore Red ue MS A Re nth an cole CURL CSTC CSRTD TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING eene 51 THE CONFIGURATION 5 5 eie dran ono iru nna sn oa raa nara ama erar ra ded dev aen ded a eaa e a vu na 51 AVAILABLE DATA E e EE DC ERE OH E A ETE T XAR YR OR FO 52 CSINI CSINV ANALOG INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING eene nen nnns 53 TAB z 2296s ades tp cts mure cox eet deer aga woe EE Dae 53 THE LINEARIZATION TAB cus aaa ec c uss Ci RO e E d d d e i x C E ER e viu 54 AVAILABLE DATA a A e vce EO EN E ERR CURE RE ERE RYE AKIO ON RR Oa 55 CSOUT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING eene nnn nnns 56 THE CONFIGURATION TAB THE INITIAL OUTPUT TAB AVAILABLE PT C CSDIO DIGITAL I O MODULE 60 THE CONFIGURATION cred aep tette Fe e e e 60 THE UOGIC EDITOR TAB i citron 60
228. cified file and returns the number of bytes successfully written This function does not automatically include a Line feed and carriage return at the end For easier programming refer to WriteFileLine FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE count WriteFile hFile Writing text to file REVISION 6 PAGE 433 WRITEFILELINE FILE TEXT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WRITEFILELINE FILE TEXT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as required by OpenFile text cstring Text to be written to file DESCRIPTION Writes a string to the specified file and returns the number of bytes successfully written including the carriage return and linefeed characters that will be appended to each line FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE count WriteFileLine hFile Writing text to file PAGE 434 http www redlion net controller TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING This section covers the most common problems encountered while setting up programming or using the product Do not forget to always download in the device after changing settings in Crimson GENERAL PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Unit screen is blank And PWR LED on Backlight tube is broken Program one of the soft keys with the action as User Defined and the following code in the fi
229. citation property configures the output excitation voltage for either 5 or 10 Volts e The Display Low and Display High properties are used to scale the input to indicate units of measure Enter the desired PV readings that correspond to the Signal Low and Signal High values respectively ie If the application involves a strain gage that produces 0 to 21 00 mV output proportional to 0 to 1000 lbs enter 0 for the Display Low property and 1000 for the Display High property e The Signal Low and Signal High properties are used to scale the input Enter the signal levels that correspond to the Display Low and Display High properties respectively ie If the application involves a strain gage that produces a 0 to 21 00 mV output proportional to 0 to 1000 Ibs enter 0 for the Signal Low property and 21 00 mV for Signal High property OPERATION The Control Type property allows you to choose from Reverse only Direct only or Reverse and Direct depending on the type of process to be controlled PAGE 34 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING e PV Assignment selects how the module determines its measured process value The PV value is the value that the module s PID algorithm will attempt to control This can simply be the Input 1 value or one of several mathematical results of Input 1 and Input 2 e The PV Limit Low and PV Limit High properties are used to est
230. ck if the primitive corresponds to the tag type For example primitive is a Text Integer so the tag has to be an integer Use the transform property on the tag to modify the data source You might have to try multiple solutions to solve the issue PAGE 436 http www redlion net controller TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Symbol or image leaves a trace when The background of the image is not refreshed Change the primitive Fill Format to Solid color animated Add the system variable dispcount in the background of the image to force the refresh Rich Bar Graph or Tag minimum and maximum are not Check the tag s minimum and Dial Gauge does not move setup maximum values These are used by both primitives for min and max Trend Viewer curve stuck at the bottom No minimum and maximum setup on the data tags displayed in the viewer Check that all displayed tags in the trend viewer have a Minimum and a Maximum setup Display shows TIMEOUT or NOT READY or WORKING Program issue See program troubleshooting USB Drivers location for Windows Location of the drivers unknown The drivers are located under Crimson 2 0 Device installation folder For example C Program Files Red Lion Controls Crimson 2 0 Device USB Driver The operating system is unable to find In your operating sy
231. cle Time for Output 2 0 1 60 0 sec R W CycleTime3 Cycle Time for Output 3 0 1 60 0 sec R W CycleTime4 Cycle Time for Output 4 CSPID2 only 0 1 60 0 sec R W OUTPUTS REMOTE DATA DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS DigRemotel Digital Remote 1 Outputs assigned to Digital Remote 0 or 1 bit R W can be controlled by writing the DigRemote bit to a 1 or 0 DigRemote2 Digital Remote 2 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W DigRemote3 Digital Remote 3 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W DigRemote4 Digital Remote 4 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W AnlRemotel Analog Remote Value 1 Outputs assigned to Analog k R W Remote can be controlled by writing a number to this word AnlRemote2 Analog Remote Value 2 See AnlRemotel R W AnlRemote3 Analog Remote Value 3 See AnlRemotel R W AnlRemote4 Analog Remote Value 4 See AnlRemotel R W OUTPUTS I NFORMATION DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS OPIState State of Output 1 0 or 1 bit R OP2State State of Output 2 0 or 1 bit R OP3State State of Output 3 0 or 1 bit R Configuration dependent Except for the application detailed below these numbers may be treated as signed integers All temperature inputs are measured to a tenth of a degree resolution For process inputs the resolution is dependent on the user scaling values Application exception If the application involves Fahrenheit measurement over 3000 degrees with a C type thermocouple the following values should be
232. contains the following colors e The sixteen standard VGA colors e The sixteen custom colors defined by the user e Fourteen shades of gray that fall between black and white The More option at the bottom of the list can be used to invoke the color selection dialog Select Color Basic colors mum SEES NI Custom colors mmmummummmu Define Custom Colors Carel 94 Hue 86 Red Sat 126 Green 1 ES Lum 120 Blye f Add to Custom Colors This dialog offers several ways of defining a color You can pick from the palette pick from the rainbow window or enter the explicit HSL or RGB parameters The dialog also allows custom colors to be added to the palette These will appear whenever the dialog is invoked and will also appear in the drop down list described above Note that not every color that is displayed in the rainbow will be capable of being rendered on the virtual HMI s 256 color display Crimson will choose the nearest color within the abilities of the device EDITING FLAG TAGS You will recall that flag tags represent a true or false value The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing one of the various kinds of flag tags Not present on monochrome virtual HMI PAGE 108 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS THE DATA TAB VAR
233. contents This may take up to a minute and will restrict data logging operations during that time and prevent access to custom web pages Crimson will use the Master s RAM to ensure that no data is lost but if too many writes are performed such that the card is kept locked for four minutes or more data may discarded Note that Windows 98 is particularly bad at keeping the card locked when there is no need for it Windows 2000 or Windows XP is thus the operating system of choice when using this feature e You should never attempt to use Windows to format a CompactFlash card that you have mounted via the Master whether it be via Explorer or from the command prompt Windows does not correctly lock the card during format operations and the format may thus be unreliable and lead to subsequent data loss See below for details of how to format a card in a reliable manner FORMATTING THE COMPACTFLASH The preferred method of formatting a card is via the Format Flash command on the Link menu Selecting this command will explain that the formatting process will destroy all the data stored on the CompactFlash card and offer you a chance to cancel the operation If you elect to continue the Master will be instructed to format the card Note that this process may take several minutes for a large card Slow formats on Masters that are performing data logging may therefore result in gaps in the recorded data A less attractive method of formatting a card is
234. counter To access the counter s preset value double click the counter symbol When using counters you must assign each counter a unique Map ID number 1 8 When mapping both the actual count value and the counter preset value via communications the Map ID number will correspond to the variable numbers See Available Data table at the end of this section for more information The Latch symbol allows pulsed input to be converted to maintained output The output remains active until the reset input is activated RST 1 The input and output Coils act as soft inputs and outputs These are used to IN lt DUT g m provide signals that are mapped to external devices via communications without actually requiring a physical input or output be consumed You must assign each coil a unique Map ID number 1 8 When mapping the coils via communications the Map ID number will correspond to the variable number See Available Data table at the end of this section for more information AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers VARIABLES T NPUTS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS Inputl 8 Input State 0 or 1 bit R InputCoill 8 Input Coil State 0 or 1 bit R W PAGE 62 http www redlion net controller
235. ctangle around the primitives you want to select or select each primitive in turn holding down the Shift key to indicate that you want each primitive to be added to the selection If multiple primitives are selected the red rectangle will surround all of the primitives and the handles can then be used to resize the primitives as a group The relative size and position of the primitives will be maintained as long as Crimson can do so without violating minimum size requirements MOVING AND RESIZING Primitives can be moved by first selecting them and then by dragging them to the required position on the display page If Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page Holding down ctri while moving primitive will leave a copy of the primitive in its original position thereby allowing duplicates to be created You can also use the cursor keys to nudge the current selection single pixel in the required direction Holding down ctr1 while nudging will increase the movement of the primitives by a factor of eight Primitives can be resized by selecting them and then by dragging the appropriate handle to the required position Once again if Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page The shift and Ctr1 keys can be used to modify the resize behavior as described in the Adding Display Primitives section Note that
236. ctions FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t Date 2000 12 31 PAGE 310 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DECTOTEXT DATA SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP DECTOTEXT DATA SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data int float Numeric data to be formatted signed int 0 unsigned 1 soft sign 2 hard sign before int Number of digits to the left of the decimal point after int Number of digits to the right of the decimal point leading int 0 no leading zeros 1 leading zeros group int 0 no grouping 1 group digits in threes DESCRIPTION Formats the value in data as a decimal value according to the rest of the parameters The function is typically used to generate advanced formatting option via programs or to prepare strings to be sent via a raw port driver FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text DecToText varl 2 5 2 0 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 311 DEG2RAD THETA CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DEG2RAD 7HETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION theta float The angle to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns theta converted from degrees to radians FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Load Weight cos Deg2Rad Angle PAGE 312 http www redlion
237. d change data in the server PROGRAMMING A SERVER The server interface 1s programmed as described in OPC server settings previously The OPC server just has to be activated so data can be shared Any tags present in the server database will be available for clients except Arrays and String tags PROGRAMMING A CLIENT Access to the server tags is achieved via the OPC Master protocol available on the Ethernet protocols in Communication Once the driver is selected a new device is created Driver Selection Driver No Driver Selected Eas o 8 R5 232 Comms Port 0 R5 485 Comms Port 8 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 ES No Driver Selected cnet web Close The properties available on HMII are the server s OPC and Ethernet settings The JP Address and TCP Port should match the server s The Browse button provides access to a dialog box where the server database should be identified Using this method Crimson knows the tags available in the server unit The tag list is pulled from the server database so it can be available when mapping new tags in the client PAGE 94 http www redlion net controller USING TIME MANAGEMENT E ERU NE GET ERE 5 Device Settings 48 Programming Port d 85 232 Comms Part IV Enable Device d 5 485 Comms Port Bak Ethernet Device Identification
238. d process parameters such as the setpoint PID values input scaling etc e The PID Parameters property dictates which PID parameters the module will load and subsequently use to control the process The module controls the process using the Active PID values and Active Power Filter See ActConstP ActConstI ActConstD and ActFilter variables in the Available Data chart at the end of this section The active set is loaded with either the User PID Settings or the Auto Tune Results values depending on the state of the ReqUserPID bit If the bit is true the Active set is loaded with the user s variables If the bit is false the values that were established by auto tune are loaded Adjusting the PID Parameters property writes the ReqUserPID bit appropriately upon initialization The Control Mode property dictates whether the module will be in auto or manual mode upon initialization In auto mode the controller calculates the REVISION 6 PAGE 35 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER required output to reach and maintain setpoint and acts accordingly In manual mode the output can be controlled directly by writing to the power variable Initial Setpoint property is used as the setpoint value upon initialization e Manual Power is the level the PID module will assume in manual mode Values in excess of 100 and 100 can be entered to overcome the limitations caused
239. d GT only The Master will act as a server waiting for client applications to connect and download or upload files For example a user can connect to a Master using an FTP client software and download log files from the CompactFlash card to the PC hard drive On the other hand he could upload new recipe files or updated HTML files for the custom web site from the PC hard drive to the Master CompactFlash card PAGE 100 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER Numerous FTP clients are available on the market some free others at a charge Windows Explorer is an example of FTP client embedded in the OS The FTP Server configuration is available in the Communication module FTP SERVER SETTINGS Check the Enable FTP Server check box to activate the FTP Server support The following settings are then available 5 gt Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 View Link Help inex pr Record Log File Dvr ERES The Anonymous Access defines the rights for a user accessing the server with anonymous username and password If Disabled no anonymous users can access the server In Read Only mode the anonymous user can only download files from the CompactFlash card In Read Write the user will have full access on the CompactFlash card For security reasons Disabled is recommended Enable the Record Log File to keep a log of all FTP interactions in
240. d as required by the application e The Save to CompactFlash property is used to enable the writing of events to CSV files on the card fitted to the Master Events are stored using techniques similar to those for data logging The New File Every and Retain at Most properties control how files are allocated Refer to the Configuring Data Logging chapter for information on how the data is written and how files are named NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Crimson s Data Tags window is used to perform all of the various functions that were previously implemented using the Named Data window the Alarm Scanner and the Trigger Table Not present on monochrome virtual HMI PAGE 130 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS NOTES FOR EDICT USERS e Crimson does not have the concept of constants as a separate tag family Edict used constants to help it perform certain optimizations that Crimson is now able to perform automatically Constants can thus be implemented using formulae e Crimson associates alarms and triggers with tags rather than allowing them to be defined on the basis of arbitrary expressions If you need to have an alarm or trigger monitor a general expression define a formula to be equal to that expression and set the alarm and or trigger on that tag instead REVISION 6 PAGE 131 CONFIGURI NG THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI CONTROLLING THE VIEW
241. d for registers in the first or only device within the database Examples of this syntax are shown below EXAMPLE MEANING D100 Register D100 in first device AB N7 0 Register N7 0 in device AB FX D100 Register D100 in device FX SIMPLE MATH As mentioned above expressions often contain more than one data value with their values being combined mathematically The simplest of these expressions may add a pair of values while a more complex expression might obtain the average of three values These operations are performed using the familiar syntax you will have seen in applications such as Excel The examples below show the basic operations that can be performed OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Addition Group 4 Tagl Tag2 Subtraction Group 4 Tagl Tag2 Multiplication Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Division Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Remainder Group 3 Tagl Tag2 Although the examples show spaces surrounding the operators these are not required OPERATOR PRIORITY You will have noticed the Priority column in the above table As you no doubt recall from your algebra classes when several operators are used together they are evaluated in a defined order For example multiplication is always evaluated before addition Crimson implements this ordering by means of what are known as operator priorities with each operator being put in a group and with operators being applied in order fr
242. d format The mage properties define each particular image The Pick button next to each image can be used to launch the image library to allow an image to be selected the Browse button can be used to open a file containing a bitmap a JPEG or a Windows metafile the Clear button can be used to remove the image and the Adjust button can be used to edit the image as discussed below PAGE 210 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS If you use one of the Adjust buttons to manipulate an image you will first be warned about the problems you will encounter if you then try to download a database containing manipulated images using earlier versions of the Windows operating systems Assuming you are happy to rule out the use of such earlier releases the following dialog box will appear Adjust Image x r Pan Zoom Spin E p 100 0 Options v Show Center Reset Mirror Horizontal Vertical Cancel The various sliders can be used to pan zoom and spin the image while the checkboxes can be used to mirror it horizontally or vertically The Show Center checkbox shows or hides the blue lines that mark the center of the image while the Reset button can be used to restore the image to its original state The various manipulation options are typically used to modify an image in order to create various different states for use in
243. d panel size it might not be possible to visualize the entire screen design even when zoomed out It is possible however to get this view using the View gt Panel gt Show Screen menu This menu is only available when the Panel is NOT in display only mode Edition of the screen however will not be available in this mode since the screen resolution is too small for accurate drawings 926310 Library test 6310 Crimson 2 0 10 xl File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help 2 User Interface HeatCool B Filing Maincontrol E3 Heating B cooling E3 Alarms Origin 039 173 Position 119 231 OVER caes NUM OTHER VIEW OPTIONS As well as controlling the zoom the View menu contains the following options e Page List command can be used to show or hide the left hand pane of the User Interface window If the page list is disabled even more space is made available for editing the display The key toggles the page list on and off e Hold Aspect command be used to control whether or not Crimson attempts to maintain the aspect ratio of the display If aspect holding is enabled a figure that would appear as say a circle on the monochrome virtual HMI will appear as a perfect circle on your PC If this mode is not selected Crimson can expand the display page to use more of the PC s screen but at the expens
244. d to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed If this property is set to yes the label will be left justified within the primitive s bounding rectangle while the data itself will be right justified If this property is set to no the Horizontal Justification property will be used to locate the data in the field The Show Data property 1s used to indicate whether or not the primitive should include the data value or whether it should just show the label Since the primitive might be capable of reflecting the state of the underlying data item by means of color alone the actual value may sometimes be omitted The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable REVISION 6 PAGE 181 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag e Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the Master s display to flash if the tag entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for string text primitives or for those p
245. d to the converted picture number that will be used by the primitive in the Image Selection property to identify the image The switches field may contain one or more of the following options nocomp can be used so the Bitmap result is not compressed wide be used to use 16 bit colors instead of 256 As an example the following command line makepic C MyImages picture bmp 1 will convert the image picture bmp and create a file pic001 g3p under the makepic installation folder This file can then be copied over to the CompactFlash card under the PICS folder This image will be available for the CF Image primitive when image selection is equal to 1 THE DIAL GAUGE PRIMITIVES The Full Dial Gauge primitive displays an integer value as a pointer with a 270 swing within a full circle The primitive can optionally display the data value and the associated data label The number of scale divisions can also be defined The Half Dial Gauge primitive functions as does the full dial gauge but displays a pointer with a 180 swing within a half circle All the other formatting and display options remain the same PAGE 214 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Quarter Dial Gauge primitive functions as does the full dial gauge but a displays a pointer with a 90 swing within a quarter circle All the other formatting and display options remain the same Jus
246. d value i e With a deadband of 10 and an output value of 50 the output will not change until 45 or 55 is called for The units expressed are the same as those of the Mapping value e The Output Update time can be used to decrease the update frequency of the analog output When the Output Update timer expires the analog output checks to see if the required change is greater than the Output Deadband value If the required change is greater the output will reflect the new value If not the output does not change and the timer starts again AUTO TUNING OVERVIEW Auto tune may be used to establish the optimal P I D and Power Filter values By cycling the process through four on off cycles the module learns information about the process and determines the best values REVISION 6 PAGE 27 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER AUTO TUNE OPERATION REVERSE ACTING INPUT 4 SETPOINT AUTO TUNE CONTROL POINT 1 AUTO TUNE COMPLETE PID ies SETTINGS ARE CALCULATED AND LOADED INTO MEMORY TIME PHASE 1 2 3 4 Output 1 OP1 ON OFF ON OFF On Off Control Hysteresis As shown above the setpoint used during auto tune is the value 75 above the difference between the current PV and the setpoint This allows the oscillations to occur close to setpoint while avoiding excessive overshoot Since
247. defined functions that can be used to access system information or to perform common math operations These functions are defined in detail in the Function Reference They are invoked using a syntax similar to that for programs with any arguments to the function being enclosed within the parentheses For example cos 0 will invoke the cosine function with an argument of 0 returning a value of 1 0 PRIORITY SUMMARY The table below shows the priority of all the operators defined in this section GROUP OPERATORS Group 1 Group 2 d Group 3 KAP g Group 4 Group 5 lt lt gt gt Group 6 lt gt lt gt PAGE 266 http www redlion net controller WRITING EXPRESSIONS NOTES FOR EDICT USERS GRouP OPERATORS Group 7 Group 8 amp Group 9 Group 10 6 Group 11 amp amp Group 12 Group 13 2 Operators in the lower numbered groups are applied first NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e The and operators stop evaluation once the result is known The only available data types are string integer and floating point The ternary operator is now supported REVISION 6 PAGE 267 WRITING ACTIONS CHANGING PAGE WRITING ACTIONS While expressions are used to define values actions are used to define what you want to happen when a trigger or other event occurs Since the vast m
248. e General ASCII Frame protocol by providing a function to perform the parsing operations that the driver previously implemented Note that if you are not using custom ASCII protocols but are instead using the standard drivers provided with Crimson you can skip this section CONFIGURING A SERIAL PORT To use a serial port in raw mode select the Raw Serial Port driver as shown F Untitled File Crimson 2 e 4 RS 485 Comms Port Y Protocol Protocol 2 E Y Protocols Baud Rate Data Bis Party Driver Selection Red Lion Raw Serial Port Edit 5 54 Ethernet Driver Settings F Protocol 4 Port Settings Stop Bits VER CAPS NOM The port s Baud rate and other byte format parameters should be configured to indicate the required communications settings and the On Update property should be set to specify the program that will be performing the communication This program will be called continually by the port s communications task CONFIGURING A TCP IP SOCKET To use a TCP IP socket in raw mode select the Raw TCP IP Passive driver as shown dj R5 485 Comms Port Driver Selection dj Programming Port 48 RS 232 Comms Port Raw Serial Driver Raw TCP IP Passive Eja Ethernet On Update TCP Port Driver Settings Comms 1294 Jove aes om REVISION
249. e response of the analog output Increasing the value increases the dampening The Output Deadband value can be used to prevent the analog output from changing when only small adjustments are called for This is useful in preventing mechanical wear when driving a linear input valve The analog output will not adjust unless the change called for exceeds half of the deadband value 1 e With a deadband of 10 and an output value of 50 the output will not change until 45 96 or 55 1s called for The units expressed are the same as those of the Mapping value e The Output Update time can be used to decrease the update frequency of the analog output When the Output Update timer expires the analog output checks to see if the required change is greater than the Output Deadband value If the required change is greater the output will reflect the new value If not the output does not change and the timer starts again AUTO TUNING OVERVIEW Auto tune may be used to establish the optimal P I D and Power Filter values By cycling the process through four on off cycles the module learns information about the process and determines the best values REVISION 6 PAGE 43 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER AUTO TUNE OPERATION REVERSE ACTING INPUT 4 SETPOINT AUTO TUNE CONTROL POINT 1 AUTO TUNE COMPLETE PID ies SETTIN
250. e Contents property is used to indicate which tag should be logged The first list shows the selected tags while the second shows those that are available within the database Tags can be added to the log by double clicking them in the right hand list they can be removed by double clicking them in the left hand list or by pressing the De1 key while the tag is selected The Up and Down buttons can be used to move tags within the list One day someone may even get around to implementing drag and drop to allow easier manipulation of this list Loc STORAGE As mentioned above a data log stores its data in a series of files on the Master s CompactFlash card These files are placed in a subdirectory named after the data log with this directory being stored under a root directory entry called LOGS FILENAME FOR CONTINUOUS DATA LOGGING The files are named after the time and date at which the log is scheduled to begin If each file contains an hour or more of information the files will be named YYMMDDhh csv where vv represents the year of the file MM represents the month DD represents the date and hh represents the hour If each file contains less than one hour of information the files will instead be named MMDDhhmm csv with the initial six characters as described above and the trailing mm representing the minute at which the log began These rules ensure that each log file has a unique name The length of each file depends on the Upda
251. e a blank database and reconfigure Crimson to work with that specific product REVISION 6 PAGE 11 USING BALLOON HELP CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER USING BALLOON HELP Crimson provides a useful feature called Balloon Help Select the modes to be used on the backplane Configure operational parameters of each module tg 3H x AG To select a target device other than a CSNSTREC use the New command on the Fie forex ees This feature allows you to see help information for each icon in the main menu or for each field in a dialog box or window It is controlled via the icon at the right hand edge of the toolbar and can be configured to three modes namely Do Not Display in which case balloon help is disabled When Mouse Over in which case help is displayed when the mouse pointer is held over a particular field for a certain period of time or When Selected in which case help is always displayed for the currently selected field WORKING WITH DATABASES Crimson stores all the information about a particular device s configuration in what is called a database file These files have the extension of 2 although Windows Explorer will hide this extension if it is left in its default configuration Crimson database files differ from those used by previous Red Lion products in that they are text files which are thus far easier to recover in the case of accidental corruptio
252. e file must be given the name DBASE CDI and it along with the BIN LDR and ROM files must be placed in the root directory of a CompactFlash card To update a Master module power down the unit insert the CompactFlash card bearing the four files and reapply power to the unit The Master s boot loader will first check whether it needs to upgrade the unit s firmware and once this process has been completed the Crimson runtime application will load the database stored on the card The CompactFlash card can then be removed or left in place as required PAGE 16 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION WORKING WITH MODULES MODULE CONFIGURATION The first step in the configuration of a database for the Modular Controller is to create and configure the various modules used in the application This is done under the Modules window of Crimson 5 2 ven cars NM WORKING WITH MODULES INSERTING MODULES To insert a module into the system double click on the blank base You will be prompted to choose the type of module to insert You may also provide a descriptive name for the module Select Module Module Name cancel If you are going to program multiple modules same program just one and then use Copy and Paste functions to create duplicates This can be done by right clicking a module or the base or by using standard Windows commands eg Ctrl
253. e how many data items the array should hold Array elements are referred to using square brackets such that Array 0 is the first element and Array n 1 is the last element where n is equal to the value entered for this property The Sign Mode property is used to override the default behavior of the comms driver when reading 16 bit values from a remote device The driver will normally make a decision about whether to treat these values as signed or unsigned based upon how the data is normally used within the device If you want to override this decision set this property as required e The remainder of the properties as described for the Data tab of flag tags THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of an integer tag contains the following properties gt Untitled File Crimson 2 0 He Edt yew Unk E 44 9 Data Label Label text Translate y Data Limits Minimum valse General_ 1 0 Forms 8 Maximum value 7 General As P Forms Ed Data Format Number Base Decimal c Signmode unsigned T Triggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Format Digits Before DP Digits After DP 0 Leading Zeros 2 Group Digits ves 71 Prefix None Translate Suffix gals Examples Positive shown es 1 234 gals REVISION 6 PAGE 117 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER e The
254. e left hand edge of the reference primitive Similarly selecting Middle for vertical will align the primitives so that the horizontal line through the center of each are aligned with the same line through the center of the reference primitive In Size mode the edge alignment operations work by growing the non reference primitives in order to achieve the desired results while the center alignment operations work by changing the height or width of the primitives to make them match the reference primitive You may want to experiment with Size mode to get a better idea of its operation SPACING PRIMITIVES If you have a number of primitives that you wish to space equally on the page you may use the Space Equally Vertical or Space Equally Horizontal commands on the Arrange menu The commands work on the currently selected primitives and attempt to reallocate the free space between the items to achieve equal spacing The two outer primitives will be left in their current positions Note that the command may fail if an inappropriate set of primitives are selected and may not achieve perfect spacing if the available space is too limited REORDERING PRIMITIVES Primitives on a display page are stored in what is known as a z order This defines the sequence in which the primitives are drawn and therefore whether or not a given primitive appears to be in front of or behind another primitive In the first example below the blue square is shown behind the
255. e limit the output to less than their maximums e The Latching property if enabled will cause the input fault bit to stay active until accepted regardless of the state of the input To reset the fault the InputAccept bit must be written to a 1 If latching is not selected the fault will automatically deactivate when the input failure is corrected THE OUTPUTS TAB lt 2 gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit View Link Help 2 ee SPIDI Properties Digital Outputs Output 1 Heat Power Cyde Time 20 secs Output 2 unassigned Output 3 unassigned p Linear Output Output Type Process 4 20mA Mapping Heat Power Drive Min 000 Drive Max At 10000 LEDs Outputs Power Control General Output Fiter 0 0 secs Output Deadband 000 Output Update 0 0 secs ven cars NOM DIGITAL OUTPUTS e The Output n properties are used to assign the module s physical outputs to various internal properties or values The CSPID2 s list is expanded to include the channel number eg Channel 1 Heat Power or Channel 2 Heat Power The Cycle Time value is the sum of a time proportioned output s on and off cycles With time proportional outputs the percentage of output power is converted into output on time of the cycle time value eg if the controller s algorithm calls for 65 power and has a
256. e of some distortion Other options are available during page editing and are described below USING THE PAGE LIST To create rename or delete display pages click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Page menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right click on the required display page and select from the menu PAGE 158 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURII NG THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI WORKING WITH THE GRID To select a page either click on the page in the page list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use Alt Left and Altt tRight key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected WORKING WITH THE GRID The Show Grid command on the View menu can be used to show or hide an eight pixel grid that is useful for aligning objects Every eighth column of the grid is shown in a brighter color as is every sixth row Various drawing operations may be configured so as to snap to the grid points whether or not the grid is shown The three separate actions of creating objects moving objects and sizing objects may be controlled individually or the Snap for AII or Snap for None commands may be used to control all three actions at once THE DRAWING TOOLBOX To edit the contents of a display page first select the page as described above Then click th
257. e rectangle that represents the Master s display Bb A white rectangle will appear around the display to indicate that it has been selected and the drawing toolbox will appear This toolbox is used to add various elements known as primitives to 0 0 3 the display page The first two icons control the insertion mode while ioc Bu the balance of the icons represent individual primitives The primitives shown in yellow basic geometric and animation items while the ones shown in green rich primitives that use formatting and other DOeEe a information from a data tag to control their operation The primitives Aib n shown in red are system items such as the active alarm viewer Primitives shown in blue are typically enhanced versions of other primitives that were added to the software more recently All of the commands contained in the toolbox can also be accessed via the Insert menu REVISION 6 PAGE 159 ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES To add a display primitive to a page click on the required icon in the drawing toolbox or select the required option from the Insert menu The mouse cursor will change to an arrow with a crosshair at its base and you will then be able to drag out the required position of the primitive within the display window 5 gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0
258. e removed from the display if a new page is selected by invoking the GotoPage function or by a suitably defined keyboard action FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ShowPopup Popup1 PAGE 414 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SIN THETA SIN 7 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION theta float The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the sine of the angle theta FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE yp radius sin theta REVISION 6 PAGE 415 SIRENON CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SIRENON ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Turns on the operator panel s internal siren FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SirenOn PAGE 416 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SLEEP PERIOD SLEEP PERIOD ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION period int The period for which to sleep in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Sleeps the current task for the indicated number of milliseconds This function is normally used within programs that run in the background or that implement custom communications using Raw Port drivers Calling it in response to triggers or key presses is not recom
259. e to write the new value To handle this if the operator attempts to perform an action for which the required data is not available the Master module will display a NOT READY message until the key in question is released The operator must then wait a short while and try the operation again In practice communications updates normally take place quickly enough that even the most nimble fingered operator will be hard pressed to get the message to appear but since it may on occasions be seen it is worth explaining A slightly more complex issue comes about if the action defined by a page s On Select property is unable to proceed because it also finds that required data is not available Here Crimson will wait up to thirty seconds for the data to arrive If it does not the action will not be performed and a TIMEOUT message will be displayed for the operator This timeout mechanism 15 required to avoid problems should a communications link become severed PAGE 156 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI CONTROLLING THE VIEW CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI Now that you have configured your communications options and created data tags for the various items that you wish to display you can create display pages to allow the user to view or edit these data items These pages are manipulated by selecting the User Interface icon from the main screen Please note that this chapter refers specificall
260. ead and Read Behind properties modify the behavior of the adaptive read policy by controlling how many adjoining registers will be read when a specific array element is referenced The adjoining reads are used to maximize the chance of data being available when indirection is used to scroll up or down an array The default values should be suitable for most applications e The On Write property is as described for flag variables REVISION 6 PAGE 111 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab ofa flag tag contains the following properties F Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Ble Edt Teg Link Help 2 8 e over eres Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the virtual HMI The On State and Off State properties are used to specify the text to be displayed when the tag contains a non zero and zero value respectively When you enter the text for the on state Crimson will attempt to generate corresponding text for the off state by referring both to previously created flag tags and to its internal list of common antonymic pairs THE CO
261. earlier versions of software are not used PAGE 260 http www redlion net controller WRITING EXPRESSIONS DATA VALUES CHARACTER CONSTANTS Character constants represent a single ASCII character encoded in the lower 8 bits of a 32 bit signed number A character constant comprises a single character enclosed in single quotation marks such that A can be used to represent a value of 65 Certain otherwise unprintable or unrepresentable characters can be encoded using what are called escape sequences each of which is introduced with a single backslash SEQUENCE VALUE ASCII a Hex 0x07 Decimal 7 BEL t Hex 0x09 Decimal 9 TAB n Hex 0x0A Decimal 10 LF Hex 0x0C Decimal 12 FF Nr Hex 0x0D Decimal 13 CR Hex 0x1B Decimal 27 ESC xnn The hex value represented by nn nnn The octal value represented by nnn NN A single backslash character Met A single quotation mark character A double quotation mark character LOGICAL CONSTANTS Logical constants represent a 1 or 0 value that is used to indicate the truth or otherwise of a yes or no expression An example of something that can be assigned to be equal to a logical constant is a tag that represents a digital output in a PLC Logical constants can either be entered simply as 1 or 0 or by use of the keywords true or false FLOATING POINT CONSTANTS Floating point constants represent a 32 bit single precision float
262. eate Web Page button below the web server properties and are stored in a list similar to that used for display pages data logs and so on Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Edi View Page Link Help meg 8 ms Sve ss Each web page has the following properties The Title property is used to identify the web page in the menu presented to the user via their web browser Although the title is translatable current versions of Crimson use only the US version of the text The Refresh property is used to indicate whether or not the web browser should be instructed to refresh the page contents automatically Update rates between 1 and 8 seconds are supported Note that the amount of flicker exhibited by the web browser will vary according to the exact package used and the performance of the machine being employed The update is not intended to be flicker free The Contents property is used to indicate which tags should be included on the page The first list shows the selected tags while the second shows those that are available within the database Tags can be added to the page by double clicking them in the right hand list they can be removed by double clicking them in the left hand list or by pressing the Del key while the tag is selected The Up and Down buttons can be used to move tags within the list Drag and drop operation may one day be implemented to a
263. eated COM port for download When the software opens the connection the Master will suspend communications on the shared port and then data will be exchanged between the PC software and the remote PLC just as if they were connected directly When the port is closed or if no data 1s transferred for a minute communications will be resumed Note that assuming you ve purchased the appropriate number of licenses for Serial IP you will be able to create as many virtual ports as you need This means that you can be connected to multiple devices from the same PC downloading to each via its respective programming package all without plugging or unplugging a single cable This feature is extremely valuable when you have many devices in a complex system PURE VIRTUAL PORTS In some circumstances you may want to use a spare serial port on a Master to provide access to a remote device that is not otherwise connected to it Or you might want to use such a port to connect to a dedicated programming port on a device even though the Master is using PAGE 78 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING ELECTRONIC MAIL another port to perform communications with that device For example if you have a PLC equipped with a dedicated HMI port as well as a dedicated programming port you could communicate to it via the one and download to it via the other To do this configure the port to be used for programming in the usual wa
264. ections to computers running the Windows operating system Note that Crimson s modem support is fundamentally different from that provided by earlier Red Lion products in that it is entirely based upon the Point To Point Protocol otherwise known as PPP While protocols such a Modbus allow a single conversation to occur between any two devices PPP is more akin to an Ethernet connection in that it allows an unlimited number of logical connections to exist on a single physical link A single PPP connection can thus allow simultaneous access to the Master s TCP IP download facility its web server its shared serial ports and to any TCP IP protocols that have been selected via the Communications window SOME TYPICAL APPLICATIONS The sections below list some typical applications of modem technology e You want a Master in a remote location to send an email to a service engineer to inform him of a fault condition By configuring an on demand connection to an Internet Service Provider the Master 15 instructed to automatically connect when an email is to be sent and then to hang up when the message has been transferred e You want a Master in a remote location to send messages directly to the cell phones of a group of service engineers to inform them of a fault condition By configuring a GSM modem with SMS support the Master is instructed to notify the engineers of the fault by means of short text messages Further when a given engineer replies to
265. ed PAGE 160 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY KEYBOARD OPTIONS While creating a display primitive the following keyboard options are available e Holding down the shift key while dragging out the primitive will cause the primitive to be drawn such that it is centered on the initial mouse position with one of its corners defined by the current mouse position If this doesn t make sense go ahead and try it it s a lot easier to see than it is to explain This is useful for drawing symmetrical figures centered on an initial point e Holding down the ctri key while dragging out the primitive will keep its horizontal and vertical sizes the same This 1s useful when you want to be sure that you draw an exact circle or square using the ellipse or rectangle primitives These options are also active when primitives are re sized Lock INSERT MODE The padlock icon on the drawing toolbox can be used to add a number of primitives of the same basic type without having to click the toolbox icon for each item in turn To cancel lock mode click the padlock icon again or press the Escape key The same operation can be performed by using the Lock Mode command on the Insert menu USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY To add an image from Crimson s extensive image library click on the book icon in the toolbar or select the Picture Image command from the Insert menu The image library
266. ed by simply placing one after the other The exact string that will be required for your modem is dependent upon its internal software so if you contact Technical Support for assistance be sure to have exact make and model information available e The SMS Support property is used to enable Short Message Service messaging when using a GSM modem In order for SMS messaging to operate properly you will also have to enable the SMS Transport using the Mail icon in the Communications window as described above e The Logon Username and Logon Password properties are used to define the credentials that the remote client must provide in order to be allowed to connect to this device The username is not case sensitive while the password is Crimson s PPP implementation will ask its peer to use CHAP authentication to avoid transmitting or receiving plaintext password but will fallback to using PAP if the remote client does not support CHAP The Local Address property is used to define the IP address to be allocated to the local end of the connection This will thus be the IP address of the Master module for this link Please note that this must not be the same as the IP address of the Master s Ethernet port as every physical IP interface must have a distinct IP address The default value will work in most situations unless your network design demands that you use a different setting e The Remote Address property is used to define the IP address t
267. eld On Pressed dispcontrasttt Add objects to the User Interface in Crimson Push one of the soft keys to turn it back on Replace the backlight tube Unit continually cycles on and off Cross references between tags e g Varl uses Var2 as maximum which in turn uses Varl as minimum Database is corrupted Remove one of the references or use formula tags for indirect reference e g Forml is equal to Varl and used in Var2 minimum instead of Varl Create a new database or send to technical support for debugging Unit cycles power after an operation Most likely a program going in an endless loop Check if the operation launches program containing loops with no exit point Touchscreen not accurate The touchscreen is not calibrated correctly Use the Touch Calibration primitive to recalibrate Primitive available under Insert gt System gt Touch Calib Insert the primitive so it covers the entire screen CF LED flashing slowly CF card corrupted or invalid Format the card from Crimson using the Link gt Format Flash menu REVISION 6 PAGE 435 GENERAL CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Unit shows Version Mismatch The database currently in the device does not match Crimson s firmware version Message occurs after a download with a new version of C2
268. ements If one or more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected color If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default color for all newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES To add a display primitive to a page click on the required icon in the drawing toolbox or select the required option from the Insert menu The mouse cursor will change to an arrow with a crosshair at its base and you will then be able to drag out the required position of the primitive within the display window Ele View Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help 2 2 2 2 e SMART ALIGNMENT If you have the Smart Align features of the View menu enabled Crimson will provide you with guidelines to help align a new primitive with existing primitives or with the center of the display In the example shown above the horizontal dotted line indicates that the center of the tank primitive is vertically aligned with the center of the display With a little practice REVISION 6 PAGE 135 SELECTING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER this feature can make it very easy to align primitives as they are created without the need to go back and tweak your display pages to get the various figures into alignment In the Smart
269. en the trigger is activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports REVISION 6 PAGE 125 EDITING REAL TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER EDITING REAL TAGS You will recall that real tags represent a single precision floating point value All the tabs displayed for real tags are exactly the same as those displayed for integer tags with the exception that data entered for items such as the value and hysteresis properties of alarms and triggers may contain decimals You are thus referred to the sections on integer tags You will notice some selections for integer tags that are not applicable to real tags EDITING STRING TAGS You will recall that string tags represent an item of text this being made up of a number of individual characters The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing one of the various string tags THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of a string variable contains the following properties Z gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 View Tag Link Help 2 42 Variable Data AB StringArray Encoding unpacked fe arnom Mee B Accessi Length Read and Write Simulation Actions on write v To include this
270. en performing on off control The hysteresis value is centered around the setpoint that is the transition points of the output will be offset above and below the setpoint by half of the On Off Hysteresis value This value effects outputs programmed for Heat or Cool During auto tune the controller cycles the process through 4 on off cycles so it PAGE 20 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING is important to set the On Off Hysteresis to an appropriate value before initializing auto tune e On Off Deadband property provides a means of offsetting the on points of heat and cool outputs programmed for on off operation This results in a deadband if the value is positive and overlap if the value is negative When determining the actual transition points of the outputs the On Off Hysteresis value must also be taken into consideration AUTO TUNE SETTINGS Response property is used to ensure that an auto tune yields the optimal P I and D values for varying applications A setting of Very Aggressive results in a PID set that will reach setpoint as fast as possible with no concern for overshoot while a setting of Very Conservative sacrifices speed in order to prevent overshoot e Note If the Tune Response property is changed auto tune needs to be reinitiated for the changes to affect the PID settings See the Auto Tuning Section for more information USE
271. ened for editing MOUNTING THE COMPACTFLASH If you are connected to a Master module via the USB port you can instruct Crimson to mount the Master s CompactFlash card as a drive within Windows Explorer You can use this functionality to save files to the card or to read information from the Data Logger The drive is mounted and dismounted by sending commands using the Mount Flash and Dismount Flash options on the Link menu Once a command has been sent the Master module will be reset and Windows will refresh the appropriate Explorer windows to show or hide the CompactFlash drive PAGE 14 http www redlion net controller CRIMSON BASICS DOWNLOADING TO THE MASTER Bie Edit Favorites Tools Help Ki Floppy System C Apps G Groups I Work 2 Ecco P a 3 8 CDROM R U Vault V W Programs Control Panel n object s selected Note that some caution is required when mounting the CompactFlash card e When the card is mounted the Master will periodically inform the PC if data on the card has been modified This means that both the PC and the Master will suffer performance hits if the card is mounted during data logging operations for longer than necessary f you write to the CompactFlash card from your PC the Master will not be able to access the card until Windows releases its lock on the card s
272. ent is the port number to which the driver is bound The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera This function will return true if the successful false otherwise Note This function should be called in a user program that runs in the background to let the camera enough time to change the file FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success UseCameraSetup 4 0 1 Selects inspection file number 1 on camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 429 UsERLOGOFF CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER UsERLOGOFF ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Causes the current user to be logged off the system Any future actions that require security access rights will result in the display of the log on popup to allow the entry of credentials FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE UserLogOff PAGE 430 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE USERLOGON UsERLocON ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Forces the display of the log on popup to allow the entry of user credentials You do not normall
273. entered 2 gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 E sloj x Edt Insert Arrange Iren om Page Link 2 2 o m amp 2 1 2 This is text PAGE 178 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The text editor supports cutting pasting and all the other options normally found within a Windows editor The editor will also configure the keyboard to use the appropriate Input Method Editor for the currently selected default language Note that only the default language text can be edited directly Other versions of the text must be edited via the properties dialog box which is accessed by selecting the primitive and pressing Alt Enter by selecting the Properties command from the Edit menu dar Static Text Properties Contents Translate Text Format Leading 2 pixels Text Type ope 7 Foreground w Fixed Owte x Pick Background Fixed Mek Pick r Justification Horizontal center 7 Vertical middie v OK Cancel Set As Defaults The Text property is used to specify the text to be displayed As mentioned above the default language version of the text can also be edited directly on the display page when the primitive is created or by clicking an existing primitive The Font property is used to specify the fo
274. erate in local time and will have no knowledge of time zones or other time management information TIME SERVER Crimson 2 0 can act as an SNTP server by selecting yes in the Time Server Enable SNTP drop down selection box This will allow other Red Lion products to synchronize their own clocks to the clock of this unit The IP address of the server when programming the client is the Ethernet port IP address programmed in Crimson 2 0 Note that Crimson s implementation of SNTP is not fully RFC compliant and is not supported as a source of synchronization for non Red Lion clients TIME CLIENT Crimson 2 0 can act as an SNTP client by selecting yes in the Time Client Enable SNTP drop down selection box The operator interface will then attempt to synchronize its clock with another Red Lion product or to another SNTP time source such as a server on the network For example Windows XP Pro is an SNTP server e The Linked DST property is used to instruct the SNTP client to attempt to read the current Daylight Savings Time setting from the SNTP server As this facility is not a standard part of the SNTP protocol it will only operate if another Master or G3 operator panel is specified as the server The facility is useful in that it allows the Daylight Savings Time adjustment to be made via a single device on the factory network with the other devices then following the central setting The SNTP Mode and SNTP Server properties are used to c
275. essed and then held down The action occurs both on the initial depression and on subsequent auto repeats so there is no need to define both this property and On Pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program e The On Released property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is released This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program In the example above a user defined action is used to implement a momentary pushbutton BLOCK DEFAULT ACTION This action does not actually do anything but can be used as a place holder to prevent further processing As an example suppose you have configured F1 to perform a global action but want to prevent this action from being invoked on a particular page By configuring F1 on that page as Block Default Action the global action will not occur PAGE 154 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI CHANGING THE LANGUAGE CHANGING THE LANGUAGE To configure a key to change the language displayed by the virtual HMI select User Defined mode and enter SetLanguage n as the On Pressed property where n is a number between 1 and 8 according to the language to be displayed The display page will be
276. et of properties The balance of the tabs define alarms and triggers for the tag These are not included for string tags or for arrays Alarms are used to detect a condition that needs to be brought to the operator s attention or simply to log the fact that the condition has occurred Triggers operate in a similar way but instead of recording the condition they are used to execute an action EDITING PROPERTIES Most properties are edited in ways that are self evident to anyone who has used a Windows operating system For example you may be required to enter a numeric value or to select an item from a drop down list Certain types of property though provide more complex editing options and these are described below EXPRESSION PROPERTIES Expression properties are capable of being set to Aconstant value e The contents of a data tag The contents of a register in a remote communications device Acombination of such items linked together using various math operators In its default state the arrowed button immediately after the label of the property shows that the field is in General mode and the edit box to the right of the button shows a grayed out string that indicates the default behavior of the property Value Ed None gt General Tag Pragratm If you are familiar with Crimson s expression syntax a complete description of which can be found in the Writing Expressions section you can edit the property
277. evice to be controlled function int The required function to be executed data cstring Any parameter for the function DESCRIPTION This function is used to perform a special operation on a communications device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted The specific action to be performed is indicated by the function parameter the values of which will depend upon the type of device being addresses The data parameter may be used to pass addition information to the driver Most drives do not support this function Where supported the operations are driver specific and are documented separately FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Refer to comms driver application notes for specific examples REVISION 6 PAGE 315 DISABLEDEVICE DEVICE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DISABLEDEVICE DEVICE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION device int The device to be disabled DESCRIPTION Disables communications for the specified device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE The function 15 passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE DisableDevice 1 PAGE 316 http w
278. ex Ve E ERR RAS 4 MAPPING DATA tese voce rece v v e Ed rk ve EE e Vr VA 4 DOWNLOADING cose or eR vh er ver lennon de 7 CONNECT THE oes e reete isa ve e EE e la DER standin 8 CRIMSON BASICS 22 22 2411 MAIN SCREEN ICONS 555 eer oh re e e ee v De e e ex ra ex pu EO Ree 9 MODULES 5 5 c3 ii v nien 9 COMMUNICATIONS rara ara nain rae n 9 ccc eC E 10 USER INTERFACE covtedetudiancianduaniliugevedivetsvateds 10 PROGRAMMING sisse oro a S D EORR S ER ORE ERE ARN 10 DATA LOGGER 5 TERN VERS VRAT DILE E 10 WEB SERVER 10 SECURITY MANAGER AA 11 SELECTING THE MODULAR CONTROLLER nennen nennen nnne nnn narras 11 USING BALEOON HELP 12 WORKING WITH DATABASES nnne annee ea nna nnn 12 DOWNLOADING TO THE 5 nennen nnne nnn nennen annis 12 CONFIGURING THE LINK eee VERIFYING THE USB LINK SETTING THE IP ADDRE
279. exist or if no card is present This function can be used with the FindFileNext function to scan all files in a given directory FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Name FindFileFirst LOGS LOG1 REVISION 6 PAGE 327 FINDFILENEXT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER FINDFILENEXT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns the filename of the next file or directory in the directory specified in a previous call to the FindFileFirst function Returns and empty string if no more files exist This function can be used with FindFileFirst function to scan all files in a given directory FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Name FindFileNext PAGE 328 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE FINDTAGINDEX LABEL FINDTAGINDEX LABEL ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION label cstring Tag label not tag name or mnemonic DESCRIPTION Returns the index number of the tag specified by label FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Index FindTagIndex Power Returns the index number for the tag with label Power REVISION 6 PAGE 329 FORMATCOMPACTFLASH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER FoRMATCOMPACTFLAsH ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Formats the CompactFlash card in
280. existing register in the target device Values blink between the data and Incorrect tag mapping on one of the tags on the display Communications times out Delete tags one after another and download in between When the values on the screen stop blinking the last deleted tag was mapped incorrectly or accessed an unknown register in the target device Increase the Slave Response or Device Timeout on the communication port or target device in Crimson PAGE 440 http www redlion net controller TROUBLESHOOTING PROGRAMS PROGRAMS PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS The program does not seem to run Program not launched Some conditions in the program are not met if switch or loops Check if the program is called somewhere in the database code ProgramName If the Crimson device has a beeper use the beep function in the program to check if the program does go through the condition Otherwise use a dummy tag and change its value at different places in the program to check where it stops Display shows NOT READY Program is launched but data are not available to run it yet If the message disappears the program was launched successfully however it seems to require time to fetch all the required data Communication is too slow or your database program is getting too complex Display shows WORKING
281. f these entries is selected the right hand pane shows a list of available data items comprising module variables as well as any other tags you have configured Progranmina Fort 19 40 R5 232 Conms Part DFI Master X NO10 0000 Medie X eme X Loop X NOLO 0003 Meduid Locp PY X Noioo0t4 X Noirs X woto 0006 X woto o0ce X woto 0008 X woto 0003 X No10 0010 AA pre oes Nun To indicate that you want a particular register within your gateway block to correspond to a particular data item simply drag that item from the right hand pane to the left hand pane dropping it on the appropriate gateway block entry The example above shows the PV variables of four PID modules mapped to PLC registers N010 0000 through NO10 0003 ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL BITS E gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 irg Fort Eb R5 232 Conms Part DFI Master Em E m Block 1 X 0100000 Modue1 Loop PY 00 Modulet Loop Ackanual rm cose Y 05 Y 06 X woto o00s X Noi00006 Y Y X woto 0007 Power X woto o008 X woto 0009 X Noi00010 tputs 2 3 4 Eos Nun To work with individual bits within a word simply drag and drop a module flag onto a register After prompting you for permission to display the word as individu
282. fault htm www g3panels com Folders Reports Navigation op Hyperlinks 2115 seconds over 28 8 For Help press F1 PAGE 252 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER WEB SERVER SAMPLES The picture below shows the remote viewing and or control display for the 6303 Remote Monitoring Microsoft Internet Explorer E lol xi Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ea Heak gt A C By SG Address http 192 9 200 163 remote default htm z red lon 171849 nog z Doo moo Boao E Internet Downloading picture http 192 9 200 163 remote display bmp 001064603685879 REVISION 6 PAGE 253 USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY BASICS USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM Crimson contains powerful features to allow you to define which operators have access to which display pages and limit those operators who are able to make changes to sensitive data The software also contains a security logging facility that can be used to record changes to data values indicating when the change occurred and by whom it was performed SECURITY BASICS The follow sections details some of the basic concepts used by the security system OBJECT BASED SECURITY Crimson s security system is object based This means that security characteristics are
283. faults same as amp 0 EO disable echo ATHOQOV1 HO Hang Up 00 Displays result codes V1 Verbal codes ATLIMIX3 L1 Low speaker volume MI Speaker on until connect X3 Sets result codes AT amp CI amp DO amp HO amp IO amp RI amp SO 50 052 43512 25 Normal CD operations amp DO0 DTR override Flow control disabled amp IO software flow control disabled amp Modem ignores RTS amp S0 DSR override always on This string can be modified within C2 50 0 auto answer disabled 82 43 set Escape Character to 43 decimal 12 25 Sets the duration in fiftieths of a second of the guard time for the escape code sequence TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM COMMUNICATION The PPP and Modem Client and PPP and Modem Server protocols provide a Log File property to log communication exchange with the modem to a file on the CompactFlash card This file is used for debugging purpose during initial modem setup Be sure to disable this feature once the correct modem configuration sequence has been established The codes in the table below are modem replies recorded in the file CODE IN Loc FILE DESCRIPTION 0 codeOK 1 codeConnect REVISION 6 PAGE 91 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CopE IN Loc FILE DESCRIPTION 2 codeRing 3 codeNoCarrier 4 codeError 6 codeNoDial
284. fers from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the virtual HMI The tem States properties are used to define up to eight values that represent different states of the tag Each state has an integer value associated with it and a text string to indicate what should be displayed when the tag holds that value At least two states must be defined but the balance may be left in their default condition if they are not needed The Default property is used to define the text to be displayed if the tag holds value other than one of those listed in the item states Navigation slider is used to step through the 512 states that can be defined for a particular tag Moving the slider left and right will update the right hand pane to show the selected states The Export to File button can be used to export state names and values to a CSV file Export Multi State Formats dx Save in 2 Desktop ck EE My Recent Documents This Computer Documents Desktop 2 Documents BE This Computer MICE File name po m see Save astype CSV Fies z REVISION 6 123 EDITING MULTI TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The CSV file will contain a line for each defined state stating the state label the state value and the text assigned to that state
285. figured via DHCP is selected the unit s Ethernet port must be configured to use DHCP and the network s DHCP server must be configured to designate an SMTP server via option 69 The Server IP Address property is used to designate an SMTP server when manual server selection is enabled The server must be configured to accept mail from the Master and to relay messages if required by the application The Server Port Number property is used to define the TCP port number that will be used for SMTP sessions The default value is 25 This value will be suitable for most applications and will only need to be adjusted if the SMTP server has been reconfigured to use another port e The Domain Name property is used to specify the domain name that will be passed to the SMTP server in the HELO command The vast majority of SMTP servers ignore this string In the unlikely event that your SMTP server attempts to do a DNS lookup to confirm the identity of its client you may need to enter something appropriate to your DNS configuration e The Reverse Path property is used to specify the email address that will be supplied as the originator of the messages sent by the Master The property comprises a display name and an email address Since the Master is not capable of receiving messages the email address will often be set to something that will return an undeliverable message if a reply is sent PAGE 80 http www redlion net controller AD
286. formation USER PID SETTINGS e The Proportional Band property entered as a percentage of the full input range is the amount of input change required to vary the output full scale The input range 15 the difference between the PV Limit Lo and PV Limit Hi values The REVISION 6 PAGE 37 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Proportional Band is adjustable from 0 096 to 1000 096 and should be set to a value that provides the best response to a process disturbance while minimizing overshoot A Proportional Band of 0 0 forces the controller into On Off Control with its characteristic cycling at setpoint The optimal value may be established by invoking Auto tune e Integral Time is the time in seconds that it takes the integral action to equal the proportional action during a constant process error As long as the error exists integral action is repeated each Integral Time The higher the value the slower the response The optimal value may be established by invoking auto tune The ntegral Time is adjustable from 0 to 6000 0 seconds e The Derivative Time is the seconds per repeat that the controller looks ahead at the ramping error to see what the proportional contribution will be and it matches that value every Derivative Time As long as the ramping error exists the derivative contribution is repeated every derivative time Increasing the value helps to stabilize the re
287. formation to the operator All that remains to complete the User Interface configuration is to define how the operator is to use the Master s keyboard to interact with the system To define the actions to be performed by a key select a zoom level that allows you to see the key in question For example if you want to configure one of the function keys select zoom level one or two as appropriate Then double click the key to display the following dar Function Key F1 4 This Page All Pages Action Mode Operation No Action i User Defined Goto Page Push Button Change Integer Value Ramp Integer Value Play Tune Block Default Action Action Details r Action Control You will note that this dialog box has two tabbed pages The first page is used to define what will happen when the key in question is pressed when the current page is selected The second page is used to define what will happen if the key is pressed when any page is selected The first type of action is called a local action while the second type is called a global action The color used to display the key will change according to which actions are defined If the key is displayed in PURPLE a local action is defined for this PAGE If the key is displayed in GREEN a GLOBAL action is defined PAGE 150 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI ENABLING ACTIONS If the key is dis
288. from the modules as well as to define items be accessed within the remote devices It also allows the creation of internal data items to store information within the Master itself Each tag has a variety of properties associated with it The most basic property is formatting data which is used to specify how the data held within a tag is to be shown on the Master s virtual HMI and on such things as web pages By specifying this information within the tag Crimson removes the need for you to re enter formatting data each time a tag is displayed More advanced tag properties include alarms that may activate when various conditions relating to the tag occur or triggers which perform programmable actions on similar conditions USER INTERFACE This icon is used to create and edit display pages of the virtual HMI and to specify what actions should be taken when the HMI s keys are pressed released or held down The page editor allows you to display various graphical items known as primitives These vary from simple items such as rectangles and lines to more complex items that can be tied to the value ofa particular tag or expression By default such primitives use the formatting information defined when the tag was created but this information can be overridden if required PROGRAMMING This icon is used to create and edit programs using C2 s unique C like programming language These programs can perform complex decision making
289. function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success LoadCameraSetup 4 0 1 NMinO isp Loads the file named inO isp in inspection file number 1 in camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 PAGE 366 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE LOG VALUE LoG VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the natural log of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variablel log 5 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 367 LoG10 VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER LOG10 VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the base 10 log of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable3 10410 5 0 368 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE LOGSAVE LOGSAVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Forces the data logger to save on the CompactFlash Card Note This function should NOT be called permanently or regularly It is intended only for punctual use An overuse of this function may result in CompactFlash card damage and loss of data FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE
290. g until the character indicated by this parameter is received If start is zero the receive process begins immediately The process then continues until one of the following conditions has been met end is non zero and a character matching end is received e timeout is non zero and that period passes without a character being received length 15 non zero and that many characters have been received The function then returns the characters received not including the start or end byte This function is used together with Raw Port drivers to implement custom protocols using Crimson s programming language It replaces the RYOP functionality found in Edict FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Frame PortInput 1 13 100 200 PAGE 386 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTPRINT PORT STRING PORTPRINT PORT STRING ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to be written to string cstring The text string to be transmitted DESCRIPTION Transmits the text contained in string to the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers The data will be transmitted and the function will return The port driver will handle handshaking and control of transmitter enable lines as required FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TY
291. g changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted Most buttons will have data entry enabled The Type defines the action to be taken when the button is pressed and released BUTTON TYPE THE BUTTON WILL Toggle Change the data state when the primitive is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Set the data to 0 when the primitive is released Turn On Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the primitive is pressed Style property is as defined for general buttons e The Layout property is used to define where the optional label and data values are to be placed relative to the button itself when custom images are used The text fields are always placed within the button for the other button styles e The Show Label property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed and controlled PAGE 206 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI The Show Data property 1s used to indicate whether or not the primitive should include the associated data value For buttons configured with a type of toggle or momentary the displayed data value is the value of the underlying tag For other buttons the displayed value is the value to which the tag will be set The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate fr
292. g entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for string text primitives or for those primitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property The balance of the properties control the font colors and justification to be used when drawing the primitive These properties require no further explanation The second page varies according to the primitive in question and displays the same information as the Format tab of the associated tag type Different sections of the page will be enabled according to the settings provided for the Get Label and Get Format properties The example below shows the Format tab for an integer text primitive cer Integer Text Properties Properties Format Data Label Label Text Translate Data Limits Minimum Value General As Per Form Edit Maximum Value 7 General As Per Format Edit Data Format 1 Number Base Decimal X Sign Mode used Digits Before DP 5 Digits After DP Leading Zeros Yes m Group Digits No X Prefix None Translate Suffix None Translate As can be seen the properties shown are indeed identical to those shown on the Format tab of an integer tag As mentioned above the properties for the other types of primitive are similarly identical to those of the corresponding tag You are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual regarding Dat
293. han a minute communications between the Master and the PLC will be resumed CONNECTING VIA ETHERNET Rather than using an additional serial port on your PC and on the Master it is possible to use a third party utility to create what are known as virtual serial ports on your computer These appear to applications to be physical COM ports but in fact they send and receive data to a remote device over TCP IP By installing one of these utilities and configuring it to address the Master you can have serial access to any devices connected to the Master without any additional cabling Indeed there is no need to have any physical serial ports available on the PC at all something that is very valuable when working with modern laptops where a COM port is often an expensive option Several third party virtual serial port utilities are available On the freeware side a company called HW Group http www hw group com provides a utility called HW Virtual Serial Port There are also a number of other freeware port drivers available most of which seem to REVISION 6 PAGE 77 SHARING SERIAL PORTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER be derived from the same source base On the commercial side a company called Tactical Software http www tacticalsoftware com offers Serial IP for about 100 a port While the various freeware drivers no doubt have many contented users we have found that these drivers have occasional stability problems on
294. he Data Low and Data High properties are used to scale the output to the data value s units of measure Enter the desired data values that correspond to the Output Low and Output High values respectively ie If the application involves a data value of 0 0 to 500 0 degrees that will provide an output of 1 000 to 5 000 V enter 0 0 for the Data Low property and 500 0 for the Data High property The Output Low and Output High properties are used to scale the output Enter the output levels that correspond to the Data Low and Data High properties respectively i e If the application involves a data value of 0 0 to 500 0 degrees that will provide an output of 1 000 to 5 000 V enter 1 000 V for the Output Low property and 5 000 V for the Output High property PAGE 56 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSOUT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING THE INITIAL OUTPUT TAB 5P Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help 50074 Properties Output configuration nes I INITIALIZATION The initialization parameters provide initial output values which are normally controlled by a PC or PLC In typical applications these settings will only be used until communications is established for the first time The Include in Download property is used to determine whether the initialization values will be downloaded to the
295. he Hysteresis value separates the on and off points of the alarm ie a high acting alarm programmed to turn on at 500 with a Hysteresis of 10 will turn off when the PV falls below 490 e The Latching property dictates how the alarm behaves once activated See the Alarm Behavior Chart below for more information e The Standby property provides a means of preventing so called nuisance alarms during power up See the Alarm Behavior Chart below for more information ALARM BEHAVIOR CHART LATCHING STANDBY ALARM BEHAVIOR Alarm automatically turns on and off as the Process Value crosses in and out of the alarm region The AlarmAccept bit disables alarm regardless of the state of the process If the alarm condition exists and the bit is written to a 0 the alarm activates Once activated the alarm stays active until accepted If the alarm condition no longer exists writing the Alarm Accept bit to 1 resets the alarm condition As long as the Alarm Accept bit is 1 the alarm automatically turns on and off as the Process Value crosses in and out of the alarm region PAGE 24 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING LATCHING STANDBY ALARM BEHAVIOR Alarm automatically turns on and off as the Process Value crosses in and out of the alarm region The alarm is automatically disabled when a setpoint change occurs o
296. he Master is installed or the name of the site that it is monitoring CONFIGURING SMTP The SMTP tab is used to configure the Simple Mail Transport Protocol This is the standard protocol used to send email over the Internet or over other TCP IP networks SMTP addresses follow the familiar name domain standard REVISION 6 PAGE 79 USING ELECTRONIC MAIL CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The configuration options for the SMTP transport are shown below Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY ni xi File Edit Link Help DSH 7 SEG d Programming Port R5 232 Comms Port Server R5 485 Comms Port SMTP Transport Transport Mode Server Selection Server IP Address Server Port Number Domain Name Addresses sms SMTP General Reverse Path Sync Manager Initial Timeout Record Log File OVER CAPS e The Transport Mode property is used to enable or disable the transport Note that the mail manager must be enabled via the General tab before the SMTP transport can be enabled Note also that either SMTP or SMS must be enabled if the mail manager is to be able to deliver messages The Server Selection property is used to define how the transport will locate an SMTP server If Manual Selection is used the Server IP Address property should be used to manual designate a server If Con
297. he Pages icon in the left hand pane of the User Interface window You should refer to previous warnings regarding the use of the On Update property ADDITIONAL SYSTEM PROPERTIES In addition to the system actions described above there are two property pages accessed by selecting the Pages icon that gives you access to a number of other system wide parameters The Basic tab covers the following parameters REVISION 6 PAGE 219 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER View Key Page Link Help DngeH xomumx m 2 2 e 5 Backlight Off After 0 secs Activate Beeper Touch and Keys E One Touch Data Entry No zj KeypadNext Prev Keys Enabled z p Translation i The Backlight Off After property is used to configure the system so as to disable the display backlight after the specified number of seconds of inactivity This facility can be used to extend the life of the backlight components The operator can reactivate the backlight by pressing a key or touching an active area of the touch screen The key press or touch is ignored until the backlight is lit The Activate Beeper property is used to control if the beeper should sound when the HMI touch screen or soft key buttons are pressed This property will not deactivate the beeper for other events such as alarms or beep functions
298. he data log menu aback gt 2 2 Favorites 1 28 9 Address http 192 9 200 163 logs defaut htm z ce Directory of Available Logs Name BACK 1955 2009 Red Lion Control JH je 19 internet 2 The picture below shows the contents of a given data log Explorer Edt Favortes Tools Hep seek OA Ash Bede r 0 IG Address http 192 9 200 163 logsjLoat File Size 01030232 5 80 Ol030930 cSV 5792 01030228 5 4256 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls Directory of LOG1 DE f internet The picture below shows the contents of a given log file Inset Format Toos pata ternet Explorer GoTo Favorites Heak gt OA A GjFavortes 522 d D aad Address 192 9 200 163 0 01 01030228 5 7 es El Date A B D E E H 1 1 Date Tanki Tank2 Tank3 2 00303 022832 50gal 4003 75 gal 3 010303 022833 50gal 400 gal 75 4 010303 022834 50gal 40094 75gal 5 0103 03 022835 50gal 400 gal 75gal 01 0303 022836 50gal 400 gal 75 gal 7 010303 022837 50gal 400 gal 75gal 8 0103 03 022838 50gal 400 gal 75gal 9 010303 022
299. he limitations caused by Power Transfer values such as gains and offsets that would otherwise limit the outputs to less than their maximums SMARTONOFF SmartOnOff is designed for situations where on off control would normally be used but where the advantages of PID are also desired When heat or cool is placed into this mode the control output will either be driven on or off with no intermediate values or time proportioning However rather than use the process value to decide when to turn the output on SmartOnOff looks at the output of the PID calculation and activates the output when it exceeds half the defined gain for that channel For example with default settings REVISION 6 PAGE 19 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SmartOnOff for heating would turn the heat output on once the PID algorithm called for 5096 power or more with the hysteresis value being used to ensure that small changes in the PID calculation do not produce relay chatter e The Hysteresis property is used to eliminate output chatter by separating the on and off points of the output s when performing SmartOnOff control The Hysteresis value is centered around the setpoint that is the transition points of the output are offset above and below the setpoint by half the Hysteresis value THE CoNTROL TAB Untitled File CSMSTRSK Crimson 2 0 Edt Link Dn H xmo8x 4 e CSPID1 Properties
300. he proper COM port under Link Options REVISION 6 PAGE 7 CONNECT THE TWO CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ILTTRNEENEENR x Communications Port If you plan to use the USB port to download to the Master you should take the time to read the section titled Installing the USB Drivers The Ethernet port isn t configured from the factory so it can t be used as a means to download an initial database CONNECT THE TWO That s it Connect the device to the MC and if you ve selected a master protocol the Modular Controller will do the rest Simply look at the target registers and you should see the data being written to them Try changing the registers that have been set for Device to MC and the modules should respond accordingly If you ve configured the Modular Controller to act as a slave you ll have to initialize whatever it is you re using to communicate with the MC and read and write the data accordingly PAGE 8 http www redlion net controller CRIMSON BASICS MAIN SCREEN ICONS CRIMSON BASICS To run Crimson select the Crimson icon from the Red Lion Controls folder on the Programs section of your Start Menu The main C2 screen will appear showing the icons that are used to configure the various aspects of the Modular Controller s behavior E gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help 2 2 er To select
301. he same functionality can be achieved using a general Ed The Rich Button primitive displays an animated button that is used to control the button the rich version automatically obtains data from the underlying tag The properties of the rich button are defined using five tabs REVISION 6 PAGE 205 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The first of these tabs is shown below z8PRich Button Properties x Properties Additional Images Data Entry Format Data Source Value Tag onoff Pick Data Entry Toggle Button Options Style so Rectangle Layout Text at Top and Bottom Show Label ves hd Show Value ves m m Get From Tag Field Label Data Format v Text Colors Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be an integer or a flag The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual HMI facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of bein
302. http www redlion net controller WRITING EXPRESSIONS MANIPULATING BITS MANIPULATING 5 Crimson also provides operators to perform operations that do not treat integers as numeric values but instead as sequences of bits These operators are known as bitwise operators AND OR AND XOR These three bitwise operators each produce a result in which each bit is defined to be equal to the corresponding bits in the values on the operator s left hand and right hand sides combined using a specific truth table OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Bitwise AND Group 8 Data amp Mask Bitwise OR Group 9 Data Mask Bitwise XOR Group 10 Data Mask The table below shows the associated truth tables A B A amp B A B A B 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SHIFT OPERATORS Crimson also provides operators to shift an integer n bits to the left or right OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Shift Left Group 5 Data 2 Shift Right Group 5 Data gt gt 2 Each example shifts Data two bits in the specified direction BITWISE Finally Crimson provides a bitwise NOT operator to invert the sense of the bits in a value OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Bitwise NOT Group 2 Mask This example produces a value where every bit is equal to the opposite of its value in Mask REVISION 6 PAGE 265 INDEXING ARRAYS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODU
303. ications window contains a property called ZP Routing If this facility is enabled incoming packets from non firewalled modem interfaces will be compared against the IP address and netmask for the Ethernet interface and will be forwarded to that interface should a match occur This facility is most often used with dial in connections and allows IP access to all devices connected to the Ethernet port provided a suitable route is defined by the client CHECKING THE MODEM STATUS In order to help debug modem connections Crimson provides the GetInterfaceStatus function This function takes a single argument which is the numeric index of the required interface Interface zero is always the Master s loopback interface Next comes the Ethernet interface if it is enabled such that the first PPP interface is numbered 1 when Ethernet is disabled and 2 when it is enabled The function returns a string which can be interpreted according to the following table STATUS MEANING CLOSED The interface has not yet been initialized This state will only occur for a short time during system start up INIT The modem is being initialized If the connection remains in this state there are probably errors in the init strings being sent to the modem IDLE The link is idle GSM modems will return a number at the end of the string to indicate signal strength The next table explains how to interpret these values SMS The modem is send
304. ies are used to define the border for the primitive THE SCATTER GRAPH PRIMITIVE m Scatter Graph Primitive displays up to four sets of data values Each set 15 composed of two data arrays plotted against each other with optional data point markers and regression line PAGE 174 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The properties are split over five tabbed pages one general and one for each set graph and are accessed by double clicking the primitive The Properties tab defines the common features for all the graphs such as the background and outline color or if the primitive should be displayed or not using the Show Item field x Properties Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph Graph 4 r Background Fill Style Solid Colo X Fill Color 1 Fixed m Gray x Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed Black 71 Pick Outline Line Style Color Line Color Fixed 0 white Pick Display State Show Item General TRUE Set As Defaults Each graph is composed of the same proprietary set of properties Data sources and scaling are defined directly on the graph tab The format and style are accessible via the Edit button dar Scatter Graph Properties x Properties Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph 3 Graph 4 Data XValues 17 Defaut Edit Y Values Y General Defaut Edit
305. iguration double click it THE CONFIGURATION TAB lt gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help neg 25 5 2 ogie zator Corin INPUTS e Mode property determines whether the high or a low state should be considered active for a given input INITIALIZATION The Include in Download property is used to determine whether the initialization values will be downloaded Selecting no allows you to modify and download databases at will without accidentally overwriting the Logic Mode property The Logic Mode property is used to force the state of the logic engine to either stop or run upon a download THE LOGIC EDITOR TAB The CSDIO module can perform logic as well as provide timers and counters for processes requiring limited I O The logic UI is graphical using standard gate symbols as well as unique icons for added functionality The UI also provides a means of logic simulation To simulate the I O click on the desired input channel to activate or deactivate it PAGE 60 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSDIO DIGITAL I O MODULE PROGRAMMING lt 3 gt Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Ele Edit View Link Help 5 2 e 5 Select Logic Symbol Logic Editor configurati WORKING WITH SYMBOLS You can select any symbol from the t
306. ime constant used to stabilize fluctuating input signals Temperature Units is used to select between the Kelvin Fahrenheit or Celsius temperature scale The Process Units property allows you to enter the engineering units for the process This is only used to identify the appropriate fields throughout the software This parameter is saved as part of the Crimson file but is not used within the module The Decimal Places property is used to allow Crimson to display the engineering units in the proper resolution This is only used to display the appropriate resolution throughout the software and is not used within the module PAGE 18 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING e The Process at 0 and Process at 100 properties are used to scale DC input signals Enter the desired PV reading for the minimum and maximum input signal levels For example if the application involves a flow sensor with a 4 to 20 mA output proportional to 5 to 105 GPM select Process 4 20mA for the Input Type enter 5 for the Process at 0 setting and enter 105 for the Process at 100 setting INITIALIZATION The initialization parameters provide initial values for settings usually controlled by a PC or PLC In typical applications these settings will only be used until communications is established for the first time e The Include in Download property is used to determine whether the initialization va
307. in Byte Bits 0 through 7 of the value are reversed Reverse Bits in Word Bits 0 through 15 of the value are reversed Reverse Bits in Long Bits 0 through 31 of the value are reversed Invert Bits in Byte Bits 0 through 7 of the value are inverted Invert Bits in Word Bits 0 through 15 of the value are inverted Invert Bits in Long Bits 0 through 31 of the value are inverted The Setpoint properties are used to indicate whether a setpoint will be specified for this tag and what that setpoint will be Setpoints are used by certain alarm modes and allow the state of a tag to be compared to its intended state For example a tag which represents the temperature of a vessel might have a setpoint that indicates the required temperature This will allow an alarm to activate if the vessel strays beyond a certain distance from its target The On Write property is as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of an integer formula contains the following properties Z gt Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Edt Link Help tt 4 Formula Data Scaling cereal Enable Scaling No riggers arn 2 Alarm 1 Format fes ur The 7ag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked t
308. in a user program that runs in the background so the G3 has enough time to access the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success SaveCameraSetup 4 0 1 NMinO isp Saves the inspection file number 1 from camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 under the name in0 isp PAGE 400 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SCALE DATA R1 R2 1 E2 SCALE DATA R1 R2 E1 E2 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data int The value to be scaled ri int The minimum raw value stored in data r2 int The maximum raw value stored in data el int The engineering value corresponding to r1 e2 int The engineering value corresponding to r2 DESCRIPTION This function linearly scales the data argument assuming it to contain values between r1 and r2 and producing a return value between e1 and e2 The internal math is implemented using 64 bit integers thereby avoiding the overflows that might result if you attempted to scale very large values using Crimson s own math operators FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data Scale D100 0 4095 0 99999 REVISION 6 PAGE 401 SENDFILE RCPT FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SENDFILE RCPT FILE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION rcpt int The recipient s index in the database s address bo
309. in the event of an input failure and or the process value exceeds the PV Limit Low or PV Limit High values The Input Fault alarm is considered a process alarm for items that may be mapped to any process alarm The Set Output To property is the output value that the controller will assume in the event of an input sensor failure Values in excess of 100 and 100 may be entered to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwise limit the output to less than their maximums e The Fault property dictates if a sensor failure on Input 1 alone or either input is required to drive the output to the Set Output To value e The Latching property if enabled will cause the input fault bits to stay active until accepted regardless of the state of the input s To accept the fault the respective Accept bit must be written to a 1 If latching is not selected the fault s will automatically deactivate when the input failure s is corrected THE OUTPUTS TAB E gt Untitled File Crimson 0 x File Edit View Link Help nemg z sxmi s p Digital Outputs Output 1 Reverse Power Cycle Time 20 Output 2 Unassigned cree Time ZO secs scene 20 Output 3 Unassigned p Linear Output Output Type Process 4 20 Mapping Reverse Power Drive Min At 0 00 Drive Max At 100 00 LEDs Outputs alarms Power Control Genera
310. in total The Digits After DP property is used to indicate how many digits should be shown after the decimal place Somewhat obviously decimal places are not supported if a number base other than decimal has been selected The Leading Zeroes property is used to indicate whether zeros at the beginning of a number should be shown or replaced with spaces The Group Digits property is used to indicate whether decimal values should have the digits before the decimal place grouped in threes and separated with commas Similar separation is performed on other number bases using groupings and separators appropriate to the selected radix e The Prefix property is used to specify a translatable string that will be displayed in front of the numeric value This is typically used to indicate units of measure The Suffix property is used to specify a translatable string that will be displayed after the numeric value This is also typically used to indicate units of measure PAGE 118 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS THE COLORS The Colors tab of an integer tag contains the following properties Test Colors Y MotorStopped FlagArray Motori X IntFormda X Intanay Foreground and Background Defaut and ice z s and ines gt Limit 2 Twhte v and Mice gt Sim Limit 3 g res and isses z fS Limit 5 re
311. indTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is a real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Value GetRealTag 10 Returns the floating point value of the tag with index 10 Value GetRealTag FindTagIndex Power Returns the floating point value from the tag with label Power PAGE 352 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETSTRINGTAG INDEX GETSTRINGTAG INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the string tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is a String FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Value GetStringTag 10 Returns the string value of the tag with index 10 Value GetStringTag FindTagIndex Name Returns the string value from the tag with label Name REVISION 6 PAGE 353 GETTAGLABEL INDEX CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETTAGLABEL ZWDEX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION Returns the label of the tag not the mnemonic or tag name specified by index FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Label GetTagLabel 10 Returns the label of the tag with index 10 PA
312. ine these translations properties that contain such strings have a button labeled Translate to their right hand side Label Text Translate To enter the translations click the button and the following dialog box will appear I x Translations D Generic 1 Generic 2 Generic Same as Default 3 Generic Sai 4 Generic Same as Default 5 Generic Same as Defaull 6 Generic ame as Default If you do not enter text for a particular language and that language is subsequently selected by the operator Crimson will use the default language in its place Note that Crimson will re configure Windows to use the appropriate Input Method Editor whenever a complex ie Unicode based language is being edited on a Master configured with a color virtual HMI For information on how to select the languages for the database and on how to configure a key or a menu to select a different language refer to the User Interface section of this manual REVISION 6 PAGE 107 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER COLOR PROPERTIES Color properties within tag represent a foreground and a background color that will be used to display the tag s state in textual form Either of these colors can then be used to define the color of other animation primitives The example below shows a color pair being edited Tag On White v and sue NL The drop down list
313. ing SMS messages or polling the modem to see if new SMS message are available If SMS messaging is enabled for a modem you will see this state appear for a short period every five seconds CONNECTING The modem is establishing a connection This state typically appears only for client connections and indicates that a call is being placed LISTENING The modem is waiting for a call This state appears only for server connections Note that GSM modems will also return an IDLE state while waiting for a call in order to show signal strength ANSWER The modem is answering a call and trying to negotiate the Baud rate for the connection This state appears only for server connections If the connection is established the modem will enter the CONNECTED state CONNECTED The modem has established a connection This state will persist for only a short time as the LCP negotiation process will begin after a small delay REVISION 6 PAGE 89 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER STATUS MEANING NEG LCP The connection is negotiating LCP options This process decides on a set of link protocol settings that are acceptable to both the client and the server AUTH The connection is performing the authentication process to ensure that the appropriate user credentials are used NEG IPCP The connection is negotiating IPCP options This process decides on a set of network pro
314. ing point value They are represented as you might expect by the integer portion followed by a single decimal point followed by the fractional portion Exponential notation is not supported STRING CONSTANTS String constants represent sequences of characters They comprise the characters to be represented enclosed in double quotation marks For example the string ABCD represents a four character string comprising the values 65 66 67 and 68 Actually five bytes are used to store the string with a null value being appended to indicate the end of the string The various escape sequences discussed above may also be used within strings TAG VALUES The value of a tag is represented in an expression by the tag name Upper case and lower case characters are considered equivalent when finding the required tag Also once an expression REVISION 6 PAGE 261 SIMPLE MATH CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER has been entered any changes to the name of the tag will modify all of the expressions that make reference to it so there is no need to re edit the expressions to fix the name COMMUNICATIONS REFERENCES References to registers in master communications devices can be entered into an expression by means of a syntax comprising an opening square bracket the register name and a closing square bracket An optional device name may be prefixed to the register name and separated by a period The device name need not be specifie
315. ing time state This variable will add an hour to the unit time if set to true Note UseDST can only be viewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE flag ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 286 http www redlion net controller PROGRAMMING REFERENCE EXPRESSION OPERATORS PROGRAMMING REFERENCE This section is a summary of all the commands used for programming EXPRESSION OPERATORS For more information on the following operators refer to the Writing Expression Section of this manual LOGICAL CONSTANTS VALUE EXAMPLE 0 False 1 True INTEGER CONSTANTS BASE EXAMPLE Decimal 123 Binary 001111011 Octal 0173 Hexadecimal 0 7 CHARACTER CONSTANTS SEQUENCE VALUE ASCII Na Hex 0x07 Decimal 7 BEL Hex 0x09 Decimal 9 TAB Hex 0x0A Decimal 10 LF Hex 0x0C Decimal 12 FF NE Hex 0x0D Decimal 13 CR Hex 0x1B Decimal 27 ESC xnnn The hex value represented by nnn nnn The octal value represented by nnn NN A single backslash character U A single quotation mark character Ae A double quotation mark character LOGIC OPERATORS OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Equal To Group 7 Data 100 Not Equal To Group 7 Data 100 Greater Than Group 6 Data gt 100 Greater Than or Equal Group 6 Data gt 100 REVISION 6 PAGE 287 ACTION OPERATORS CRIMSON USER MANUA
316. interrupted before the database was downloaded Download the database from Crimson again Unit shows Invalid Database The database in the device is corrupted or there are no databases in the device Download a database from Crimson Values show No communication with target device See Serial Communication or Ethernet Communication Value does not update Value shows BIG or BIG The tag on the screen is not linked correctly Not enough digits before the decimal point to show the number For example data is 1000 5 and format is three digits before the decimal point and one after Check the tag mapping making sure the target device PLC etc register is correct Check the primitive Data Source in the user interface in case the word WAS is displayed Re link the tag in this case Increase the number of digits before the decimal point in the tag format Value deviates by a factor of ten The tag format is not correct Change the decimal point position in the tag format Value is invalid Incorrect tag type Data received is not what s expected For example bytes reversed in the word Check if the tag type corresponds to the data type Is the data a floating point number and thus the tag a real Pi symbol and not an integer X symbol Check if the tag is accessing the correct target device register Che
317. ion operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program The On Released property 1s used to define the action to be performed when the primitive is released This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing USING DEFAULT SETTINGS Actions section or it may run a program In the example above a user defined action is used to implement a momentary pushbutton USING DEFAULT SETTINGS The dialog box used to edit the properties of each type of primitive has a button in its bottom right hand corner labeled Set As Defaults This button can be used to save the current settings of certain properties of the primitive as the default settings to be used when creating a new primitive The same function can be performed by selecting the Save As Defaults command from the Edit menu or by pressing the ctr1 E key combination Note that not all properties are included in the default settings only those that refer to formatting as opposed to the underlying data presented by the primitive are saved The default settings can be applied to the currently selected primitive or primitives by using the Apply Defaults command from the Edit menu or by pressing the ctr1 L key combination PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each primitive found in the drawing toolbox THE LINE PRIMITIVE The Line primitive is a line drawn between two
318. ions the scale should be divided Large tick marks are drawn at each division The REVISION 6 PAGE 177 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER lowest number of major divisions is one in which case large tick mark will be drawn at the ends of the scale but not along its length This property is only available when the scale is fixed e Minor Divisions property is used to indicate into how many minor divisions each major division should be divided Smaller tick marks are drawn at each division Selecting a value of one for this property will disable minor divisions e minimum and maximum are tags or expressions the scale will follow to define the number of major division required The Counts per Major Division is the number of unit between each major division For example if the counts is 10 the maximum 100 and the minimum 20 The full scale is 80 100 20 therefore there will be 8 major divisions The Show property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression The Color page defines the fill pattern and line style of the scale THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE The Fixed Text primitive is used to add unchanging text to a page text 15 displayed in a specified font and color and with a specified justification The text can also be translated for international applications When the text is created a cursor will appear allowing the text to be
319. irtual HMI thereby allowing remote REVISION 6 PAGE 245 WEB SERVER PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER control of the Master or the machine it controls While this feature 1s extremely useful care must be taken to use the various security parameters to avoid unauthorized tampering with a machine The use of an external firewall is also strongly recommended if the Master is reachable from the Internet The Custom Site property is used to enable or disable a facility by which files stored in the WEB directory of the CompactFlash card are exposed via the web server This facility is described in more detail below The Remote Refresh property represents the frequency at which the web browser connected to the Web Server will refresh the remote view web page A value of zero will refresh as quick as possible For slower connections such as modems a higher value is recommended The maximum is 60 seconds Under the Security tab Untitled File 0306 Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY 2515 View Page Link Help 25 2 pr Authenticated users Target device memory usage 2k uer The Security properties are used to restrict web server access to hosts whose IP address matches the mask and data indicated All access may be restricted or the filter may be used to restrict only attempts to use the remote control facility The filter works in the fol
320. is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the last data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden The Previous Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Prev key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the first data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden e The Period property is used to define the time in seconds to wait without any user interaction occurring before performing the action specified in the On Timeout property These properties are typically used to remove a popup or to return to some sort of menu screen after several seconds of inactivity If you have too many data entry fields to fit on a single page the Next Page and Previous Page properties can be used to link together a series of pages to allow the operator to edit the fields in sequence Crimson will automatically position the cursor appropriately such that 1f the Prev key is pressed on the first field of a page the previous page will be activated with the cursor on the last field of that page DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS In addition to the various actions that can be defined via page properties Crimson gives you the ability to define an action s to be run before the system starts when the system first starts and an action s to be run once a second or on page updates no matter which page is displayed These actions can be accessed by selecting t
321. is typically used when serial programming is required with respect to a unit whose programming port has been allocated for communications Calling this function shuts down all communications and thereby allows the port to function as a programming port once more FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE StopSystem PAGE 420 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE STRIP TEXT TARGET STRIP 7 TARGET ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION text cstring The string to be processed target int The character to be removed DESCRIPTION Removes all occurrences of a given character from a text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text Strip Mississippi s Text now contains REVISION 6 PAGE 421 SUM ELEMENT COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SUM LEMENT COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION element int float The first array element to be processed count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the sum of the count array elements from e1ement onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Total Sum Data 0 10 PAGE 422 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE
322. ith a differential pressure transducer e The Linearizer property linearizer models only allows the unit to be used in applications which the measured signal is non linear with respect to the desired PV value This is useful in applications such as the measurement of material volume in a round horizontally mounted tank or vessel with a level probe THE LINEARIZATION TAB The CSINISL and CSINV8L modules offer a 100 point per channel linearization function loj x Edit Link Help 2 e Channel 1 Decimals o Slope 100 Offset 8 8 5 3 E OVER caes NUM LINEARIZER To use the linearizer function for a given input its Linearizer property on the configuration tab must be checked e The Channel value selects which input you currently wish to work with and isn t really a property at all e The Decimals property is used to allow Crimson to display the engineering units in the proper resolution This is only used to display the appropriate resolution throughout the software and is not used within the module e The Slope property can be used to change the ratio of the PV in relationship to the sensor reading This is useful in applications in which the sensor error is non linear but can still be measured with simple two point scaling e The Offset property can be used to compensate or shift the PV value This is useful in a
323. itive is only available via Insert gt Picture gt CF Image menu This primitive is used to display images saved on the CompactFlash card thus saving internal memory on large databases Images have to be converted before their transfer on the CompactFlash card using the makepic utility the primitive is not made to display BMP or other image formats straight from the card Please refer to Converting Images for the CompactFlash below for more information on the makepic utility Moreover converted images HAVE TO be saved under the PICS folder on the CompactFlash card to be available to the primitive The properties of the CF Image primitive are displayed on two tabbed pages the first of which is shown below CompactFlash Image Properties Format Action r Control Image Selection i Show Image General mt 7 Show Item v General mt 7 m Fill Format Fil Style Fill Color 1 Fixed x Pick w Fixed Meek Pick Line Format Line Style sidcoo e Line Color Fixed g Pick Cancel Set As Defaults The Image Selection property is used to select the image to display from the CompactFlash card This setting is an integer number given by the MakePic utility when converting from BMP only to the format required on the CompactFlash card e The Show Image property is a true or f
324. itives will be maintained as long as Crimson can do so without violating minimum size requirements MOVING AND RESIZING Primitives can be moved by first selecting them and then by dragging them to the required position on the display page If Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page Holding down ctri while moving a primitive will leave a copy of the primitive in its original position thereby allowing duplicates to be created You also use the cursor keys to nudge the current selection a single pixel in the required direction Holding down ctri while nudging will increase the movement of the primitives by a factor of eight Primitives can be resized by selecting them and then by dragging the appropriate handle to the required position Once again if Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page The shift and Ctr1 keys can be used to modify the resize behavior as described in the Adding Display Primitives section Note that Crimson will always constrain resizing operations so as to ensure that primitives stay on the screen and to make sure that items do not exceed their maximum permitted size or shrink below the minimum size appropriate to their format REORDERING PRIMITIVES Primitives on a display page are stored in what is known as a z order This defines the sequence in which the primitives a
325. itted IP Data 192 168 100 1 Permitted IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Range of IP authorized Permitted IP Data amp Permitted IP Mask Range of IP authorized 192 168 100 X This means any PC with IP addresses starting with 192 168 100 is allowed to access the server or write data IP filter may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls REVISION 6 PAGE 93 OPC COMMUNICATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER OPC AND SCADA SCADA packages can access OPC data available in the operator interface using Red Lion Controls software OPCWorx This software is the OPC Server identified by the SCADA package permitting access to the operator interface data tags It can run either locally on the SCADA PC or in multi SCADA architecture on a network server accessed by multiple PCs For information on OPCWorx configuration and functionality please see OPCWorx manual available on http www redlion net Support Software OPCWorx Docs OPC Worxrev1 pdf OPC LINK RED LION PRODUCTS DATA EXCHANGE Some Red Lion Controls products have the ability to exchange data using OPC This facility provides direct tag addressing avoiding cumbersome mapping and thus being a major advantage over other traditional protocols such as Modbus TCP The communication architecture is client server based One server can share the data to multiple clients Maximum 4 The client can request and if authorize
326. ive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetLanguage 1 PAGE 406 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SETNETCONFIG PORT ADDR MASK GATE SETNETCONFIG PORT ADDR MASK GATE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero addr int The required IP address for the port mask int The required netmask for the port gate int The required default gateway for the port DESCRIPTION Overrides the database settings for the Ethernet port The various IP parameters are 32 bit integers that can optionally be formed from strings using TextToAddr function Note that setting all three of the IP values to zero will reset the port s settings to the database defaults Note also that the unit must be power cycled before the new values will take effect FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetNetConfig 0 0 0 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 407 SETNOW TIME CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SETNOW TIME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION time int The new time to be set DESCRIPTION Sets the current time via an integer that represents the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 January 1997 The integer is typically generated via the other time date functions FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function doe
327. k kainan iiia 269 MEET 269 CHANGING NUMERIC VALUES e esee nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn nina anna nnn nan 269 SIMPLE ASSIGNMENT cx zuses iu Xa AE Dubia o E 269 COMPOUND ASSIGNMENT cs cance vava vaviaivdiie aa ER REN y aa Svaneeunsdencveadcenevesduaninaauserevaraveranece 269 INCREMENT AND DECREMENT zone ena agna Eu vag cite wa RO NN EAR 269 CHANGING BIT VALUES esses nnn nnne 269 RUNNING PR GR M S 2 2526 ao Coda e Can 270 USING FUNGTIONS 71 522 3 55 conet ternera 270 OPERATOR PRIORITY tle cape ber 270 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS 1 153 270 USING RAW PORTS 22252255556 FR PY ar RYE BRA SR aapna 271 CONFIGURING SERIAL 271 CONFIGURING TCP IP 5 1 1 1 1 nennen nnn nnne inan nn nna nan 271 READING GHARAGTERS FERRE RE 272 READING ENTIRE FRAMES hann nno aaa iani sah asina asa sana aas nnn 272 SENDING DATA 2
328. l Output Filter 0 0 secs Output Deadband 0 00 Output Update 0 0 secs DIGITAL OUTPUTS e The Output n properties are used to assign the module s physical outputs to various internal properties or values Cycle Time value is the sum of a time proportioned output s on and off cycles With time proportional outputs the percentage of output power is converted into output on time of the cycle time value eg if the controller s algorithm calls for 65 power and has a Cycle Time of 10 seconds the output will be on for 6 5 seconds and off for 3 5 seconds A Cycle Time equal to or less than one tenth of the process time constant is recommended PAGE 42 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING LINEAR OUTPUT e The Output Type property is used to select between 0 10 V 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA outputs Make sure that the output jumpers located on the side of the module are set for the same output type e Mapping property is used to assign the module s analog output to one of various internal properties or values e Drive Min At and Drive Max At values are used to scale the analog output The units expressed are the same as those of the Mapping value so the numerical limits vary eg values of 0 and 100 are typically used to control a process The Output Filter is a time constant entered in seconds that dampens th
329. larm will assume The table below describes the various selections MODE DESCRIPTION Absolute Low The alarm activates when the Process Value falls below the Alarm Value The alarm deactivates when the Process Value goes above the Alarm Value Hysteresis Absolute High The alarm activates when the Process Value exceeds the Alarm Value The alarm deactivates when the Process Value falls below the Alarm Value Hysteresis REVISION 6 PAGE 23 CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MODE DESCRIPTION Deviation Low If the Process Value falls below the Setpoint Value by the amount of the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value Deviation High If the Process Value exceeds the Setpoint Value by the amount of the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value In Band If the difference between the Setpoint Value and the Process Value is not greater than the Alarm Value the alarm activates Out of Band If the Process Value exceeds or falls below the Setpoint Value by an amount equal to the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value e Value property is the point at which the alarm will turn on The alarm values are entered as process units or degrees T
330. lay e Create a tag for each parameter value 1 Baud DataBits StopBits Parity and PhysicalMode Make sure all tags are set to retentive Insert the tags on the User Interface for operator access e Create a button set its action to User Defined and enter Commi tandReset function in the OnPressed field e Create a user program with the following code Programl SetPortConfig 2 1 Baud SetPortConfig 2 2 DataBits SetPortConfig 2 3 StopBits SetPortConfig 2 4 Parity SetPortConfig 2 5 PhysicalMode Call this program in the OnLoad field in the User Interface The user can now enter the port settings on the display and will commit the changes when pressing the button The device will cycle power to change the port settings PAGE 410 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SETREALTAG INDEX VALUE SETREALTAG INDEX VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number value float The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function sets the tag specified by index to the specified value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is a real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetRealTag 5 12 55 Set the real tag of index 5 with value 12 55 REVISION 6
331. ld be added either side of the bar to indicate the setpoint for the controlling value This option is only available if a tag has been entered for the value field e The Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the Master s display to flash if the tag entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for those primitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property The Value Background property is used to indicate whether the value should be drawn with a solid or transparent background The choice of format will typically depend upon the visibility ofthe value against the bar itself The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The second page contains additional formatting information for the field cePRich Vertical Bar Graph Properties 3 Properties Additional Format Text Format Font Pick Foreground w Fixed white z Pick Background Fixed a Gray x Pick Fill Format Fill Style
332. ld format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The Orientation property is used to indicate the direction in which the scale s minor tick marks should point The major tick marks always point inwards REVISION 6 PAGE 215 SYSTEM PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER e The Major Divisions property is used to indicate into how many major divisions the scale should be divided Large tick marks are drawn at each division The lowest number of major divisions is one in which case large tick marks will be drawn at the extremes of the scale but not along its arc e The Minor Divisions property is used to indicate into how many minor divisions each major division should be divided Smaller tick marks are drawn at each division Selecting a value of one for this property will disable minor divisions The second page defines various formatting options dar Whole Dial Gauge Properties x Properties Additional Format Text Format Font Text Type Transparent bal Foreground Fixed Background Fixed Gray Picker Fill Format Fil Colori Fixed m Red z Pick
333. ll Duplex IV Enable High Speed IP PARAMETERS The Port Mode field controls whether or not the port is enabled and the method by which the port is to obtain its IP configuration If DHCP mode is selected the Master will attempt to obtain an IP address and associated parameters from a DHCP server on the local network If the unit is configured to use slave protocols or to serve web pages this option will only make sense if the DHCP server is configured to allocate a well known IP address to the MAC address associated with the unit as otherwise users will not be sure how to address the Master If the more common Manual Configuration mode is selected the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway fields must be filled out with the appropriate information The default values provided for these fields will almost never be suitable for your application Be sure to consult your network administrator when selecting appropriate values and be sure to enter and download these values before connecting the Master to your network If you do not follow this advice it is possible although unlikely that you will cause problems on your network IP ROUTING The IP Routing option can be used to enable or disable the routing of IP packets between the Ethernet port and any PPP connections made to or by the Master You should not enable this option unless you understand the implications of allowing such routing Please refer to the Advanced Co
334. ll never be executed and the loop will perform no operation beyond evaluating the controlling condition If you want more than one action to be included in the loop be sure to surround the multiple statements in curly brackets as with the i statement The example below initializes a pair of local variables and then uses the first to loop through the contents of an array totaling the first ten elements and returning the total value to the caller The architecture of the while loop statement is as follow while condition Action PAGE 232 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS int 0 t 0 while i 10 t t Datalil i i 1 return t The example below shows the same program but rewritten in a compressed form Since the loop statement now controls only a single action the curly brackets have been omitted int i 0 t 0 while i 10 t Data itt return t THE FoR Loop You will notice that the while loop shown above has four elements 1 The initialization of the loop control variable 2 The evaluation of a test to see if the loop should continue 3 The execution of the action to be performed by the loop 4 The making of a change to the control variable The for loop allows elements 1 2 and 4 to be combined within a single statement such that the action following the statement need only implement
335. ll remove most of the debris that accumulates during development SELECTING LANGUAGES To select the various languages to be supported within your database select the Pages icon within the User Interface window and press the Select Languages button to display the following dialog box cer Select Languages r Languages Language 0 2 Korean bd Generic ASCII Language 1 Generic Unicode German Italian e Japanese Language 2 Language 3 ce ERI Mexican Spanish Russian lll Simplified Chinese Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 Generic ASCII 6 Language 7 _J Generic ASCII m REVISION 6 PAGE 221 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Up to eight different languages can be defined each of which can be chosen from a drop down list Crimson will re configure Windows to use the appropriate Input Method Editor whenever a complex ie Unicode based language is being edited In order to use this facility you should ensure that you have the required language support installed by referring to the appropriate Windows documentation If you wish to use a Unicode based language that is not included in the drop down list select Generic Unicode mode instead You will then be able to enter any Unicode characters although you will have to manually select the appropriate keyboard mode or Input Method Editor CHANGING THE
336. llow easier manipulation of this list USING A CUSTOM WEB SITE While the standard web pages provide quick and easy access to the data within the Master you may find that your inability to edit their precise formatting leaves your artistic REVISION 6 PAGE 247 COMPACTFLASH ACCESS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER capabilities somewhat frustrated You may thus use the Master s custom site facility to create a completely custom web site using your favorite third party HTML editor and by inserting certain special sequences and storing the resulting files on the Master s CompactFlash card expose this site using the panel s web server CREATING THE SITE The web site may use any HTML facilities supported by your browser but must not use ASP CGI or other server side tricks The filenames used for the HTML files and associated graphics must also comply with the old style 8 3 naming convention This means that file extensions will be for instead of HTML and JPG instead of JPEG This also means that the body of the filename must be eight characters or less and that you must not rely on the difference between upper and lower case to differentiate between pages You may use any directory structure as long as you once again ensure that your directories observe the 8 3 naming convention and do not rely on case differences EMBEDDING DATA To embed tag data within a web page insert the sequence N re
337. logging criteria be defined for a tag It is not possible to log programmatic access by default as such logging should be carefully considered to avoid excessive log activity The Logging Control properties are used to define whether and how the security logs should be created Refer to the Configuring Data Logging chapter for information on how the data is written and how files are named CREATING USERS You may use the Create User button to create as many users as you need The users may be renamed or deleted using the left hand pane To select a user either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected EIXNITLEETETT 2 0 ini xj Edt View User Heip DeH sx amp zx o mi2 User Details ohn Doe EM Credentials Password Override Existing System Rights Change Own Password Change All Passwords Maintenance Access Custom Rights User Right 1 User Right 3 User Right 5 User Right 7 Each user has the following properties Real Name property is used to record the user s identity in security logs and in the Security Manager primitive that is used to change passwords from the operator terminal If
338. lor will change all the selected items to use that color If nothing is currently selected clicking on a color will set the default outline color for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu or via the paintbrush icon on the toolbar PAGE 134 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES THE TEXT FORMAT TOOLBOX Text Format The text format toolbox is used to control the horizontal and vertical alignment of primitives that contain text elements If one or more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected justification If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default format for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu THE FOREGROUND TOOLBOX The foreground toolbox is used to control the foreground color for primitives that Foreground contain text elements If one or more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected color If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default color for all newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu THE BACKGROUND TOOLBOX The background toolbox is used to control the background color for primitives Background that contain text el
339. lors An 5 232 or USB port for downloading Crimson 2 is designed to operate with all versions of Microsoft Windows from Windows 95 upwards If you want to take advantage of the USB port provided by the Master module you will need to use as a minimum Windows 98 If you intend to use the USB port to remotely access the Master s CompactFlash card we recommend that you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP While Windows 98 is capable of accessing the card the later versions of the operating system provide more robust operation and are much better about when they choose to lock the card thereby preventing the C2 runtime from writing data INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE If you downloaded the Crimson software from Red Lion s website simply execute the download file and follow the instructions If you received a copy of Crimson on CD place the CD in your system s CDROM drive and follow the instructions that will appear If no instructions appear you may have auto run disabled In that case select the Run option from the Start menu and enter x setup where is the drive letter of your CDROM drive Again follow the resulting instructions and the software will be installed CHECKING FOR UPDATES If you have an Internet connection you can use the Check for Update command in the Help menu to scan Red Lion s web site for a new version of Crimson If a later version than the one you are using is found Crimson will ask if it should download the upgr
340. lowing the radius of the corners to be edited by dragging the handle from side to side The Shadow primitive is similar to the rectangle but with a drop shadow located to the bottom right of the figure The primitive is often drawn with no fill pattern so as to allow it to act as a frame around text primitives PAGE 138 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE MONOCHROME VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Wedge primitive is a right angled triangle located within one quadrant of a bounding rectangle In addition to the outline and fill properties the wedge has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse primitive is an ellipse with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Ellipse Quadrant primitive is one quadrant of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse quadrant has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse Half primitive is one half of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse half has a property to indicate which of the four possible halves think about it will be drawn The properties for these primitives need little further explanation other than to point out that the quadrant or half rendered by the Wedge Ellipse Quadrant or Ellipse Half primitives can also be
341. lowing way Permitted IP Data 192 168 100 1 Permitted IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Range of IP authorized Permitted IP Data amp Permitted IP Mask Range of IP authorized 192 168 100 X This means any PC with IP addresses starting with 192 168 100 are allowed to access the restriction selected It is your responsibility to use an external firewall to prevent unauthorized access if the remote control facility is enabled as the IP filter may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls The Authentication properties are used to restrict access to any user connecting onto the web server when Authenticated Users is selected Upon connection the user will be required to enter the Username and Password defined under Logon PAGE 246 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER ADDING WEB PAGES Username Max 31 characters and Logon Password Max 15 characters Both are case sensitive It is your responsibility to use an external firewall to prevent unauthorized access if the remote control facility is enabled as the login control may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls ADDING WEB PAGES In addition to the facilities described above the web server supports the display of generic web pages each of which contains a predefined list of tag values These pages are created by pressing the Cr
342. lt SLC NOD7 2006 gt SLC NOD7 2007 oes Nun Exposing data from other devices over a slave protocol is simply an extension of the mapping process described above except this time instead of dragging a tag from the right hand pane you should expand the appropriate master device and drag across the icon that represents the REVISION 6 PAGE 71 DATA TRANSFORMATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER registers that you want to expose You will then be asked for a start address in the master device and the number of registers to map and the mappings will be created as shown In this example registers N7 0 through N7 7 in an Allen Bradley controller have been exposed for access via Modbus TCP IP as registers 40001 through 40008 Crimson will automatically ensure that these data items are read from the Allen Bradley PLC so as to fulfill Modbus requests and will automatically convert writes to the Modbus registers into writes to the PLC This mechanism allows even simple PLCs to be connected on an Ethernet network MASTER AND MASTER Available Meppings mM msc Eu m am nre Eb 5 485 Comms Pert DH485 Master aes NS To move data between two master devices simply select one of the devices and create a Gateway Block for that device You can then add references to the other device s registers just as you would when exposing data on a slave protocol Agai
343. lti variable contains the following properties entitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 ioj xil e Tag Unk Hep 2 5 24 3 e To include this tag in a custom web page use VER CAPS NUM e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the Master If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected remainder of the properties are as described for the Data tab of flag tags REVISION 6 PAGE 121 EDITING MULTI TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of a multi formula contains the following properties Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Edit Tag Link Help Osa 5 e Formula Data TeoVale v Gereral AM 00 sindaton o riggers 2 Alarm 1 Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use OVER GAPS NU e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked together using math operators In the example above the tag is set equal to a value of one two or three depending on the state of three different flags
344. lts The Data Log property is used to select the data log to be displayed e The Sizing Mode property is used to indicate whether you wish to specify the number of data points to be displayed or whether you want the software to PAGE 200 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS display one data point for each horizontal pixel of the primitive The Points to Show property is used to specify the number of points to be displayed when the Sizing Mode is so configured The Show Channels property is used to specify an optional integer value that controls which channels are displayed If an expression is entered channel n will be shown if and only if the bit of the value is set The bit is defined as the bit having the weight of 2 such that the lowest order bit is bit 0 Bit 0 represents the first tag in the list displayed in the Pens tab Bit 1 would be the second tag in the list The Fill Format properties are used to define the background of the primitive The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive Note that these properties do no change the pens used to draw the actual channel data the colors of these lines are defined by the system e The Show Item property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression The Pens page provides a way to change the color of the
345. lue where Data is the tag to be changed Value is the value to be used by the operator and op is any of the available operators For example the code Tag 10 will increase Tag by a value of 10 while Tag 10 will multiply the current value by 10 INCREMENT AND DECREMENT To create an action that increases a data value by one use the syntax Data To create an action that decreases a tag by one use the syntax Data Note that the or operators may be placed before or after the data value in question In the former case the value of the expression represented by Data is equal to the value of Data after it has been incremented In the latter case the expression is equal to the value before it has changed CHANGING VALUES To change a bit within a tag use the syntax Data Bit 1 Data Bit 0 to set or clear the bit as required where Data is the tag in question and Bit is the zero based bit number Note again that the value on the right hand side of the operator can be an expression if desired REVISION 6 PAGE 269 RUNNING PROGRAMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER such that an example such as Data 1 Level gt 10 be used to set or clear a bit depending on whether or not a tank level exceeds a preset value RUNNING PROGRAMS Programs may be invoked within actions by following the program name with a pair of parentheses For example Program1 will invoke the associated program The program will
346. lues from an array as a number of vertical bars Each value is scaled according to the same minimum and maximum values Between 2 and 400 values can be shown The Horizontal Bar Graph primitive displays a set of values from an array as a number of horizontal bars Each value is scaled according to the same minimum and maximum values Between 2 and 400 values can be shown REVISION 6 PAGE 173 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cer Vertical Bar Graph Properties Control Value v General Edit Count 20 values Minimum General 0 Edit Maximum General 500 Edit m Fill Format Fill Style a Solid Color Fill Color 1 Fixed m Gray Pick FilColor2 w Fixed im Black Pick r Line Format Line Style soia Color Line Color Fixed m white Pick Cancel Set As Defaults The Value property is used to specify the first array element to be shown e Count property is used to specify the number of values to be shown The Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling The Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled areas of the bars are drawn in the pattern and colors indicated while the unfilled areas are drawn with solid Fill Color 2 e The Line Format propert
347. lues will be downloaded to the module Selecting no allows the modification and download of databases at will without accidental overwriting of the established process parameters such as the setpoint PID values etc e The PID Parameters property dictates which PID parameters the module will load and subsequently use to control the process The module controls the process using the Active PID values and Active Power Filter See ActConstP ActConstI ActConstD and ActFilter variables in the Available Data chart at the end of this section The active set is loaded with either the User PID Settings or the Auto Tune Results values depending on the state of the ReqUserPID bit If the bit is true the Active set is loaded with the user s variables If the bit is false the values that were established by auto tune are loaded Adjusting the PID Parameters property writes the ReqUserPID bit appropriately upon initialization e The Control Mode property dictates whether the module will in auto or manual mode upon initialization In auto mode the controller calculates the required output to reach and maintain setpoint and acts accordingly In manual mode the output can be controlled directly by writing to the power variable The Initial Setpoint property is used as the setpoint value upon initialization e Manual Power is the level the PID module will assume in manual mode Values in excess of 100 and 100 can be entered to overcome t
348. maximum security is required the user name should not be easily derived from the real name The Password property is used to specify an initial password for this user The password is case sensitive and comprises alphanumeric characters Note that if the Override Existing box is checked any changes made to this password from the operator panel itself will be overridden when this database is downloaded to the panel PAGE 258 http www redlion net controller USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SPECIFYING TAG SECURITY e The System Rights properties are used to grant a user the ability to perform certain system actions The properties relating to password changes are self explanatory while the user of Maintenance Mode is described above The Custom Rights properties are used to grant a user certain rights which may then be used within the database to allow access to groups of tags or display pages The exact usage of these rights is up to the system designer SPECIFYING TAG SECURITY Each writable tag has a tab called Security which is used to define the access control and write logging settings for that tag If you do not define specific settings the system will use the appropriate default settings depending on whether it is mapped to external data SPECIFYING PAGE SECURITY The access control settings for a display page are defined via the Properties dialog x Basic Links Actions Security Security Acce
349. me Typically this value is set such that each log file contains a sensible amount of data For example the log shown above is configured to use a new log file each day Retain At Most property is used to indicate how many log files will be kept on CompactFlash before the oldest file is deleted This property should be set so as to allow whatever is consuming the logged information to extract the data from the Master module before the information is deleted The log shown above is configured to retain a week s worth of data The Log Enable property is used to allow or inhibit logging If the entered expression is true logging will be enabled If the expression is false logging will be disabled If no expression is entered logging will be enabled by default Log Trigger property is used to log a single set of data when the expression changes from false to true REVISION 6 PAGE 239 Loc FiLE STORAGE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The History Buffer property is used to indicate how much RAM should be allocated for the history buffer for this data logger The history buffer is used to support the historical trending user interface primitive and allows the user to scroll backwards to view older data than would otherwise be available No more than a total of 256K should be allocated to all data logs This property is ignored when the Master is configured to display a monochrome virtual HMI Th
350. mended FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Sleep 100 REVISION 6 PAGE 417 SQRT VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SQRT VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value int float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the square root of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the va1ue argument EXAMPLE Flow Const Sqrt Input PAGE 418 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE STDDEV ELEMENT COUNT STDDEV ELEMENT COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION element int float The first array element to be processed count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the standard deviation of the count array elements from e1ement onwards assuming the data points to represent a sample of the population under study If you need to find the standard deviation of the whole population use the PopDev function instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Dev StdDev Data 0 10 REVISION 6 PAGE 419 STOPSYSTEM CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER STOPSYSTEM ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Stops the operator interface to allow a user to update the database This function
351. mmunications chapter for more information PHYSICAL LAYER The Physical Layer options control the type of connection that the Master will attempt to negotiate with the hub to which it is connected Generally these options can be left in their default states but if you have trouble establishing a reliable connection especially when REVISION 6 PAGE 67 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER connecting directly to a PC without an intervening hub or switch consider turning off both Full Duplex and High Speed operation to see if this solves the problem REMOTE UPDATE The Remote Update option is used to enable or disable firmware and configuration download via As noted in an earlier section remote firmware updates over TCP IP require the units to be fitted with a CompactFlash card Since downloads will more than likely involve a firmware update at some point such a card is highly recommended when using this feature PROTOCOL SELECTION Once the Ethernet port has been configured you can select the protocols that you wish to use for communications Up to four protocols may be used at once and many of these protocols will support multiple remote devices This means that you have several options when deciding how to mix protocols and devices to achieve the results you want For example suppose you want to connect to two remote slave devices using Modbus over TCP IP Your first option is to use two
352. mmunications device in which case your selection will be made simply by clicking the appropriate option on the drop down menu and then selecting the required item from the resulting dialog box There will be situations though when you want to make a property dependent on a more complex combination of data items perhaps using some math to combine or compare their values Such eventualities are handled via what are known as expressions which can be entered in the property s edit box whenever General mode is selected via the drop down DATA VALUES expressions contain at least one data value The simplest expressions are thus references to single constants single tags or single PLC registers If you enter either of the last two options Crimson will simplify the editing process by automatically changing the property mode as appropriate For example if you enter a tag name in General mode Crimson will switch to Tag mode and show the tag name in the selection field CONSTANTS Constants represent not surprisingly constant numbers or strings INTEGER CONSTANTS Integer constants represent a single 32 bit signed number They may be entered in decimal binary octal or hexadecimal as required The examples below show the same number entered in the four different number bases BASE EXAMPLE Decimal 123 Binary 051111011 0173 Hexadecimal 0 7 U and L suffixes supported by
353. moved from the display Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions Refer to the Data Availability section in this chapter for details of a timeout than can occur when using these properties The On Tick property is used to define an action that will run every second during the period for which this page is displayed Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute it will be skipped and retried one second later e The Period is the time in seconds to wait before performing the action specified On Timeout is the action to be performed when the period of time has expired The Parent Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Exit key is pressed while this page is active Selection of this page can be overridden using the techniques below The Next Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Next key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the last data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden The Previous Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the HMI s Prev key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the first data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden If you have to
354. n C2 will automatically read or write the data as required transparently moving data between the devices The example above shows how to move data from a Mitsubishi FX into an SLC 500 WHICH WAY AROUND One question that may occur to you is whether you should create the Gateway Block within the Allen Bradley device as in this example or within the Mitsubishi device The first thing to note is that there is no need to create more than a single block to perform transfers in a single direction If you create a block in AB to read from MITFX and a block in MITFX to write to AB you ll simply perform the transfer twice and slow everything down The second observation is that the decision as to which device should own the Gateway Block is essentially arbitrary In general you should create your blocks so as to minimize the number of blocks in the database This means that if the registers in the Allen Bradley lay within a single range but the registers in the Mitsubishi are scattered all over the PLC the Gateway Block should be created within the Allen Bradley device so as to remove the need to create multiple blocks to access the different ranges of the Mitsubishi device DATA TRANSFORMATION You may also use Gateway Blocks to perform math operations that your PLC might not otherwise be able to handle For example you may want to read a register from the PLC scale it take the square root and write it back to another PLC register To accom
355. n Databases are manipulated via the commands found on the File menu These commands are standard for all Windows applications and need no further explanation The exception is Save Image which will be covered later DOWNLOADING TO THE MASTER Crimson database files are downloaded to the Master by means of the Link menu The download process typically takes only a few seconds but can take somewhat longer on the first download if Crimson has to update the firmware in the Master or if the Master does not contain an older version of the current database After this first download however Crimson uses a process known as incremental download to ensure that only changes to the database are transferred This means that changes can be made in seconds thereby reducing your development cycle time and simplifying the debugging process CONFIGURING THE LINK The programming link between the PC and the Master is made using an RS 232 serial port a USB port or a TCP IP connection While TCP IP connections are typically made via the PAGE 12 http www redlion net controller CRIMSON BASICS DOWNLOADING TO THE MASTER Master s Ethernet port they may also be established via a dial in link Before downloading you should use the Link Options command to ensure that you have the method selected link options x Communications Port e e e 9 p Panel Emulation Send to Emulator OK Cancel VERIFYING THE USB LINK
356. n deciding which of the Master s serial ports to use for communications note that the unit s programming port may be used as an additional communications port but it will obviously not be available for download if it is so employed This is not an issue if the USB port is used for such purposes and it is highly recommended that you use this method of download if you want to connect serial devices via the programming port SELECTING A PROTOCOL To select a protocol for a particular port click on that port s icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and press the Edit button next to the Driver field in the right hand pane The following dialog box will appear Driver Picker for Raw Serial Port Manufacturer mS DH485 Master Klockner Moeller Matsushita Mitsubishi Electric Select the appropriate manufacturer and driver and press the OK button to close the dialog box The port will then be configured to use the appropriate protocol and a single device icon will be created in the left hand pane If you are configuring a serial port the various Port Settings fields Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity will be set to values appropriate to REVISION 6 PAGE 65 PROTOCOL OPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER the protocol in question You should obviously check these settings to make sure that they correspond to the settings for the device to be addressed PROTOC
357. n the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero if it fails Note that the file is not opened after it is created a subsequent call to 1 must be made to read or write data FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success CreateFile logs custom myfile txt PAGE 308 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DATATOTEXT DATA LIMIT DATATOTEXT LIMIT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data int The first element in an array limit int The number of elements to process DESCRIPTION Forms a string from array taking each array element to be a single ASCII character FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE string DataToText Data 0 8 REVISION 6 PAGE 309 DATE Y M D CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DATE Y M D ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION y int The year to be encoded in four digit form m int The month to be encoded from 1 to 12 d int The date to be encoded from 1 upwards DESCRIPTION Returns a value representing the indicated date as the number of seconds elapsed since the datum point of 1 January 1997 This value can then be used with other time date fun
358. n the foreground or the background is based upon the program s properties and not on the method used for its invocation e Crimson invokes programs using a C style syntax and while the older syntax 18 still supported does not need the Run function to be used Programs that return values must be invoked using the newer syntax though as the Edict family functions such as RunInteger are not provided e Programs within Crimson run much more quickly than they did within Edict REVISION 6 PAGE 235 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING BATCH LOGGING CoNFIGURING DATA LOGGING Now that you have configured the core of your application you may decide to make use of Crimson s data logger to record certain tag values to CompactFlash Data recorded in this way is stored in industry standard comma separated variable CSV files and can easily be imported into applications such as Excel using a variety of methods To configure data logging select the Data Logger icon from the main screen Untitled File Crimson 2 0 rk He 2 pues ears The right hand pane presents options for Data logging Batch logging is explained below The Trend Viewer Support property is used to activate the trend history buffer for the trend viewer primitive If the historical data facility is not used this setting should be disabled so the minimum history buffer memory allocati
359. nRising E InaGaddaDaVida Action Control fichotthesheriff Edit Enable Remote Enabled m v LCa Cancel Set As Defaults e Tune Name selects the tune to be played Customized tunes may be played using the PlayRTTTL function THE USER DEFINED ACTION This action is used to do anything else you desire The options are shown below cerRectangle Properties Format Action Action Mode Operation 2492009 Action Details On Pressed Output 1 On Auto Repeat On Released Output 0 Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled Set As Defaults The On Pressed property is used to define the action to be performed when the primitive is pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program PAGE 170 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI The On Auto Repeat property 1s used to define the action to be performed when the primitive is pressed and then held down The action occurs both on the initial depression and on subsequent auto repeats so there is no need to define both this property and On Pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modificat
360. na ssa seni aa sanas 287 ACTION OPERATORS BA eileen 288 PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS scccccsseeeceeessececcesseeeaeueceeeseeeceesseaseessesaeseesseaeeeeees 289 REVISION 6 PAGE IX TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER FUNCTION REFERENCE sisi a Ananaia 291 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS onena a 291 ABSCVARUE tese RR 292 COSC VALUE 293 soo isse eo Ee ERR E NER Era SER S 294 PCI ITA Al VM 295 ATAN VALUE 296 EE 297 BEEP FREQ PERIOD EE 298 EE 299 CM 300 COMMITANDRESETL V ERE REVENU c EE pae UE Dea Sou Mi a EDU 301 COMPACTFEASHEJECT eden iret ene ere ey eec ede ee Ue arde era Ny er EP SR ARES 302 COMPACTFLASHSTATUS e eire die eo Po reda vk de uva de ava Da 303 CONTROLDEVICE DEVICE 304 SRG COUNT EE 305 COSC THETA aasre vet ue eem eorr epe eo ERE VENE TRE tie exe Ve E OE sues CY PER ena cs 306 CREATEDIRECTORY WAME dents vage 307 CREATER EAMA v dee 308 DATA LIMIT
361. nction is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortSetRTS 2 1 In this example the function sets the RTS of the RS232 communication port to true REVISION 6 PAGE 389 PORTWRITE PORT DATA CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PORTWRITE PORT DATA ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The raw port to be written to data int The byte to be transmitted DESCRIPTION Transmits the byte indicated by data on the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers The character will be transmitted and the function will return The port driver will handle handshaking and control of transmitter enable lines as required FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortWrite 1 PAGE 390 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE POSTKEY CODE TRANSITION PosTKEY CODE TRANSITION ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION code int Key code transition int Transition code DESCRIPTION Adds a physical key operation to the queue FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE void EXAMPLE PostKey 0x80 0 KEY 0 80
362. nd may be moved within the primitive according to internal or external data values The primitive provides exhaustive facilities for displaying bitmaps JPEG picture or metafiles images from Crimson s extensive image library or from third party clipart providers Five separate tabbed pages control the various options REVISION 6 PAGE 209 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The first tab is used to select the images to be displayed cer Image Properties Images additional Movement Format Action Control Image Count x Image Selection General Edit Image Visible v General TRUE Edit Images Pick Pick N Browse Browse Image 0 Image 1 Adjust Adjust Clear Clear Pick Pick Image 2 Set As Defaults The Jmage Count property is used to indicate how many different images should be displayed by this primitive Up to ten different images can be shown The Image Selection property is a numeric value used to select between the various images if an Image Count of greater than one has been configured A value of zero will display Image 0 and so on e The Image Visible property is a true or false value used to hide or show the selected image If you want the image to be hidden you must not select No Fill for the Background when defining the backgroun
363. ne of the Communications window and clicking on the Edit button next to the Option Card property x Options R5232 485 Option Card CAN Option Card Selecting the appropriate card adds an icon to the tree shown in the left hand pane of the window This icon in turn contains icons for the additional port or ports made available by the card The example below shows a Master with a serial expansion card installed E Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help ea ym mx Es Communications um e Option Card Selection vogramming Port 59 RS 232 Comms Port Option Card 85232 485 Option Card d 85 485 Comms Port Eat Ethernet Remove Option Card E Bp Servic EA Mal Manager Wit OPC Server Time Manager Ej P RS232 485 Option Card RS 232 Comms Port A RS 485 Comms Port CAPS NOM The additional ports can be configured by following the instructions supplied in the previous chapter Note that the drivers available for a port will depend on the connection type it supports For example the CANOpen expansion card shows a port that will only support drivers designed for the CAN communication standard REVISION 6 PAGE 75 SHARING SERIAL PORTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SHARING SERIAL PORTS The Master provides a so called port sharing facility that allows either physical or virtual serial connections to be m
364. ned for a tag can be used to specify the way in which other animation primitives will be displayed Without tags you will have no way of changing the color of anything other than text based data fields Tags the key to implementing slave protocols Crimson treats these protocols as mechanisms for exposing data items within the Master This allows the same data to be accessed via multiple ports so that for example a machine setting could be changed by both a local SCADA package and a similar package working over Ethernet from a remote site Without tags there would be nothing to expose and this mechanism could not be implemented Tags are used within Crimson to implement many advanced features If you want to use functionality such as alarms triggers data logging or the web server you will have to use tags period The formatting data from the tag definition is typically required by all these features so tags are mandatory for their operation In other words tags will automate many tasks during programming saving you time Even if you decide not to use tags many of the subsequent chapters of this manual refer to concepts discussed in this chapter You should thus read it thoroughly before proceeding CREATING TAGS To create a tag either click on one of the buttons displayed when the Tags icon is selected in the left hand pane of the Data Tags window or use the new tag buttons on the toolbar Either way a new tag will
365. nes Show Divisions No Set As Defaults The Major Data Gridlines property is used to indicate into how many major divisions the vertical axis of the viewer should be divided A thick line will be drawn across the viewer for each division Selecting a value of one for this property disables it Note that each tag displayed is scaled according to its own format properties and that different tags may thus have different scaling You ideally should define gridlines that make sense for all tags that are to be shown and ensure that you label the display page to let the operator know what scaling you have selected The Minor Data Gridlines property is used to indicate into how may minor divisions each major division should be divided A thin line will be drawn across the viewer at each division Selecting a value of one for this property disables it e The Show Divisions property is used to indicate whether gridlines should be drawn for the time axis The major and minor divisions to be used are chosen by the system according to the current zoom level The Cursor page is used to activate the history cursor and define its color The cursor is useful in combination with the Show Data property to view the value of a trace at a specific time When displayed on the viewer the cursor indicates its time position for reference THE GENERAL BUTTON PRIMITIVE The General Button primitive displays an animated button that can respond
366. ng automatically You may also decide to host WebSync on a central server so that the log files can be made available to selected users on your corporate network WEBSYNC SYNTAX WebSync is invoked from the command line using the following syntax websync switches lt hostname gt where lt hostname gt is replaced with the IP address of the Master to be polled OPTIONAL SWITCHES The switches field may contain one or more of the following options terse can be used to suppress progress information poll n can be used to poll the Master every n minutes path dir can be used to specify dir as the directory to hold the log files ras name can be used to invoke a dial out connection to access the unit user name be used to specify the username for the connection pass pass be used to specify the password for the connection PAGE 242 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING NOTES FOR EDICT USERS e num num can be used to override the phone number for the connection EXAMPLE USAGE As an example the following command line websync 11 10 path C Logs 192 9 200 52 will read the log files for all data logs on the Master with the IP address of 192 9 200 52 and will store these logs under subdirectories of c Logs directory WebSync will continue to execute and will repeat the polling process every ten minutes The polling interval m
367. ning information about the Master s current time zone and whether daylight saving time is currently enabled In fact having accurate time zone information available is a vital to proper synchronization as the various synchronization methods are all designed to work with Universal Coordinated Time also known as UTC or Greenwich Mean Time This protocol works over Ethernet The operator interface can then either act as a client requesting the time and or a server providing the time Note that the server implementation does not currently support third party clients REVISION 6 PAGE 95 USING TIME MANAGEMENT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CONFIGURING THE TIME MANAGER The various properties associated with configuring the time management facilities are accessed via the Time Manager icon in the Communications window File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 1515 Edt Link Heb 5 2 e 5 8 O Programming Port O 85 232 Comms Port Enable Time Management R5 485 Comms Port Settings Time Server Enable SNTP No z Time Client Enable SNTP ves Linked OST SNTP Mode SNIP Server Enable GPS wo Enable GSM wo Frequency 480 mins Log Files Timestamp using UTC The properties are detailed below e The Enable Time Manager property is used to control access to the other facilities If it is not checked Crimson will op
368. not normally turn off the firewall The firewall should be disabled only for connections to corporate networks or to other controlled environments The Connection Type property is used to indicate whether you want this connection to be permanently maintained or whether you want it to be established automatically when an attempt is made to transfer data to hosts that are reachable via this interface If you select an on demand connection you must PAGE 86 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS specify the timeout after which the link will be terminated if no packets have been transmitted by the Master Logon Username and Logon Password properties are used to define the credentials that will be passed to the remote server when attempting to initialize this connection The username is not case sensitive while the password is Crimson s PPP implementation will ask its peer to use CHAP authentication to avoid transmitting or receiving plaintext password but will fallback to using PAP if the remote server does not support CHAP Route Type property is used to define the data that will be transferred via this interface For on demand connections this effectively defines when the connection will be activated If Default Gateway is selected any packets that do not match the address and netmask of the Ethernet connection will be sent to this interface Note that in this mode
369. nsumed the default actions are implemented EVENT ACTION Next Key Pressed Displays the page s Next Page if one is defined Prev Key Pressed Displays the page s Previous Page if one is defined Exit Key Pressed Displays the page s Parent Page if one is defined Menu Key Pressed Displays the fist page in the page list Mute Key Pressed Silences the Master s internal alarm sounder As mentioned above configuring a key for any global or local action even one that does nothing such as Block Default Action prevents this sequence from proceeding It should be obvious then why such an action is useful even though at first sight it serves no purpose REVISION 6 PAGE 155 ADVANCED TOPICS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DATA AVAILABILITY Crimson s communications infrastructure reads only those data items that are required for the current page This means that when a page 15 first selected certain data items may not be available For a display primitive this is no problem as the primitive simply displays an undefined state typically a number of dashes until the data becomes available For actions though things can get more complex For example suppose a local action increases the speed of a motor by 50 rpm If the motor speed is not referenced on the previously displayed page then when the page is first displayed Crimson will not know the current speed and will thus be unabl
370. nt to be used The font list comprises the eight resident fonts found in all Masters plus any custom fonts already created in this database The Pick button can be used to invoke the font selection dialog allowing any font that is installed on your system to be rendered in a form that can be used by the target device Note that it is your responsibility to ensure that your license in respect of the font allows this kind of usage The Text Type property 1s used to indicate whether the text should be drawn with a solid or transparent background Transparent text can be used to overlay multiple primitives while still allowing those primitives to be seen Foreground and Background properties are used to specify the colors to be used to draw the text Obviously having the same color for both settings will render the text invisible a fact that can be exploited to show or hide text as required The Horizontal and Vertical justification properties are used to indicate where the text should be placed within the bounding rectangle of the primitive REVISION 6 PAGE 179 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE AuTO TAG PRIMITIVE The Auto Tag primitive allows you to select a tag and then automatically place the appropriate text primitive on the display For example selecting an integer tag will allow insertion of an appropriately configured integer text primitive This is the icon you will use most often
371. ntroller FUNCTION REFERENCE NOTES FOR EDICT USERS FUNCTION REFERENCE The following pages describe the various standard functions that provided by Crimson These functions can be invoked within programs actions or expressions as described in the previous chapters Functions that are marked as active may not be used in expressions that are not allowed to change values eg in the controlling expression of a display primitive Functions that are marked as passive may be used in any context NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note The various Port functions replace the Serial RYOP functions REVISION 6 PAGE 291 ABS VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ABS VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value int float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the absolute value of the argument In other words if value is a positive value that value will be returned if value is a negative value a value of the same magnitude but with the opposite sign will be returned FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the va1ue argument EXAMPLE Error abs PV SP PAGE 292 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE ACOS VALUE ACOS VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in radians such tha
372. o be allocated to the remote end of the connection It is used together with the Remote Mask property to determine what packets will be routed to this connection For most applications mask of 255 255 255 255 will be used thereby instructing Crimson to send via this interface only those packets directly bound for the remote client A mask of 0 0 0 0 by contrast will allow all packets that do not specifically match another interface to be forwarded to the remote client presumably for further forwarding to the intended host Intermediate masks may be used to control exactly which packets are sent REVISION 6 PAGE 85 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ADDING A DIAL OUT CONNECTION Dial out connections are added exactly as above except that the PPP and Modem Client driver should be selected for the required port The configuration options for this modem are shown below File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 ioj x File Edit Link Help 5 Communications e Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port PPP Client R5 485 Comms Port Eat Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 7 Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 EB Services Mail Manager Ty OPC Server Time Manager Driver PPP and Modem Client Edit Connection Connect Using Generic Moi No Firewall Connection Type On Demand m Activity
373. o be used to display the value embedded in the graph if such a value is enabled via the Show Value property The second page contains the label and formatting information for the field Vertical Bar Graph Properties x Properties Format Data Label Label Text Translate Data Limits Minimum Value General As Per Formal Maximum Value General As Per Formal Data Format Number Base Sign Mode unsigned Digits Before DP 5 Digits After DP Leading Zeros Yes gt Group Digits No Prefix Translate Suffix Translate Cancel The properties shown are as described for an integer tag and you are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual that refers to Data Tags for more information Note that the existence of this primitive explains why one must enter minimum and maximum values for formulae when such tags can never be the subject of data entry If such limits were not defined how would Crimson know how to scale the bar THE SYSTEM PRIMITIVES view and accept active alarms It will always take up the whole of the display The Alarm Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with method to width but can be restricted to less than the full height if required The Alarm Ticker primitive scrolls through the active alarms in the system It L1 takes up a single line and the whole of the display width It does
374. o many data entry fields to fit on a single page the Next Page and Previous Page properties can be used to link together a series of pages to allow the operator to edit the fields in sequence Crimson will automatically position the cursor appropriately such that 1f the Prev key is pressed on the first field of a page the previous page will be activated with the cursor on the last field of that page The Entry Order property is used to define how the cursor the HMI will move between data entry fields The settings determine whether fields organized in a grid will be entered in row or column order REVISION 6 PAGE 149 DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Update Rate property is used to define how frequently items on the display are updated As update rates increase in frequency overall performance of the virtual HMI may decrease This selection should be left at the default setting when possible DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS In addition to the various actions that can be defined via page properties Crimson gives you the ability to define an action to be run when the system first starts and an action to be run once a second no matter which page is displayed These actions can be accessed by selecting the Pages icon in the left hand pane of the User Interface window DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR The previous sections have provided a detailed description of how to use the Master s display to get in
375. ocal Address defined on the Comm Port where the PPP modem protocol is selected The remote address is the one obtained by the PC upon its connection with the modem E Driver Selection connection ComectUsngi cenere andi Modem z 20 secs Addtionalint e Ss Suppor pisabled z Log File Disabled z Authentication Logon Username Logon Password Configuration Local Address 192 168 200 1 Remote Address 192 168200 2 RemateMask 255 255 255 255 Clear Port Settings ose For a PPP and modem client configuration the G3 will most likely connect to the Internet using an Internet access provider The IP address to enter in your web browser is therefore the one provided by this service For this reason you will most likely require a fixed IP address to be able to access the G3 web server In case the TCP port defined in the Web Server module is different from 80 the IP address entered in the web browser has to be followed by a colon and the port required For example http 192 168 100 0 81 REVISION 6 PAGE 249 WEB SERVER SAMPLES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WEB SERVER SAMPLES The picture below shows the main menu displayed by the web server Web Server Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 Edt Favortes Tools Heb Heak
376. ocess disturbances or setpoint changes Enter the safe output power limits for the process You may enter values in excess of 100 and 100 to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwise limit the output to less than their maximums e The Direct Low Limit and Direct High Limit properties may be used to limit controller power due to process disturbances or setpoint changes Enter the safe output power limits for the process You may enter values in excess of 100 and 100 to overcome limitations caused by power transfer values such as gains and offsets which would otherwise limit the output to less than their maximums TRANSFER GRAPH The power transfer graph illustrates the results of changes made to the power settings The blue line represents the direct output while the red line represents the reverse output REVISION 6 PAGE 39 CSSG STRAIN GAGE INPUT PID MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE ALARMS TAB 3 gt Untitled File Crimson Anl x File Edt View Link Help 2 LEDs outputs Alarms Power control General p Input Fault Set Output To 0 00 Fault input 1 v Latching The four soft process alarms may be used to monitor process status and may be used to actuate the module s physical outputs Otherwise the bit alone may be monito
377. of a year extends beyond year end FUNCTION TYPE These functions are passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d GetDate GetNow 12 60 60 PAGE 336 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION drive int The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the number of free memory bytes on the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactFlash access is necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE FreeMemory GetDiskFreeBytes 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 337 GETDISKFREEPERCENT DRIVE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETDISKFREEPERCENT DRIVE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION drive int The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the percentage of free memory space on the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactFlash access is necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passi
378. of the Ethernet port s protocols and configure both as Modbus TCP IP Masters with a single device attached to each protocol Device Settings rogranming Port f R5 232 Comms Port Fee Comms Port coa Ethernet Device Identification Protocol 1 Modbus TCP IP Master 1P Address m ci 192 9 200 52 E Protocol 2 Modbus TCP IP Master TP Port mnc Unit Number y Protocol Options Link Type ICMP Ping Connection Timeout Connection Backoff For most protocols this will produce higher performance as it will allow simultaneous communications with the two devices It will however consume two of the four protocols limiting your ability to connect via additional protocols in complex applications Your second option is therefore to use a single protocol configured as a Modbus TCP IP Master but to add a further device so that both slaves are accessed via the same driver F Untitled File Crimson 2 0 petes Sigs 4 RS 232 Comms Port Enable Device 9 5 485 Comms Port 5 4 Ethernet Device Identification Protocol 1 Modbus TCP IP Master IP Address m 192 9 200 52 TCP Port 502 Uni Number 1 Protocol Options Link Type ICMP Ping Connection Timeout Sector Transaction Timeout PAGE 68 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS MAPPING DATA This will ty
379. of the side that is adjacent to the angle theta DESCRIPTION This function is equivalent to atan a b except that it also considers the sign of a and b and thereby ensures that the return value is in the appropriate quadrant It is also capable of handling a zero value for b thereby avoiding the infinity that would result if the single argument form of tan were used instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta atan2 1 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 297 BEEP FREQ PERIOD CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER BEEP FREQ PERIOD ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION freq int The required frequency in semitones period int The required period in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Sounds the terminal s beeper for the indicated period at the indicated pitch Passing a value of Zero for period will turn off the beeper Beep requests are not queued so calling the function will immediately override any previous calls For those of you with a musical bent the req argument is calibrated in semitones On a more serious note the Beep function can be a useful debugging aid as it provides an asynchronous method of signaling the handling of an event or the execution of a program step FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Beep 60 100 PAGE 298 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE
380. of this rule with respect to programs MODE BEHAVIOR Read When Referenced External data used by the program will be added to the comms scan whenever the program is referenced If the program is referenced by a display page the data will be read when that page is displayed if the program is referenced by a global action or a trigger the data will be read at all times This is the default mode and is acceptable for all programs except those that use very large amounts of external data Read Always External data used by the program will be read at all times whether or not the program is referenced This means that the program will always be ready to run and that the operator will not see the NOT READY message that might otherwise occur when the program is first referenced The downside of this mode is that comms performance may be reduced if large amounts of data are referenced by the program Read When Executed External data used within the program will be read only when the program is invoked The program will wait for the period defined in the timeout property for such data to be available If the data cannot be read perhaps because a device is offline the program will not execute This mode is typically used with globally referenced programs that consume large amounts of data that would otherwise slow down the communications scan Read But Run Anyway External data will be treated as described for Read Alwa
381. ogether using math operators In the example above the tag is set to be equal to the sum of two tank levels therefore indicating the total amount of feedstock available The Scaling and Transforms properties are as described for integer variables The Setpoint properties are as described for integer variables PAGE 116 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of an integer array contains the following properties P Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 Edt yew Teg Unk Hep H n e H xmmx e t s Data Tags x Array Data Y MotorStopped Mapping 00000 Edt Yes Y Motori Elements 16 integers X IntFormula X Intatray E SionMode Driver Defaut Accessi and write Storage Ner Retentive 7 Simulation o Communications ReadPolcy Read Adaptively Ed Readahesd 3 registers ReadBehind 3 registers Actions onwate n7 To include this tag in a custom web page use 511 OVER CAPS NU e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the Master If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected e The Elements property is used to indicat
382. ok file cstring The path and file name to be sent DESCRIPTION Sends an email from the operator interface with the file specified attached The function returns immediately having first added the required email to the system s mail queue The message will be sent using the appropriate mail transport as configured in the database FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SendFile 0 LOGS LOG1 260706 csv PAGE 402 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SENDMAIL RCPT SUBJECT BODY SENDMAIL RCP7 SUBJECT BODY ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION rcpt int The recipient s index in the database s address book subject cstring The required subject line for the email body cstring The required body text of the email DESCRIPTION Sends an email from the operator interface The function returns immediately having first added the required email to the system s mail queue The message will be sent using the appropriate mail transport as configured in the database Note The first recipient is 0 FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SendMail 1 Test Subject Line Test Body Text REVISION 6 PAGE 403 SET TAG VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER SET 7AG VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION tag int or real The
383. om the lowest numbered group to the highest Except where noted otherwise in the text operators within a group are evaluated left to right The default order of evaluation can be overridden by using parentheses TYPE CONVERSION Normally Crimson will automatically decide when to switch from evaluating an expression in integer math to evaluating it using floating point For example if you divide an integer PAGE 262 http www redlion net controller WRITING EXPRESSIONS COMPARING VALUES value by a floating point value the integer will be converted to floating point before the division is carried out However there will be some situations where you want to force a conversion to take place For example suppose you are adding together three integers that represent the levels in three tanks and then dividing the total by the tank count to obtain the average level If you use an expression such as Tank1 Tank2 Tank3 3 then your result may not be as accurate as you demand as the division will take place using integer math and the average will not contain any decimal places To force Crimson to evaluate the result using floating point math the simplest technique is to change the 3 to 3 0 thereby forcing Crimson to convert the sum to floating point before the division is performed A slightly more complex technique is to use syntax such as float Tank1 Tank2 Tank3 3 This invokes what is known as a type cast on the term in paren
384. om where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The second page defines additional formatting information and is as described for the general button primitive The third page is used to define the custom images to be used to reflect the button states and 1s as described for the general button except that different images can be specified depending on whether the underlying tag is on or off You should again refer to the picture primitive for information on selecting images The fourth page defines a number of properties specific to data entry These are as defined for the flag tag text primitive and you should refer to that section for details The fifth and final page defines the label and format to be used for the primitive and is as defined for flag tags THE SELECTOR PRIMITIVES The Rich 2 State Selector primitive displays a rotary style switch that can be used to turn on and turn off a flag tag As with all rich primitives most of the configuration data can be obtained from the underlying tag The Rich Multi State Selector primitive displays a rotary style switch that can be used to t
385. on is freed thus reducing memory usage BATCH LOGGING Batch Logging is a utility to create production oriented logging For normal data logging operation the data logger will save the log files under a folder named as the log On the other hand batch logging operation follows a start and end event meaning the data will be recorded only between the start and end event In this case log files included in batch logging are not only saved under the log folder but also the batch folder The batch folder will take an operator given name upon the start event Logs are included with the nclude In Batch option present in different places in Crimson such as each data log Data Tags for event logging and the Security Manager Include in Batch No m REVISION 6 PAGE 237 CREATING DATA 1065 CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Removable Disk F BATCH WATERA Loa WATERB 061 3 Logs 1062 The figure above shows the result on the CompactFlash card for normal logging and batch logging this example two batches were created one called WATERA and Each folder contains a LOGI folder which in turn contains log files with data only recorded while each respective batch was running The data logger created continuous log files under LOGS XLOGI Note that LOG2 was not included in batch as it does not appear under the batch folders CoNTROLLING A
386. on of each input s parameters e The Enabled property provides a means to disable unused inputs thereby increasing the rate at which the remaining inputs are read See the hardware bulletin for more information regarding reading rates e The Decimals property is used to allow Crimson to display the engineering units in the proper resolution This is only used to display the appropriate resolution throughout the software and is not used within the module e The PV at 0 and PV at 100 properties are used to scale the input signals Enter the desired PV reading for the minimum and maximum input signal levels ie If the application involves a flow sensor with a 4 20 mA output proportional to 5 to 105 GPM select Process 4 20mA for the Input Type enter 5 for the PV at 0 setting and enter 105 for the PV at 100 setting e The Scale Beyond PV Points property allows the PV value to continue extrapolating beyond the PV at 0 and PV at 100 values if the input exceeds its typical limits If Scale Beyond PV Points is not checked the PV value will REVISION 6 PAGE 53 CSINI CSINV ANALOG INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER only measure to its limits even if the signal is slightly outside of the measurement range The Square Root property allows the unit to be used in applications in which the measured signal is the square ofthe PV This is useful in applications such as the measurement of flow w
387. onfigure the IP address of the Simple Network Time Service server If Configured via DHCP is PAGE 96 http www redlion net controller USING TIME MANAGEMENT selected the unit s Ethernet port must be configured to use DHCP and the network s DHCP server must be configured to designate a server via option 42 The Enable GPS property is used to instruct the time client to use a GPS unit connected via NMEA 0183 as an alternative method of obtaining the current time The unit may be connected to any serial port using the appropriate driver The Frequency property is used to specify how often the Master should attempt to synchronize its time by the methods enabled above The Master will always attempt to sync twenty seconds after power up and will then sync as specified by this property If a given attempt to sync fails the unit will retry every 30 seconds until it is successful If both GPS and SNTP synchronization are enabled the SNTP will only be used if a GPS is not available Loc FILE e The Time Stamp Using UTC property is used to instruct Crimson to base its event and data logging on UTC rather than on local time This produces log files which are more easily portable across time zones and which do not suffer from discontinuities when switching in and out of Daylight Savings Time The setting 18 global and will effect all log files within the system SELECTING AN SNTP SERVER When configuring the SNTP client you have
388. ook odd to have Get From Tag and Flash On Alarm properties remember that the value property may be a tag and so Crimson does have access to the tag label and to the tag s alarm state should you decide to use them The second page contains data entry properties These are as described for text tag primitives The third page is shown below cer Time and Date Properties E Properties Data Entry Format r Data Label Label Text Klock Translate Format Field Type Time Then Date Time Format 12 Hour Civil m AM Suffix cale Default Translate Translate PM Suffix Show Seconds ves m Date Format Locale Default x Show Month As Digits x Show Year As 2 Digits Set As Defaults Label Text property is used to define an optional label for the primitive The Field Type property is used to indicate whether the field should display the time the date or both In the last case this property also indicates in which order the two elements should be shown The Time Format property is used to indicate whether 12 hour civil or 24 hour military time format should be used As with other properties leaving this set to Locale Default will allow Crimson to pick a suitable format according to the language selected within the HMI REVISION 6 PAGE 185 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The AM Suffix and PM Suffix properties are used with 12 hou
389. op of the page by left clicking on it To place the symbol s on the screen simply left click anywhere on the workspace When you have finished placing a particular symbol right click to deselect placement mode Symbols can be moved by selecting them with a left click and then by dragging them to the new position A subsequent left click places the symbol in the new position Most symbols have one or more parameters that can be adjusted Double click the symbol in question to access its parameters Symbols are deleted by right clicking on them WORKING WITH WIRES Wires are drawn using the left mouse button Simply click on one connection point and then the next to draw the connection The connection points will route automatically but you will sometimes find it necessary to move the wires to prevent overlap The horizontal sections can be moved by repositioning the symbol while the vertical sections can be moved by left clicking them Move the section to the desired area then left click again to place it SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION The logical AND requires that all inputs be active an output of 1 add more 4 inputs to symbol double click it and enter a new number The logical OR requires that one or more inputs be active for an output of 1 To add more inputs to the symbol double click it and enter a new number The logical XOR exclusive OR requires that one but not all inputs be active for
390. operty of the display format in that it impacts the data that is actually stored THE COLORS The Colors tab of a string tag contains the following properties EITUTLTESSESSSUS Ed View Tag Unk tb ne eH 7sxmu amp x e t v Text Colors color RGM ond Mick AB StingArray To include this tag in custom web page use 1011 CAPS NU The tab is used to specify the default colors to be used to display this tag MORE THAN TWO ALARMS If your application requires more than two alarms or indeed triggers for a tag define a formula to be equal in value to the primary tag and set the extra alarms on the alias For example if you have a variable called Level which is mapped to N7 100 in a PLC and you need to create a third alarm for that tag create a variable called say LevelAlias and set its value property to Level You can then set additional alarms on this alias tag Not present on monochrome virtual HMI REVISION 6 PAGE 129 VALIDATING TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER VALIDATING TAGS Selecting the Tags icon in the left hand pane of the Tags window will allow access to the Validate All Tags button Pressing this button will recompile all expressions in your database fixing any broken communications references and updating tag reference counts You should not need to push this button unless you have removed and then replaced tags
391. or does not change and is selected from the drop down list or by invoking the color selection dialog by pressing the Pick button e In Tag Text mode the color is animated to match the foreground color defined by a particular tag The specific tag can be selected by pressing the Pick button e In Tag Back mode the color is animated to match the background color defined by a particular tag The specific tag can be selected by pressing the Pick button The drop down list contains the fixed following colors The sixteen standard VGA colors e sixteen custom colors defined by the user Fourteen shades of gray that fall between black and white The color selection dialog referenced above is shown below Select Color Basic colors Custom colors BEE EEE Ee m m mum Hue 86 Bed 61 Sat 125 Green 194 Color Lum 120 Blye Add to Custom Colors This dialog offers several ways of defining a color You can pick from the palette pick from the rainbow window or enter the explicit HSL or RGB parameters The dialog also allows custom colors to be added to the palette These will appear whenever the dialog is invoked and will also appear in the drop down list described above Note that not every color that is displayed in the rainbow will be capable of being rendered on the HMI s 256 color display Crimson will choose the nearest color within the abilities of the device DEF
392. ore than eight states have been defined Not present on monochrome virtual HMI PAGE 124 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING MULTI TAGS THE ALARM TABS Each Alarm tab of a multi variable or formula contains the following properties 5 Untitled File Crimson 2 0 ceres EESTI maorin 5 vetas Rotor Owe Faicd Trae MotorFail es E hh Trigger mes Delay Accept Print 71 The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The table below lists the available modes MODE ALARM WILL ACTIVATE WHEN State Match The value of the tag is equal to the alarm s Value State Mismatch The value of tag is not equal to the alarm s Value The Value property is used to define the comparison data for the alarm e The remainder of the properties are as described for the Alarms tab of flag tags THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of a multi variable or formula contains the following properties Untitled File Crimson 2 0 YO MotorFail Triggers alarm 2 Alarm Data e The Trigger Mode property is as described for the Alarm tabs e Delay property is as described for a flag tag s Alarms tab Action property is used to indicate what action should be performed wh
393. ose identity is known or by users with specific user rights The access control setting also allows you to specify whether a tag can be changed by a program running as a result of something other than user action This facility allows you to guarantee that no background changes occur to sensitive data even if a programming error attempts to make such a change WRITE LOGGING Tags also have a write logging property xl Options Default for Object Do Not Log Chang This indicates whether changes made to a tag by users or by programs should be logged This facility allows you to create an audit trail of changes to your system thereby simplifying fault finding and providing quality control information as to process configuration Note that care should be taken when logging changes made by programs as certain database may log unmanageable amounts of data in such circumstances DEFAULT ACCESS To speed the configuration process Crimson also provides the ability to specify default access and write logging parameters for mapped tags internal tags and display pages The differentiation between mapped and unmapped tags is important in systems where all changes PAGE 256 http www redlion net controller USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY SETTINGS to external data must be recorded but where data internal to Crimson can be manipulated without the need for such an audit trail ON DEMAND LOGON Crimson s security system
394. ot write only cannot be set to retentive as their values will in any case be read from the PLC and it does not therefore make sense to waste local storage to retain data that will be overwritten e The Simulation property is used to select the value that Crimson will assign to this tag when displaying it within the display page editor This facility can be useful for documenting databases in that it allows a display page to be configured to represent a particular machine state such that a screen capture can then be pasted into an operator manual or other documentation e The Setpoint properties are used to indicate whether a setpoint will be specified for this tag and what that setpoint will be Setpoints are used by certain alarm modes and allow the actual state of a tag to be compared to its intended state For example a tag that represents the state of an input from a speed switch for a REVISION 6 PAGE 109 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER motor might have the motor s control output specified as a setpoint This allows an alarm to be programmed to activate if the motor fails to start e The On Write property is used to define an action that will be executed when a change is made to the tag This action may be used to update dependent values or to perform other actions specific to the database Care should be taken not to perform actions that are too complex or system performance may be reduced THE D
395. ou ll no doubt want to jump right into programming before reading it in its entirety The following section provides you with enough information to develop a working system OVERVIEW For the simplest of applications only the first two icons eg Modules and Communications are necessary The former configures the system allowing you to add delete and edit modules while the latter allows module data to be mapped to an external device s Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 To select a target device other than a CSMSTRSXC use the New command on the File menu OVER CAPS NUM MODULES The first step in the configuration of a database is to create and configure the various modules used in the application This is done under the Modules window of Crimson To insert a module into the system double click on the blank base You will be prompted to choose the type of module to insert You may also provide a descriptive name for the module File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Module Link Help Dea v snax 4 csie csiwat REVISION 6 PAGE 3 COMMUNICATIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Edit the individual module s properties by double clicking it Each module and its properties are explained in detail in later sections COMMUNICATIONS Next you ll want to configure a port to comm
396. ource image should be scaled before being displayed on the operator interface The Fill format properties are used to define the background of the primitive The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive e The Show Item property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression THE TRENDING PRIMITIVES The Data Logger primitive provides a fixed view of the data contained within a data logger The number of data points to be displayed may be defined and channels may be shown or hidden using a bit mask The Trend Viewer primitive provides a more advanced interactive view of a data logger allowing the operator to zoom in zoom out and to scroll backwards and forwards through historical data that is saved in the logger s history buffer The data logger primitive is configured via two property pages shown below is the general properties page dar Data Logger Properties Properties Pens Options Data Log z Sizing Mode Specify Point Count Points to Show 50 Show Channels w General Edit m Fill Format Fill Style m Solid Color Color 1 Fixed E cray Pick Color 2 Fixed m Black 71 Pick r Line Format Line Style solid Color Line Color v Fixed Ia white Pick Display State Show Item Y General TRUE Edite Set As Defau
397. ownload via Ethernet Check the IP address of the target device in Link gt Options Check that the USB drivers were install successfully Reinstall G3 HMI USB driver under the PC device manager if necessary No Reply from terminal CompactFlash required for upgrade Cable is not connected If the message appears while downloading to the device The version of Crimson on the PC is different from the target device firmware version when attempting a download via Ethernet Make sure the cable is connected or check above solutions Download again with Link gt Update or F9 Insert a CompactFlash Card in the target device Use another communication port for download USB or Serial The window is too small to allow editing The current User interface view is too small to allow editing Change the panel view using View gt Panel gt Display only The device returned an unexpected reply code The device you are trying to download to is not supported by this version of Crimson Update Crimson 2 to the latest version available on www redlion net Choose Repair when upgrading http www redlion net controller TROUBLESH OOTING SERIAL COMMUNICATION SERIAL COMMUNICATION This section is used to troubleshoot the communication between two devices linked via serial ports i e RS232 or RS485 TIP For communication troubleshooting it is strongly
398. pically produce slightly reduced performance as Crimson will poll each device in turn rather than talking to both devices at the same time It will however conserve Ethernet protocols allowing more complex applications without running out of resources MAPPING DATA Having configured the protocol you must now decide what range of addresses you want to utilize in the target device In this example we want the Master to read and write module data to an Allen Bradley PLC via DF1 We begin by selecting the device icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and clicking the Add Gateway Block button in the right hand pane An icon to represent Block 1 will appear and selecting it will show the following settings oes Nun In the example above we have configured the Start Address to 010 0000 to indicate that this is where we want the block to begin with a size of 16 which indicates how many registers we want to map data to Finally we have configured the Direction property as MC to Device to indicate that we want the Modular Controller to write module data into these registers REVISION 6 PAGE 69 MAPPING DATA CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MAPPING ITEMS TO A BLOCK Once the block has been created and its size defined entries appear in the left hand pane of the window to represent each of the registers that the block contains When one o
399. placing N with the index number of the tag in question This index number is displayed on the status bar when a tag is selected within the Data Tag window and more or less corresponds to the order in which the tags were created When the web page containing this sequence is served the sequence will be replaced by the current value of the tag formatted according to the tag s properties DEPLOYING THE SITE To deploy your custom web site copy it into the NWEB directory on the CompactFlash card to be installed in the Master To copy the files either mount the card as a drive on your PC as described at the start of this manual or use a suitable card writer connected to your PC Make sure that the Enable Custom Site property is set and the custom site will appear on the web server menu When the site is selected a file called DEFAULT HTM within the WEB directory will be displayed Beyond that point navigation is according to the links within the site COMPACTFLASH ACCESS Note that in order to serve custom web pages or to provide access to the Master s data logger the web server needs to be able to access the unit s CompactFlash card If you have mounted the card as a drive on your PC and performed write operations you may have to wait a minute or so for the PC to unlock the card and allow the Master to get access If you are using an operating system earlier than Windows 2000 to perform such an operation you may find that your PC locks the
400. played in BLUE local and global actions are BOTH defined Once you have defined an action you can right click on the key and use the resulting menu to select either Make Global or Make Local to change the action type These options will not be available if both types of action have already been defined ENABLING ACTIONS If you want to make a particular action dependent on some condition being true enter an expression for that condition in the Enable field for the action in question This expression may reference a flag tag directly or may use any of the comparison or logical operators defined in the Writing Expressions section If you need more complex logic such that one of several actions is performed based on more complex decision making configure the key in user defined mode and use it to invoke a program that implements the required logic ACTION DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each available type of action When each type 1s selected the Action Details portion of the action dialog box will change to show the available options THE GOTO PAGE ACTION This action is used to instruct the Master to show a new page The options are shown below cerRectangle Properties Format Action Action Made Operation m Action Details Target Page 2 m Show As Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled Set As Defaults
401. plish this PAGE 72 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS DATA TRANSFORMATION refer to the section on Data Tags and create a mapped variable to represent the input value that will be read from the device Then create a formula to represent the output value setting the expression so as to perform the required math You can then create a Gateway Block targeted at the required output register and drag the formula across to instruct Crimson to write the derived value back to the PLC REVISION 6 PAGE 73 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING EXPANSION CARDS ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS This chapter explains how to use some of the more advanced communications features that are supported by Crimson Simple applications may not require these features and you may thus choose to skip this chapter and return to it later UsING EXPANSION CARDS The CSMSTRSX Enhanced Modular Controller Master is capable of hosting an expansion card to provide additional communications facilities Cards that will be made available in early 2006 will offer additional serial ports Profibus DeviceNet and CANOpen support More cards will be made available as the range is expanded Hardware installation instructions are provided with each card so please refer to the supplied data sheet for information on how to fit the card to the Master Once the card is installed configuration is performed by selecting the MC icon in the left hand pa
402. points Its only properties are style of line to be used In addition to the solid colors shown on the line toolbox a number of dotted styles can also be accessed via the properties dialog box THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES The Rectangle primitive is a rectangle with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Round Rectangle primitive is similar to the rectangle but has rounded corners When the primitive is selected an additional handle appears allowing the radius of the corners to be edited by dragging the handle from side to side The Shadow primitive is similar to the rectangle but with either a drop shadow or with a shaded 3D effect The primitive is often drawn so as to allow it to act as a frame around text primitives or other groups of elements REVISION 6 PAGE 171 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER bber The Wedge primitive is a right angled triangle located within one quadrant of a bounding rectangle In addition to the outline and fill properties the wedge has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse primitive is an ellipse with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Ellipse
403. pplications in which the sensor error is non linear but can still be measured with simple two point scaling PAGE 54 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSINI CSINV ANALOG INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING LINEARIZATION CURVE The Linearization Curve plots the PV value over the input points To enter new values click anywhere on the graphic CHANNEL N LINEARIZATION DATA Channel 1 Linearization 1 point per line 100 points maximum Comma or lt ctri tab gt between values Input Range 2 000 to 22 000 PY Range 30000 to 30000 Cancel Enter up to 100 input PV pairs for the selected input channel Use a comma or lt crtl tab gt to separate the pairs and press the enter key to enter the next pair The graphic will update to show the result of the data Data may also be copied from programs such as MS Excel and pasted into the dialog box AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers INPUT STATUS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS PV1 8 Process Value scaled according to PV at Minimum and R PV at Maximum values InputAlarml 8 Input out of range 0 or 1 bit R Configuration dependent INPUT CONTROL DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS InputFilter Input Filter 0 60 0 sec R W ProcessMinl 8 Desired PV at minimum input signal level
404. r SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE COMMSERROR COMMSERROR DESCRIPTION Returns a bit mask indicating whether or not each communications device is offline A value of 1 in a given bit position indicates that the corresponding device is experiencing comms errors Bit 0 ie the bit with a value of 1 corresponds to the first communication device VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 6 PAGE 277 DISPBRIGHTNESS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DISPBRIGHTNESS DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the brightness of the display from 0 to 100 with zero being off VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 278 http www redlion net controller SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE DISPCONTRAST DISPCONTRAST DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the amount of display contrast from 0 to 100 VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write REVISION 6 PAGE 279 DISPCOUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DisPCOUNT DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the number of display updates since last reset VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only PAGE 280 http www redlion net controller SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE DISPUPDATES DISPUPDATES DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating how fast the display updates VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 6 PAGE 281 ISSIRENON CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONT
405. r a GPRS modem connection e The Keep Alive time is the period for which the FTP connection should be kept alive in case further transfers are required A value of zero will close the connection as soon as the current transfer has been completed Non zero values make for more efficient operation when transferring multiple files e Enable the Record Log File to keep a log of all FTP interactions in the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging FTP operations but it will tend to degrade performance slightly AUTOMATIC LOG SYNCHRONIZATION The automatic log synchronization feature will enable the G3 to synchronize all log files present on the CompactFlash card with the FTP server on a time base The user does not have to download the log files via the web server anymore but can access them directly on the server or computer the G3 synchronized with To enable Automatic log synchronization check Enable Log File Sync REVISION 6 PAGE 99 CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER View Link Help Communications x f Settings 4 Programming Port 22 d R5 232 Comms Port IV Enable Sync Manager 49 RS 485 Comms Port ened Log Ple SP Server IP Address 7 Fixed 192 168 20 1 bed 21 i Standard 10 secs RecordtogFile oisabed 7 f Log Synchronization
406. r mode to indicate the text to be appended to the time field in the morning and afternoon as appropriate If you leave the property undefined Crimson will use a default The Show Seconds property is used to indicate whether the time field should include the seconds or whether it should just comprise hours and minutes The Date Format property is used to indicate the order in which the various date elements 1e date month and year should be displayed The Show Month property is used to indicate whether the month should be displayed as digits ie 01 through 12 or as its short name ie Jan though Dec The Show Year property is used to indicate whether the date field should include CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER the year and if so how many digits should be shown for that element THE RICH BAR PRIMITIVES The Rich Vertical Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The Rich Horizontal Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The operation of these rich primitives is analogous to that of the various tag text primitives in that they are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling
407. r produces value of 1 if and only if the expressions on the left hand and right hand sides are true while the logical OR operator produces a value of 1 if either expression is true Note that unlike the bitwise operators referred to elsewhere in this section the logical operators stop evaluating once they know what the answer will be This means that in the above example for logical AND the right hand side of the operator will only be evaluated if A is greater than 10 as if this were not true the result of the AND operator must already be zero While this property makes little difference in the examples given above if the left hand or right hand expressions call a program or make a change to a data value this behavior must be taken into account CHOOSING VALUES You may find situations where you want to select between two values be they integers floating point values or strings depending on the value of some condition For example you may wish to set a motor s speed equal to 500 rpm or 2000 rpm based on a flag tag This operation can be performed using the operator which is unique in that it takes three arguments as shown in the example below OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Selection Group 13 Fast 2000 500 This example will evaluate to 2000 if Fast is true and 500 otherwise The operator can be thought to be equivalent to the IF function found in applications such as Microsoft Excel PAGE 264
408. r when the module is first powered up This prevents nuisance alarms from occurring The alarm remains disabled until the process enters a non alarm state The next time the Process Value enters an alarm condition the alarm will activate accordingly The AlarmAccept bit disables the alarm regardless of state If the alarm condition exists and the bit is written to a 0 the alarm activates Once activated the alarm stays active until accepted The alarm is automatically disabled when a setpoint change occurs or when the module is first powered up This prevents nuisance alarms from occurring The alarm remains disabled until the process enters a non alarm state The next time the Process Value enters an alarm condition the alarm will activate accordingly Momentarily writing the AlarmAccept bit to 1 turns off an active alarm If the alarm condition still exists the alarm remains off and is placed into standby mode That is the alarm will remain off until the alarm condition goes away and is then reentered If the AlarmAccept bit remains a 1 the alarm is disabled and will not function HEATER CURRENT The Heater Current alarm is useful for monitoring the condition of external AC control circuitry via the Heater Current Monitor input The Channel property is used to select which one of the three discrete outputs will be monitored The Limit Low property is the desired mA value from 0
409. rd T Change All Passwords T7 Maintenance Access Custom Rights User Right 1 User Right 2 User Right 3 User Right 4 User Right 5 User Right 6 User Right 7 User Right 8 USER RIGHTS Each user is granted zero or more access rights A user with no rights can access those objects that merely require the identity of the user to be recorded whereas users with more rights can REVISION 6 PAGE 255 SECURITY BASICS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER access those objects that demand those rights to be present Rights are divided into System Rights and User Rights with the former controlling access to facilities within the Crimson software and the latter being available for general use For example User Right 1 might be used within your database to control access to production targets only users whom you want to be able to vary such things would then be assigned this right AccESS CONTROL Objects that are subject to security have an associated access control setting credit Access Control xj Access Mode Allow Users with Specific Rights System Rights Maintenance Access Custom Rights User Right 1 User Right 2 User Right 3 User Right 4 User Right 5 User Right 6 User Right 7 User Right 8 This setting allows you to specify whether the item can be accessed by anyone by any operator wh
410. re Co eo reve era rada aaa ada Eee vg EET SMS MESSAGE PROCESSING 55 55 x roce PR eor EON ES ON Goa E RUD apo Fas E PE D NER E DEN DONE aAA AAA PAKANA a RS TRIG MOLTIBEE TNTEBEACES 2 0 mike kite ee p ed cre Ede e per ke Rer CHECKING THE MODEM STATUS MODEM INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM COMMUNICATION ara an nnd nnn 91 COMMUNICATION SERVER SETTINGS a OPC LINK RED LION PRODUCTS DATA 94 USING TIME an n a d an CONFIGURING THE TIME MANAGER SELECTING AN SNTP SERVER ccsscsscssecusecsuccusceccccuseeusescesuseeuseeuseeucesuueseussacesaussausseusseusseurseusenseenseenaes TIME ZONE GONFIGURATION 5260 ncesege CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP CLIENT eene 98 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER SETTINGS AUTOMATIC LOG SYNCHRONIZATION EDITING PROPERTIES 55 1 2 512 ss 106 EXPRESSION PROPERTIES nullae ehe deed ead ri rera 106 TRANSEATABLE STRINGS s 107 REVISION 6 PAGE III TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER COLOR PROPERTIES
411. re drawn and therefore whether or not a given primitive appears to be in front of or behind another primitive In the first example below the hatched square is shown behind the solid squares ie at the bottom of the z order In the second example it has been moved to the front of the order and appears in front of the other figures To move items in the z order select the items and then use the various commands on the Arrange menu The Move Forward and Move Backward commands move the selection one REVISION 6 PAGE 137 EDITING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER step in the indicated direction while the Move To Front and Move To Back commands move the selection to the indicated end of the z order Alternatively if you have a mouse that is equipped with a wheel the wheel can be used to move the selection Scrolling up moves the selection to the back of the z order scrolling down moves the selection to the front EDITING PRIMITIVES In addition to the above primitives can be edited in various ways The various clipboard commands on the Edit menu eg Cut Copy and Paste or the corresponding toolbar icons can be used to duplicate items or move them around on a page or between pages The Duplicate command can be used to perform a Copy operation immediately followed by a Paste operation Note that when a Paste is performed Crimson will offset the newly pasted item if it will exactly
412. red via the system itself or via external devices Mode property determines what behavior the alarm will assume The table below describes the various selections MODE DESCRIPTION Absolute Low The alarm activates when the measured value falls below the Alarm Value The alarm deactivates when the measured value goes above the Alarm Value Hysteresis Absolute High The alarm activates when the measured value exceeds the Alarm Value The alarm deactivates when the measured value falls below the Alarm Value Hysteresis Deviation Low If the measured value falls below the Setpoint Value by the amount of the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value Deviation High If the measured value exceeds the Setpoint Value by the amount of the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value In Band If the difference between the Setpoint Value and the measured value is not greater than the Alarm Value the alarm activates Out of Band If the measured value exceeds or falls below the Setpoint Value by an amount equal to the Alarm Value the alarm activates In this mode the alarm point tracks the Setpoint Value e The Assignment property changes the value that the alarms will monitor and therefore react to PAGE 40 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAGE I
413. redrawn in the selected language with any text for which translations have been entered including fixed text tag labels and tag formatting information adjusted as appropriate Pages that are subsequently displayed will also be drawn in the selected language ADVANCED TOPICS The following sections deal with more advanced issues relating to keyboard actions ACTION PROCESSING When a key is pressed or released Crimson goes through a defined sequence when deciding what to do with the event If any stage results in some action being performed the sequence is stopped and the later stages do not get a chance to process the key The sequence is as follows 1 Ifa display primitive is selected for user interaction it is given a chance to process the key Active data entry fields will consume the Raise Lower Exit and Enter keys plus whatever other keys are appropriate to the operation being performed For example integer entry fields will also consume the numeric keys 2 Ifa display primitive is selected for user interaction and the Next or Prev keys are pressed Crimson will attempt to find the next or previous display primitive that also desires user interaction If any such field exists the key will be consumed and that primitive will be activated 3 Ifalocal action is defined the action is performed and the key consumed 4 Ifaglobal action 15 defined the action 18 performed and the key consumed 5 Ifthe key remains unco
414. ricted to a maximum of four open files at any given time The CompactFlash card cannot be unmounted while a file is open Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling Note also that this function will not create a file that does not exist To do this call createFile before calling this function FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE hFile OpenFile LOGS LOG1 01010101 csv 0 PAGE 380 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE P1 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Returns pi as a floating point number FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Scale Pi 180 REVISION 6 PAGE 381 PLAYRTTTL TUNE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PLAYRTTTL TUNE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION tune cstring The tune to be played in RTTTL representation DESCRIPTION Plays a tune using the terminal s internal beeper The tune argument should contain the tune to be played in RTTTL format the format used by a number of cell phones for custom ring tone
415. ries of operations FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE if TestAccess 1 Clear all data Datal 0 Data2 0 Data3 0 PAGE 424 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE TEXTTOADDR ADDR TEXTTOADDR ADDR ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION addr cstring The addressed in dotted decimal form DESCRIPTION Converts a dotted decimal string into a 32 bit IP address FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE ip TextToAddr 192 168 0 1 REVISION 6 PAGE 425 TEXTTOFLOAT STRING CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER TEXTTOFLOAT S7RING ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the value of string treating it as a floating point number This function is often used together with Mid to extract values from strings received from raw serial ports It can also be used to convert other string values into floating point numbers FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Data TextToFloat 3 142 PAGE 426 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE TEXTTOINT STRING RADIX TEXTTOINT S7RING RADIX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed radix int The number base to be used DESCRIPTION Returns the value of string treating i
416. rimitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property The balance of the properties control the font colors and justification to be used when drawing the primitive These properties require no further explanation The second page is only used for fields that are selected for data entry cer Integer Text Properties Properties Data Entry Format Control Enable General ERN Edit Validate v General TRUE Actions 1 On Selected 2 On Deselected woe On Entry Complete woe 2 On Entry Error we Touch Entry Keypad Type Numeric with RaisejLower Keys gt Keypad Style Set As Defaults The Enable property is used to define an expression that must be true in order for data entry to be permitted This property may thus be used to implement a security system or to restrict entry to certain machine states e The Validate property is used to define an expression that will be used to validate any entered values e g DATA 25 0 will only allow multiples of 25 to be entered into the variable Amount The special system variable Data will hold the newly entered value but only during the execution of this expression The code should evaluate to non zero to allow entry or zero to block it The On Selected and On Deselected properties are used respectively to define actions to be executed when the user selects the field for entry
417. rite your own receive state machine As sample program is shown below int for if cstring input value input PortInput 5 42 13 3 0 value TextToInt input 10 Speed value PortPrint 5 PortPrint 5 PortPrint 5 Value is IntToText value 10 5 NENTS a PAGE 272 http www redlion net controller USING RAW PORTS SENDING DATA The example above listens on a TCP IP socket for a frame that starts with an asterisk and ends with a carriage return It then converts the frame to a decimal value stores this in an integer tag and echoes the value back to the client SENDING DATA To send data on a raw port use the PortWrite or PortPrint functions as documented in the Function Reference section of this manual The first function sends a single byte while the second function sends an entire string To send numeric values use the IntToText function to convert them into strings NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note The raw serial port device driver controls port s handshaking lines so there is no need to call SetRTS HoldTx or any of the various other port management functions These functions are thus not provided by Crimson e When sending data Crimson automatically handles buffer overflow events and ensures that no data 1s lost The PortWrite and PortPrint thus neither provide a return value nor
418. rn to what was displayed before the current page was called e The Show As property is used to define how the page should be displayed Aside from displaying it as a normal page it can be shown as a popup page or as a popup menu Both types of popup are shown on top of the existing page and while they are displayed the HMI keys and touch screen will assume the functions for the new page Popup menus are displayed aligned to the left of the display so as to match up with the soft keys while popup pages are displayed in the position indicated by the page properties Note that a primitive or key on the new page must be assigned the HidePopup action to remove the popup Note Popups are submitted to maximum size due to graphical memory limitation They are created by wrapping around all the objects on the page called as a popup If the external square around all the objects does not follow the rules below the popup will be truncated Popup Window e QVGA Display 305 x 224 pixels max VGA Displays The popup cannot be larger than 296 pixels and higher than 224 pixels at the same time One of the dimensions has to stay below the respective value This means the maximum dimensions horizontally are 624 x 224 and vertically 296 x 464 Popup Menu QVGA Display No limits e VGA Display 296 pixels wide max REVISION 6 PAGE 167 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER THE PusH BUTTON ACTION This action is
419. roperty is used to define the value to be displayed The Show Label property is used to indicate whether a label should be included with the bar graph For vertical graphs the label is included at the bottom for horizontal graphs it is included at the left hand side If a tag is used for the value property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise it must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the graph itself If a tag of the appropriate data type is used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label it must be entered on the Format tab The Show Setpoint property is used to indicate whether tick marks should be added either side of the bar to indicate the setpoint for the controlling value This option is only available if a tag has been entered for the value field The Get Label and Get Format properties are as defined for the various tag text primitives The format is not required if the show value property is set to No The property is used to indicate the pattern to be used for the active portion of the bar If you find that your bar graph does not appear to work make sure you have not left this property set to None REVISION 6 PAGE 147 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Font property is used to indicate the font t
420. rt Modbus Master Disable Code 16 Disable Code 15 j Frame Register Limite Code 03 32 words Code 16 32 words Code 01 512 bis Code 15 512 bits Code 02 512 bis Code 04 32 words Delete This Device Add Gateway Block Joven cars uon In the example above the Modbus Universal Master protocol has been selected and two additional devices have been created indicating that a total of three remote devices are to be accessed The right hand pane of the window shows the properties of a single device The Enable Device property is present for devices for all protocols while the balance of the fields are specific to the protocol that has been selected Note that the devices are given default PAGE 66 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET CONFIGURATION names by Crimson when they are created These names may be changed by selecting the appropriate icon in the left hand pane and simply typing the new device name ETHERNET CONFIGURATION The Master s Ethernet port is configured via the Ethernet icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window When this icon is selected the following settings are displayed F Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Port Settings Port Mode f RS 485 Comms Port Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol2 Y Protocols CUIUS Y Protocol 4 TP Address Network Mask Physical Layer IV Enable Fu
421. rver State property is used to enable or disable the web server If the server is enabled the Master will monitor port 80 for incoming requests and will fulfill the requests as required If the server is disabled connections to this port will be refused Remember that in order for the server to operate the Master s Ethernet port must have been enabled via the Communications window The Listen on Port property indicates the TCP port number the web server will listen on Port 80 is the standard http port for web browsing and will most likely suit your application e Title property is used to provide the title to be shown on the web server menu This title can be used to differentiate between several Masters on a network thereby ensuring that the correct Master is being accessed The Data Log Access property is used to enable or disable web access to the files created by the Data Logger Obviously this facility must be enabled if the WebSync utility is to be used to copy the log files to a PC The Remote Viewing property is used to enable or disable a facility by which web browser can be used to view the Master s virtual HMI This facility is very useful when remotely diagnosing problems that an operator may be having with a machine The Remote Control property is used to enable or disable an option by which the remote viewing facility is extended to allow a web browser to be used to simulate the pressing of keys on the v
422. s Sample tunes can be obtained from many sites on the World Wide Web FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PlayRTTTL TooSexy d 4 0 25 b 40 16f 169g 16 16g 16f 16f 16g 16f 16g 16gft 164 164 164 164 16 16 164 16 164 16 16 164 16 164 16 16 16 g 16 16g 16g 16g 16g 16g 16g 16f 16 16g 16 16g 32f PAGE 382 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE POPDEV ELEMENT COUNT PoPDEV ELEMENT COUNT ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION element int float The first array element to be processed count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the standard deviation of the count array elements from e1ement onwards assuming the data points to represent the whole of the population under study If you need to find the standard deviation of a sample use the StdDev function instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Dev PopDev Data 0 10 REVISION 6 PAGE 383 PORTCLOSE PORT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER PORTCLOSE PORT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION port int Closes the specified port DESCRIPTION This function is used in conjunction with the active or passive TCP raw port drivers to close the selected port by gracefully closing the connection that is attached to the associated socket FUNCTIO
423. s m Yes Yes Yes Yes E 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes The additional characters referred to by the Misc column are 12 65 Characters not included in the table are copied verbatim to the display For example to allow entry of a US telephone number use a template of 000 000 0000 PAGE 128 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TAGS MORE THAN TWO ALARMS The parentheses the space and the dash will all be included when the field is displayed but only the 10 digits indicated by the 0 characters will be stored in the string Similarly if data entry is enabled for a field using this template the cursor will skip the various non numeric positions when moving left or right and will only allow numeric characters to be entered for those positions that can be selected The Length property is used in lieu of the template to indicate how many characters should be reserved on a page when displaying this string If a string variable is marked as retentive it makes sense for this property to be equal to the length entered on the Data tab but this 1s not obligatory as you may want to allocate more or less space on the display for layout purposes The Justification property is used when a template is not specified and indicates how strings shorter than the Length property should be positioned within the storage allocated for the string It is distinct from the Justification pr
424. s 7 ond 2 Limit 6 e z ond ues 2 Limit 7 ond nes 2 E JEL i To include this tag in a custom web page use LO OVER CAPS NUM e The Default property is used to define the color pair that will be used to display the tag when its value is less than the Limit 1 property e The remaining properties define limits and color pairs that will be used to display the tag when its value is greater than the corresponding limit and less than the next limit If the next limit is zero the color pair will be used whenever the tag s value exceeds the specified limit THE ALARM TABS Each Alarm tab of an integer variable or formula contains the following properties F Untitled File 6310 Crimson 20 Edt Link Help 2 e Data Tags Tags x Alarm One Event Mode frr NEN Event Name High Value T General Hysteresis General Trigger Sw 0 Accept MotorStopped Fleghrray Y Motori X IntFormula IntArray Triogers 2 Alarm 1 colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use OVER CAPS NUM e The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The tables below list the available modes
425. s bounding rectangle while the data itself will be right justified If this property is set to no the Horizontal Justification property will be used to locate the data within the field Note that this property can be edited via the Field Label commands on the Format menu When no primitive is selected these commands can also be used to set the default value for newly created primitives The Get Label property is used to indicate from where the label text should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the value property If a tag has been selected you will be given the option of using the tag s default label or entering a new label on the Format tab of the dialog box If something else has been selected you will only have the second option e The Get Format property is used to indicate from where the formatting information for this primitive should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the value property If a tag of the correct data type has REVISION 6 PAGE 143 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER been selected you will be given the option of using the tag s default formatting or entering modified information on the Format tab of the dialog box If something else has been selected you will only have the second option e Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the Master s display to flash if the ta
426. s not return a value EXAMPLE SetNow 252288000 PAGE 408 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int Number of the port to be set param int Port parameter to be set value int Value of the parameter DESCRIPTION Sets the serial port parameter to value The port number starts from the programming port The table below shows the parameter number and associated possible values with value 1 PARAM NB DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE VALUES 1 Baud Rate The actual baud rate e g 115200 2 Data Bits 7 8 or9 3 Stop Bits lor2 4 Parity 0 none 1 odd or 2 even 5 Physical Mode 1 RS232 2 422 Master 3 422 Slave 4 485 Note This function will only work when called before the device startup The OnLoad field provided in the User Interface on the pages tree root 15 used for this purpose See example below for more details Note The function CommitAndReset is used to force the device to cycle power in order for the SetPortConfig function to set the new port parameters FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE See next page REVISION 6 PAGE 409 SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The following setup shows how to modify the RS232 port from the device disp
427. s of action have already been defined BLOCKING DEFAULT ACTIONS When defining key actions you may use the Block Default Action selection as a place holder to prevent further processing As an example suppose you have configured F1 to perform a global action but want to prevent this action from being invoked on a particular page By configuring F1 on that page as Block Default Action the global action will not occur REVISION 6 PAGE 223 DATA AVAILABILITY CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER DATA AVAILABILITY Crimson s communications infrastructure reads only those data items that are required for the current page This means that when a page is first selected certain data items may not be available For a display primitive this is no problem as the primitive simply displays an undefined state typically a number of dashes until the data becomes available For actions though things can get more complex For example suppose a local action increases the speed of a motor by 50 rpm If the motor speed is not referenced on the previously displayed page then when the page is first displayed Crimson will not know the current speed and will thus be unable to write the new value To handle this if the operator attempts to perform an action for which the required data is not available the Master module will display a NOT READY message until the key in question is released The operator must then wait a short while and try
428. s you to test the value of a bit within a data value by using the bit selection operator which is represented by a single period The left hand side of the operator should be the value in which the bit is to be tested and the right hand side should be an expression indicating the bit number to test This right hand value should be between 0 and 31 The result of the operator is equal to 0 or 1 depending on the value of the bit in question REVISION 6 PAGE 263 MULTIPLE CONDITIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Bit Selection Group 1 Input 2 The example shown tests bit 2 ie the bit with a value of 4 within the indicated tag If you want to test for a bit being equal to zero you can use the logical NOT operator OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Logical NOT Group 2 Input 2 This example is equal to 1 if bit 2 of the indicated tag is equal to 0 and vice versa MULTIPLE CONDITIONS If you want to define an expression that 1s true if a number of conditions are a true you can use the logical AND operator Similarly if you want to define an expression that is true if any of a number of conditions are true you can use the logical OR operator The examples below show each operator in use OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Logical AND Group 11 gt 10 amp amp gt 10 Logical OR Group 12 gt 10 gt 10 The logical AND operato
429. several options when selecting a server If you have a Windows or Unix based time server as part of your network infrastructure you should ultimately synchronize to this source to ensure enterprise wide synchronization If you have several Masters on the same network though you will find it better to nominate one of these as the master device for the purpose of setting Daylight Savings Time and then have that Master alone synchronize to the enterprise time source You can then configure the other devices to synchronize to the master device and enable the Linked DST facility to propagate the Daylight Savings Time setting around your factory If you have no enterprise time source available you may choose to nominate a single Master as the point where an operator will set the time and then have other Masters synchronize to that source Alternatively if your installation provides TCP IP access to the Internet via either Ethernet or a modem connection you may configure the SNTP client to synchronize to a public time server An example of this would be 192 6 15 28 which is the current IP address of a public time server provided by NIST A list of other servers can be found at http support microsoft com kb 262680 Note that since Crimson uses an IP address and not a host name to reference the SNTP server it will lose connection with any server that is relocated to a new network address While such relocations are very rare they are beyond yo
430. showing this field typically improves operator readability The Show Alarm Time property 18 used to indicate whether or not the time at which the alarm occurred should be included in the primitive If the time is displayed the second tab is used to define the format to be used The second tab is the time format and is as described for the time and date primitive for the alarm viewer The third tab is the priority colors selection and is as described in the alarm viewer PAGE 196 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS THE EVENT VIEWER PRIMITIVE The Event Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to view the events recorded in the system s event log As with the alarm viewer it is sometimes placed on a popup page The properties of this primitive are essentially the same as those for the alarm viewer You are thus referred to the earlier section for more details The only additional property is Show Event Type which 15 used to indicate whether or not each row should be labeled with the kind of event that resulted in the log entry The possible event types are alarm activations alarm acceptances alarm deactivations and event activations THE FILE VIEWER PRIMITIVE The File Viewer Primitive is used to display the content of a file saved on the CompactFlash card The primitive can display different files residing under the same folder but only one at
431. sponse but too high of a value coupled with noisy signal processes may cause the output to fluctuate too greatly yielding poor control Setting the time to zero disables derivative action The optimal Derivative Time may be established by invoking auto tune The value is adjustable from 0 to 600 0 seconds e The Power Filter is a time constant entered in seconds that dampens the calculated output power Increasing the value increases the dampening effect Generally a Power Filter in the range of one twentieth to one fiftieth of the controller s integral time or process time constant is effective Values longer than these may cause controller instability due to the added lag effect THE POWER TAB amp Untitled File Crimson E x File Edit View Link Help 2 9 Power Transfer Output Offset 0 00 Output Deadband 0 00 Output Reverse Gain 100 00 Output Direct Gain 100 00 Reverse Low Limit 0 00 Direct Low Limit 0 00 Reverse High Limit 100 00 Direct High Limit 100 00 Transfer Graph outputs Alarms Power Control General POWER TRANSFER e The Output Offset value effectively shifts the zero output point of the module s output power calculation This feature is most commonly used in proportional only applications to remove steady state error PAGE 38 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSSG STRAIN GAG
432. ss 12x16 m Foreground Black m Background white m Justification Horizontal Center Vertical Middle E Text property is used to specify the text to be displayed As mentioned above the US English version of the text can also be edited directly on the display page when the primitive is created or by clicking an existing primitive e The Font property is used to specify the font to be used This property can also be edited by using the font button on the toolbar or by using the Format menu The Foreground and Background properties are used to specify the colors to be used to draw the text Obviously having the same color for both settings will render the text unreadable Selecting None for the background will create transparent text allowing underlying primitives to be seen through the letters e The Horizontal and Vertical justification properties are used to indicate where the text should be placed within the bounding rectangle of the primitive These properties can also be edited via the associated toolbox or via the Format menu THE AuTO TAG PRIMITIVE The Auto Tag primitive allows you to select a tag and then automatically place the appropriate text primitive on the display For example selecting an integer tag will allow insertion of an appropriately configured integer text primitive This is the icon you will use most often for adding tags to a page It first displays the dialog box shown below
433. ss Control Default For Object Once again if no setting is defined default settings will be used THE SECURITY MANAGER PRIMITIVE The Security Manager Primitive is used to display the names of users present on the system It can be used to change a user s password depending on the rights allocated to the active user The only editable properties of this primitive define the fonts to be used and whether or not the primitive should be displayed Refer to other primitives for descriptions of these settings SECURITY RELATED FUNCTIONS Please refer to Appendix A later in this manual for details on the UserLogOn UserLogOff and TestAccess functions This third function is useful when changing many values from within a program as it allows you to force an access check early in the code to avoid making changes only to have later operations fail due to insufficient user rights REVISION 6 PAGE 259 DATA VALUES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WRITING EXPRESSIONS You will recall from the earlier sections of this manual that many fields within Crimson are configured as what are called expression properties You will further recall that these fields are configured by means of a user interface element similar to that shown below Value p None gt General In many situations you will be configuring these properties to be equal to the value of a tag or to the contents of a register in a remote co
434. ss Storage Device VIA USB Universal Host Controler USB Root Hub VIA USB Universal Host Controller USB Root Hub VIA USB Universal Host Controller VIA USB Universal Host Controler SETTING THE IP ADDRESS If you are using a TCP IP connection you should enter the IP address of the target device in the appropriate field in the dialog box If you leave the IP address as 0 0 0 0 Crimson will examine the currently loaded database to see if the Master s address can be determined from the configuration information This feature removes the need to change the IP addresses when switching between databases intended for different terminals SENDING THE DATABASE Once the link is configured the database can be downloaded using either the Link Send or Link Update commands The former will send the entire database whether or not individual objects within the file have changed The latter will only send changes and will typically take a much shorter period of time to complete The Update command is typically the only one REVISION 6 PAGE 13 DOWNLOADING TO THE MASTER CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER that you will need as Crimson will automatically fall back to a complete send if the incremental download fails for any reason As a shortcut note that you can access Link Update via the lightning bolt symbol on the toolbar or via the F9 key on the PC Status Item 0000 Writing data block 3
435. stem device installation the driver or the installation failed manager check if the device G3HMI is present If so uninstall that device Follow the USB installation guide available on www redlion net Upgrading Crimson The option selected during the upgrade Launch the upgrade again and choose did not upgrade the was Modify instead of Repair Repair when prompted software version The USB tech note is available under the Human Machine Interface section on the following page http www redlion net Support VirtualHelpDesk TechNotes html REVISION 6 PAGE 437 CRIMSON MESSAGES CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER CRIMSON MESSAGES ERRORS POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Device incompatible with file The device you are trying to download into doesn t match the database device Create a new database file corresponding to your device File gt New Unable to open communication port The communication port you try to download with is unavailable Incorrect download communication port Target device IP address incorrect NoUSB Drivers Check if the cable is connected correctly to the PC and the device programming ports USB or PG Port Check that Crimson is directed to the correct communication port Link gt Options Check that the communication port is not used by another service or software especially for serial ports If you d
436. strictions on popups may cause you to reject this idea The properties of the alarm viewer are displayed on four tabbed pages the first of which is shown below dar Alarm Viewer Properties x Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors m List Format Font Pike List Colors No Active Alarms and m Lime Active Alarm Use Priority Colors gt Active Alarm white and L Red Accepted Alarm m Black and Im Yellow Background fo White r List Contents Show End Markers Yes amp Show Alarm Time Yes No Active Alarms Text No Active Alarms 002050000000 Translate Cancel Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment e The List Colors properties are used to define the foreground and background colors used to display each alarm state The default values should be acceptable for most applications The selection Active Alarm Use Priority Colors can be set to YES in which case the Active Alarm color selection below it will be disabled and color selection based on the tag priority will be enabled on the Priority Colors page e The Show End Markers property is used to indicate whether to display a column that contains markers showing the beginning and end of
437. supports both conventional and on demand logon A conventional logon can occur when a user interface element such as a pushbutton is used to activate the Log On User action or to call the UserLogon function On demand logon occurs if the operator attempts an action without sufficient access rights and if a failed logon attempt has not occurred within the same action For example a user may press a button that runs a program to reset a number of values As soon as the program attempts to change a value that requires security access the system will prompt for logon credentials This method reduces operator interaction and produces a more responsive system MAINTENANCE ACCESS The system also provides a facility called Maintenance Mode to allow the user inactivity timeout to be overridden during system commissioning This mode is activated if a display page is marked as being accessible with the Maintenance Access right and if the current user has gained access to the page as a result of that right Use of this mode avoids the need to logon repeatedly when testing the system SECURITY SETTINGS security system settings are accessed via the Security Manager icon 2 gt Untitled File 6310 Crimson 20 ini xj View User Link Help D H Zxmmx ss im s e Security options Inactivity Timeout Clear Logon Name o Default Access Mapped Tags Unauthenticated Users and Programs Internal Tags Un
438. t Directory defines the root folder on the CompactFlash card where files to be open reside The viewer can only open files present under the indicated folder and cannot navigate to other folders The picture below shows functionalities available on the file viewer once downloaded in an operator interface Here the viewer is displaying the content of a CSV file available from the CompactFlash Card The file is accessed when the page with the primitive is displayed The Rescan button provides a way to reload the file content so the user has access to the latest data The Prev and Next button are used to navigate from one file to another They are available only if more than one file is present in the folder File number in the folder Name of the file displayed Total number of files in the folder CSU 11 of 1 Vari Var2 Var3 Vart Var5 0002 2006 03 01 16 28 37 57 51 52 87 5 0003 2006 08 01 16 28 38 18 11 75 23 47 0004 2006 08 01 16 28 39 18 67 98 40 4 0005 2006 08 01 16 28 40 10 99 49 43 51 0006 2006 08 01 16 28 41 42 95 6 93 87 0007 2006 08 01 16 28 42 93 18 63 15 62 0008 ELLE Tare 97 EER 51 60 0009 2006 08 01 16 28 44 68 6 12 93 31 0010 2006 08 01 16 28 45 94 6 45 65 5 0011 2006 08 01 16 28 46 5 43 20 97 0012 2006 08 01 16 28 47 59 70 9 20 78 0013 2006 08 01 16 28 4 15 9 72 25 96 0014 2006 08 01 16 28 49 84 52 52 75 29 0015 2006 08 01 16 28 50 55
439. t as a number of base radix This function is often used together with Mid to extract values from strings received from raw serial ports It can also be used to convert other string values into integers FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data TextToInt 1234 10 REVISION 6 PAGE 427 TIME H M S CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER TIME H M 5 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION h int The hour to be encoded from 0 to 23 m int The minute to be encoded from 0 to 59 5 int The second to be encoded from 0 to 59 DESCRIPTION Returns a value representing the indicated time as the number of seconds elapsed since midnight This value can then be used with other time date functions It can also be added to the value produced by Date to produce a value that references a particular time and date FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t Date 2000 12 31 Time 12 30 0 PAGE 428 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE USECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX USECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The port number where the camera is connected camera int The camera device number index int Inspection file number in the camera DESCRIPTION This function selects the inspection file to be used by the camera The number to be placed in the port argum
440. t as with other rich primitives the dial gauge primitives are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages 15 shown below dar Whole Dial Gauge Properties Properties additional Format Data Source Value speed Pick Show Label Show Value Yes m Get From Tag Field Label v Data Format v Text Colors r Scale Options Orientation Facing Out Major Divisions 10 Minor Divisions 2 Set As Defaults e Value property is used to define the value to be displayed The Show Label property is used to indicate whether a label should be included with the gauge The label is displayed in the center of the primitive above the optional value If a tag is used for the value property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise it must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the gauge If a tag of the appropriate data type is used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label it must be entered on the Format tab Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the fie
441. t at the rate specified in its properties and places the logged data into a buffer within the RAM of the Master module The second process executes every two minutes and writes the data from RAM to the CompactFlash card This structure has several advantages e Writes to the CompactFlash card are guaranteed to begin only on a two minute boundary that is at exactly 2 4 or 6 minutes past the hour and so on This means that if your Master module supports hot swapping of CF cards you can wait for the next burst of writes to start and when the CompactFlash activity LED on the front of the Master ceases to flicker you are guaranteed to have until the start of the next two minute interval before further writes will be attempted This means that you can remove the card without fear of data corruptions As long as you insert a new card before four minutes have elapsed no data will be lost e Writes to the CompactFlash achieve a much higher level of performance by avoiding the need to continually update the card s file system data structures for every single sample For logs configured to sample at very high data rates the bandwidth of a typical CompactFlash card would not allow data to be written reliably in the absence of such a buffering process Note that because data is not committed to CompactFlash for up to two minutes up to this amount of log data may be lost when the Master is powered down Further if the Master is powered down while
442. t controller FUNCTION REFERENCE MIN A B MIN A ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION a int float The first value to be compared b int float The second value to be compared DESCRIPTION Returns the smaller of the two arguments FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int Or float depending on the type of the arguments EXAMPLE Smaller Min Tankl Tank2 REVISION 6 PAGE 375 MULDIV A B C CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER MULDIV A C ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION a int First value b int Second value int Third value DESCRIPTION Returns a b c The intermediate math is done with 64 bit integers to avoid overflows FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d MulDiv a b c PAGE 376 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE MUTESIREN MUTESIREN ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Turns off the operator panel s internal siren FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE MuteSiren REVISION 6 PAGE 377 NEWBATCH NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER NEWBATCH WAME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION name cstring Name of the batch DESCRIPTION Starts a batch called name The name must be no more than 8 characters in length
443. t cos theta is equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta acos 1 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 293 ALARMACCEPTALL CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ALARMACCEPTALL ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none DESCRIPTION Accepts all active alarms FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE AlarmAcceptAll PAGE 294 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE ASIN VALUE ASIN VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in radians such that sin theta is equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta asin 1 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 295 ATAN VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ATAN VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION value float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in radians such that tan theta is equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta atan 1 0 PAGE 296 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE ATAN2 A B ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION a float The value of the side that is opposite the angle theta b float The value
444. t support this function Where supported the operations are driver specific and are documented separately FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Refer to comms driver application notes for specific examples REVISION 6 PAGE 319 EMPTYWRITEQUEUE DEV CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER EMPTYWRITEQUEUE DEV ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION dev int The device number DESCRIPTION Empties the writing queue for the device identified with the argument dev This will remove any pendant writes to the device from the queue therefore the removed information will not be transferred to the device Note The device number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when a device is selected in Communication FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE EmptyWriteQueue 1 PAGE 320 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE ENABLEDEVICE DEVICE ENABLEDEVICE DEVICE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION device int The device to be enabled DESCRIPTION Enables communications for the specified device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE
445. te Rate and Each File Holds properties For example with an update rate of 5 seconds and a number of samples of 360 each file will hold 5 x 360 60 30 minutes of data therefore following the MMDDhhmm csv filename format A new file will therefore be created every 30 minutes FILENAME FOR TRIGGERED SNAPSHOT DATA LOGGING Since triggered data logging does not follow an update rate you might think a file is created every time the number of samples specified 15 reached However this 1s not the case the same rules apply for triggered data logging filenames as for continuous data logging This means the Update Rate still has an influence on file creation As soon as a rising edge is detected by the log trigger a set of data is recorded and a new file is created if none exists Every time the log is triggered a new data set will be added to the file until it reaches the maximum time specified by the Update Rate x Number of samples For example with an update rate of 60 seconds and a number of samples of 1440 a new file will be created every 1440 x 60 3600 24 hours The number of samples per file will PAGE 240 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING THE LoGGING PROCESS most likely be different however each file will represent a fix length of time regardless of the number of samples THE LOGGING PROCESS Crimson s data logger operates using two separate processes The first samples each data poin
446. te Then Time Time Format 12 Hour Civil m AM Suffix cale Default Translate PM Suffix cale Default Translate Show Seconds ves m Date Format Locale Default Show Month as Digits x Show Year as 2 Digits x Label Text property is used to define an optional label for the primitive e The Field Type property is used to indicate whether the field should display the time the date or both In the last case this property also indicates in which order the two elements should be shown The Time Format property is used to indicate whether 12 hour civil or 24 hour military time format should be used As with other properties leaving this set to Locale Default will allow Crimson to pick a suitable format according to the language selected within the Master The AM Suffix and PM Suffix properties are used with 12 hour mode to indicate the text to be appended to the time field in the morning and afternoon as appropriate If you leave the property undefined Crimson will use a default The Show Seconds property is used to indicate whether the time field should include the seconds or whether it should just comprise hours and minutes The Date Format property is used to indicate the order in which the various date elements 1e date month and year should be displayed The Show Month property is used to indicate whether the month should be displayed as digits ie 01 through
447. the Ethernet port must have a gateway setting of 0 0 0 0 or it will take all the packets and leave none to activate the modem If Specific Network is selected you must provide the address and netmask that defines the network to which packets will be routed ADDING AN SMS CONNECTION SMS connections are used when text messaging functionality is required but where neither dial in nor dial out PPP connections will be established They are configured as described above except that the SMS via GSM Modem device should be selected for the required port The configuration options for this modem are shown below ID xi File view Link Help 5 2 Communications Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port SMS Modem Driver SMS GSM Modem Edit 0 R5 485 Comms Port Bat Ethernet Connection 7 Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Connect Using Y Protocol 3 Additional Init None Y Protocol 4 By Services Init String amp C1 amp D0BR 18508K0 Edta Mail Manager Tit OPC Server Time Manager Clear Port Settings The device properties are a subset of those provided for dial in connections SMS support is always enabled with this driver but once again note that in order for SMS messaging to operate properly you will also have to enable the SMS Transport using the Mail icon in the Communications window REVISION 6 PAGE 87 WORKING WIT
448. the Little Flexible Display will cover 128 x 16 pixels The Port points to the serial communication port number where the large display for this primitive will be connected Port numbers starts at one with the communication port The address is the large display node address this primitive will send the information to Please refer to the large display documentation to find the address required THE CAMERA PRIMITIVE The Camera Primitive is used to display the incoming image from a Banner PresencePlus series camera This primitive is used in combination with the Banner PresencePlus Camera Ethernet port driver This driver is selected in Communication More than one camera can be connected to the operator interface Properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cor Camera Properties Source Camera M Scale increase 2 1 m Fill Format Fill Style m Solid Color Fill Color 1 Fixed m Gray z Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed m Black 71 Pick Line Format Line Style solia Color Line Color w Fixed White Pick Display State Show Item General TRUE Edit Cancel Set As Defaults REVISION 6 PAGE 199 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The Camera property is used to select the camera the primitive will display the image from The Scale property defines the ratio the s
449. the alarm list If this column is omitted the primitive will take less space but it will be harder for the operator to determine the limits of the list PAGE 190 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS Show Alarm Time property is used to indicate whether or not the time at which the alarm occurred should be included in the primitive If the time is displayed the second tab is used to define the format to be used The No Active Alarms Text property is used to override the default text that is displayed when no alarms are present or to enter localized versions of this text on systems that support multiple languages The second tab of the properties is used to define the format of the alarm time cep Alarm Viewer Properties Surry Date Format ha Show Month 7 Shaw Years The properties are as defined for the time and date primitive REVISION 6 PAGE 191 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The third tab of the properties is used to control how the primitive s buttons are labeled cer Alarm Viewer Properties xj Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors Button Format Pick r Alarm Help Enable Help Button On Help lm r Button Labels PREV PREV Translate NET Translate MUTE me Translate ACCEPT age Translate
450. the first element and Array n 1 is the last element where n is equal to the value entered for this property Access and Storage properties are as described for flag variables e The Simulation property is as described for flag variables Note that the value to be simulated applies to all elements of the array If you need to simulate on a per element basis use a number of formulae to alias the array elements The Read Policy property is used to define how Crimson will read the data for arrays that are mapped to remote data items The table below lists the various policies that can be configured and describes their operation MODE DESCRIPTION Read Adaptively Any referenced array elements will be added to the communications scan Data either side of a referenced element as defined by the Read Ahead and Read Behind properties will be read as well Old data may be displayed momentarily when an element from an adaptive array is first displayed on the virtual HMI Read Manually The array will be read if and only if the ReadData function is called This mode is useful for items that are read only rarely or which are known not to change in the remote device Read Whole Array The entire array will be added to the communications scan if any element in the array is referenced This mode ensures that all data items are available before they are referenced but can lower system performance e The Read Ah
451. the message to indicate that he will deal with the problem the Master can optionally forward the reply to all the other engineers letting them know that someone has taken ownership of the issue A Master in a remote location is configured to accept incoming connections from a PC based at a central office Once the connection is made the Master s database can be remotely upgraded by instructing the Crimson configuration to download via the TCP IP link If so configured the Master s web server can be accessed so as to provide remote control facilities Best of all by installing virtual serial port software on the PC and by enabling port sharing on the Master a PLC programming package can be used to download to the programmable controller connected to the unit with the software thinking it is talking over a standard COM port e Master in a remote location is configured to accept incoming connections from a SCADA system located in a central office The SCADA package can use Modbus TCP IP to access gateway blocks within the Master thereby reading and writing data collected from devices connected to the its serial ports The SCADA package can also make direct contact with devices connected to the Master by means of the Master s IP routing capability There are obviously many other applications beyond these few examples REVISION 6 PAGE 83 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER ADDING A DIAL IN CONNECT
452. the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging FTP operations but it will tend to degrade performance slightly FTP SECURITY Since the FTP Server can provide full remote access to the CompactFlash card for security reasons it has to be protected with password access The Security Manager provides all the flexibility by creating independent users Each user are assigned specific rights Two are available for FTP Server access e Check Server Read Access to authorize a user to download files from the Master CompactFlash card e Check FTP Server Write Access to authorize a user to upload files to the Master CompactFlash card REVISION 6 PAGE 101 ALL ABOUT TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER kP Untitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 inl xl Fie Edt View User Link Heb 7 pr p User Details Real Name John Doe O Credentials Password Pen IV Override Existing System Rights Change Own Password Change Al Passwords IV FIP Server Read Access IV FIP Server Write Access Web Server Access Maintenance Access p Custom Rights User Right 1 User Right 2 User Right 3 User ight 4 User Right 5 User Right 6 User Right 7 User Right 8 OVER CAPS NUM ACCESSING THE SERVER To access an FTP server from a web browser type ftp 192 168 200 1 where 192 168 200 1 has
453. the terminal thereby deleting all data on the card You should thus ensure that the user is given appropriate warnings before this function is invoked FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE FormatCompactFlash PAGE 330 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE FTPGETFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE FTPGETFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION server int FTP connection number always 0 loc cstring Local file name on the CompactFlash card rem cstring Remote file name on the FTP server delete int If true the source will be deleted after the transfer otherwise it will remain on the source disk DESCRIPTION This function will transfer the defined file from the FTP server to the operator interface CompactFlash card It will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise The source and destination file name can be different The remote path is relative to the FTP server setting root path See Synchronization Manager for details FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success FtpGetFile 0 Recipes csv Recipes Rec001 csv 0 In this example the file Recipes csv will be transferred from the FTP server to the CompactFlash Card The original file will not be deleted from the PC server REVISION 6 PAGE 331 FTPPUTFILE SERVER LOC R
454. theses manually converting it to floating point Type casts may also be used to convert a floating point value to an integer value perhaps deliberately giving up some precision from an intermediate value before storing it in a PLC register For example the expression int cos Theta 100 will calculate the cosine of an angle multiply this value by 100 using floating point math and then convert it to an integer dropping any digits after the decimal place COMPARING VALUES You will quite often find that you wish to compare the value of one data with another and make a decision based on the result For example you may wish to define a flag formula to show when a tank exceeds a particular value or you may wish to use an i statement in a program to execute some code when a motor reaches its desired speed The following comparison operators are provided OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Equal To Group 7 Data 100 Not Equal To Group 7 Data 100 Greater Than Group 6 Data gt 100 Greater Than or Equal Group 6 Data 100 Less Than Group 6 Data 100 Less Than or Equal To Group 6 Data 100 Each operator produces a value of 0 or 1 depending on the condition it tests The operators can be used on integers floating point values or text strings If strings are compared the comparison is case insensitive ie is considered equal to TESTING BITS Crimson allow
455. this bit to a 1 edge triggered to reset the PV tare 0 or 1 bit R W total to 0 TareTot Write this bit to a 1 edge triggered to reset the input 1 0 or 1 bit R W tare total to 0 RstIn2TareTot Write this bit to a 1 edge triggered to reset the input 2 0 or 1 bit R W tare total to 0 OUTPUTS CYCLE TIMES DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS CycleTimel Cycle Time for Output 1 0 1 60 0 sec R W CycleTime2 Cycle Time for Output 2 0 1 60 0 sec R W CycleTime3 Cycle Time for Output 3 0 1 60 0 sec R W OUTPUTS REMOTE DATA DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS DigRemotel Digital Remote 1 Outputs assigned to Digital Remote 0 or 1 bit R W can be controlled by writing the DigRemote bit to a 1 or 0 DigRemote2 Digital Remote 2 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W DigRemote3 Digital Remote 3 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W DigRemote4 Digital Remote 4 See DigRemotel 0 or 1 bit R W AnlRemotel Analog Remote Value 1 Outputs assigned to Analog R W Remote can be controlled by writing a number to this word AnlRemote2 Analog Remote Value 2 See AnlRemotel R W AnlRemote3 Analog Remote Value 3 See AnlRemotel 2 R W AnlRemote4 Analog Remote Value 4 See AnlRemotel R W OUTPUTS I NFORMATION DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS OPIState State of Output 1 0 or 1 bit R OP2State State of Output 2 0 or 1 bit R OP
456. this line enabled THE SCALE PRIMITIVES 3 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Horizontal Scale primitive displays a scale with a specified number of minor and major divisions It is often used to label other primitives such as bar graphs The Vertical Scale primitive displays a scale with a specified number of minor and major divisions It is often used to label other primitives such as bar graphs The scale primitives can either be fix or adaptive the latest providing a new set of division if the maximum or minimum is changed The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cer Vertical Scale Properties Format Colors Tick Marks Style Orientation 15 Minor Divisions 2 Minimum v General jc Edit Maximum wv General Edit Counts per Major Division HZ Major Divi r Display State Show General TRUE Edit Cancel Set As Defaults The Style property defines if the scale should be fixed or adaptive If the second is selected the minimum and maximum are made available for tag mapping so the scale follows tags values The Orientation property 18 used to indicate the direction in which the tick marks should point Vertical scales support selections of left and right while horizontal scales support selections of up or down The Major Divisions property is used to indicate into how many major divis
457. to user input Several different button styles are provided including one that uses custom images from the software s image library REVISION 6 PAGE 203 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The properties of the general button are defined using four tabs The first of these tabs 15 shown below x Properties additional Images Action Button Options Label Translate Style Custom Images 2 Layout Label at Top Text Format Font swiss 12x16 Pick Foreground Fixed m Black Pick Set As Defaults The Label property is used to define the text to be shown on the button The Style property is used to define the style of button to be displayed STYLE DESCRIPTION Round A round button comprising two concentric circles Flat Rectangle A rectangular button comprising two nested rectangles 3D Rectangle A rectangular button drawn using 3D coloring effects 3D Rectangle with Bevel A rectangular button with more pronounced 3D effects Custom Images A button based upon two custom images The Layout property is used to indicate where if anywhere the label should be placed when using custom images to define the button s appearance The Text Format properties are used to define the label font and coloring PAGE 204 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE
458. to be replaced with your unit IP address CONFIGURING DATA TAGS For applications that require more than the ability to map data to and from Modular Controller modules Crimson offers the ability to create tags Note that this chapter is written on the assumption that you are configuring a Master to have a color virtual HMI If you are working with the Master configured to have a monochrome virtual HMI you will notice that tags do not have the Colors tab and that certain other facilities might not be present Features that are not supported on the mono version are marked with an asterisk ALL ABOUT TAGS Data Tags are named entities that represent data items within the Master Tags may be mapped to variables within the attached modules as well as to registers in remote devices and Crimson will automatically read the corresponding values when the tag is referenced or displayed Similarly if you change a mapped tag Crimson will automatically write the new value to the remote device TYPES OF TAGS When you first open the Data Tags window you will see that the right hand pane contains an apparently bewildering number of buttons that can be used to create different kinds of data tags While all these buttons may seem a little intimidating at first the fifteen different kinds of tag can be broken down into three families each containing five members PAGE 102 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING DATA TA
459. tocol settings that are acceptable to both the client and the server UP The connection is active and IP data can be exchanged HANGING UP The modem is disconnecting This state will exist for only a short time before the modem returns to IDLE The signal strength values returned by GSM modems have the following meaning VALUE SIGNAL STRENGTH 0 113dBm or less 1 111dBm 2 30 109dBm to 52dBm 2dBm steps 31 51dBm or greater 99 Signal strength cannot be determined Cell phones typically interpret these values as follows when displaying signal strength VALUE STRENGTH NUMBER or BARS 5 or less 103dBm or less One 6 thru 9 101dBm thru 95dBm Two 10 thru 14 93dBm thru 85dBm Three 15 or greater 83dBm or greater Four MODEM INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE The interface needs the following settings configured in the modem e Noecho Verbal result codes Normal carrier detect operation DTR override No Flow Control Modem must ignore RTS PAGE 90 http www redlion net controller ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS DSR override always on e Auto answer disabled e Escape character set to 43 decimal e 500 millisecond guard time for the escape code sequence The following sequence shows the init strings send to modems AT COMMAND STRING DESCRIPTION AT amp FEO set factory de
460. trace for each tag present in the data log Select the tag to get the corresponding color The color is changed via the drop down window More colors are available at the end of the list dar Data Logger Properties X Properties Pens zPen Color m Red v Set As Defaults REVISION 6 PAGE 201 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER The trend viewer primitive is similar but includes more pages The first page of the properties is shown below cer Trend Viewer Properties 7 Properties rime Pens Cursor Log Options Data Log Viewer Width mins 3 Show Channels General Edite Show Data No z r Label Format Label Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Label Color Fixed fo White Pick m Fill Format Fill Style m Solid Color z Fill Color 1 Fixed cray Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed m Black 71 Pick r Display State Show Item v General TRUE Cancel Set As Defaults e The Data Log property is used to select the data log to be displayed If you want the operator to be able to scroll backwards through historical data be sure to enable the log s history buffer Refer to the Data Logging chapter for details e The Viewer Width property is used to define the default amount of data to be shown when the primitive is first displayed Note that the operator can zoom in
461. ts are read See the hardware bulletin for more information regarding reading rates e The Thermocouple or RTD property model dependent is used to select the sensor standard being used e The Slope property can be used to change the ratio of the PV in relationship to the sensor reading This is useful in applications in which the sensor error is non linear See the application example below e The Offset property can be used to compensate or shift the PV value This setting allows customization of each input based on a given sensor s error It also allows correction of the PV value in applications in which the sensor isn t measuring the process directly thereby inducing an error See the application example below REVISION 6 PAGE 51 CSTC CSRTD TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE PROGRAMMING CRIMSON UsER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER APPLICATION EXAMPLE The PV reading from a thermocouple is 3 degrees lower than the actual temperature when the process 1s at 200 degrees It reads only 1 degree lower than the actual temperature when the process is at 300 degrees Desired PV PV x Slope Offset Slope 300 200 0 980 299 197 Offset 200 0 980 x 197 6 940 A Slope value of 0 980 and an Offset value of 6 940 corrects the sensor error AVAILABLE DATA The following are the data values available to the Master and therefore may be mapped to PLC registers INPUT STATUS DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE ACCESS PV1 8
462. u can enable C2 s unique remote access and control feature which allows a web browser to view the Master s virtual HMI and control its keyboard The web server can also be used to access CSV files from the Data Logger SECURITY MANAGER This icon is used to create and manage the various users of the panel as well as the access rights granted to them Real names may also be given which allows the security logger to record not only what data was changed and when but also by whom the data was changed The rights required to modify a particular tag or to access a page are set via the security properties of the individual item SELECTING THE MODULAR CONTROLLER When Crimson first starts it will assume that you are continuing to work with the same Red Lion device as was used by the last loaded database If Crimson has not been previously executed it will assume you are working with a G303 HMI To configure the Modular Controller select the New command from the File menu The following dialog will appear r Product Family Select Model 53 Series HMI CSMSTRSX Enhanced Master Modular Controller CSMSTRSX Enhanced Master Data Station PAX Panel Meters x Virtual HMI Virtual HMI Color 4 T P16 PID Controllers T P48 PID Controllers CUBS Series The dialog lists the devices supported by the current version of the software providing a description of each Selecting a device will creat
463. ual Acknowledge Manual mode 0 or 1 bit R AckTune Acknowledge auto tune request 0 or 1 bit R TuneDone Auto tune completed 0 or 1 bit R TuneFail Auto tune did not finish successfully 0 or 1 bit R Alarml Alarm 1 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm2 Alarm 2 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm3 Alarm 3 status 0 or 1 bit R Alarm4 Alarm 4 status 0 or 1 bit R HCMAlarmLo Heater Current Monitor low limit alarm 0 or 1 bit R HCMAlarmHi Heater Current Monitor high limit alarm 0 or 1 bit R InputAlarm Input out of range 0 or 1 bit R Dependent on selected sensor type PAGE 30 http www redlion net controller MODULE CONFIGURATION CSPID PID MODULE PROGRAMMING LOOP CONTROL DATA DESCRIPTION RANGE AccESS ReqSP Requested Setpoint The setpoint value written to the R W controller This value may be different than the Actual Setpoint in applications utilizing Setpoint Ramping Power Manual output power setting 200 00 R W SetHyst Setpoint Hysteresis for On Off Control R W SetDead Setpoint Deadband for On Off Control R W SetRamp Setpoint Ramp Rate R W InputFilter Input Filter 0 60 0 sec R W ReqManual Request Manual Write this bit to a 1 to invoke manual 0 or 1 bit R W mode In manual mode writing to the Power register controls the output power ReqTune Request auto tune Write this bit to a
464. unicate data to your PLC PC etc The ports are configured under the Communications window of the software Click the Edit button in the driver selection area to choose a protocol Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit View Link Help Da 2 Option Card Selection 0 Programming Port 48 RS 232 Comms Port Option Card Not Fitted Edt O 5 485 Comms Port n ZA Mal Manager Tit OPC Server Time Manager Joven cars NM In the example below Allen Bradley DF1 Master has been selected as the protocol By doing a device called has been created You should verify that the driver properties eg parity baud rate address etc make sense for your application E Untitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help Desa 4snnx s pr Driver Selection 49 Programming Port pa e eee XXI 9 40 RS 232 Comms Port DF1 Master Driver Allen Bradley 1 Master d 5 485 Comms Port Source Address 0 cc x Settings Mall Manager Tit OPC Server Time Manager Version 1 02 Version 1 00 Portz TOER cars NM MAPPING DATA To map data between the Modular Controller and an external device you ll need to create two so called Gateway Blocks one for moving module data into your device and one for getting module data from your device
465. ur control and that of Red Lion The use of an enterprise time source which accesses its own source via DNS is thus considered preferable REVISION 6 PAGE 97 CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP CLIENT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER TIME ZONE CONFIGURATION As mentioned above the CSMSTRSX must have knowledge of the current time zone if it is to use advanced time management This information can be given to the Master in two ways The simplest method is to use Send Time command on the Link menu of the Crimson configuration software In addition to setting the Master s clock this command also sends the PC s current time zone and the status of Daylight Savings Time The Master will store this data in non volatile memory and use it from that point forward Obviously you should be sure that the PC contains valid time and date information before sending it to the unit The alternative method is to use the system variables TimeZone and UseDST The former holds the number of hours by which the local time zone differs from UTC and may be either negative or positive For example a setting of 5 corresponds to Eastern Standard Time in the United States The latter contains either 0 or 1 depending on whether Daylight Savings Time is active Editing either of these variables via the user interface will result in the unit s clock changing to take account of the new settings For example enabling Daylight Savings Time will mo
466. urn on and turn off a multi tag As with all rich primitives most of the configuration data can be obtained from the underlying tag Each of these primitives displays a circular selector switch within the area used to define the primitive If the primitive is tall enough that the circular switch has sufficient space above it labels can be added to the primitive to allow the various states to be identified REVISION 6 PAGE 207 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Both primitives are configured using four tabbed pages the first of which is shown below 2 State Selector Properties q Properties additional Data Entry Format Data Source Value onoff Pick Data Entry r Switch Options Show States Yes Get From Tag DataFormat v Text Colors Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Foreground w Fixed Ia White Pick Background w Fixed Wi cray Pick Cancel Set As Defaults The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for a multi state selector primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression The
467. us properties Note that a change made via this mechanism will change all the primitives controlled by that tag if those primitives are configured to obtain their configuration from that source THE MULTI LINE TEXT PRIMITIVES The Multi Line Status Text primitive 1s used to display an on off value but split over several lines This allows larger amounts of text to be shown perhaps to provide prompts or help information to the operator The Multi Line Multi Text primitive is used to display one of a series of text values but split over several lines This allows larger amounts of text to be shown perhaps to provide prompts or help information to the operator Each of these primitives is as the associated single line primitive except that they do not support data entry The text string to be displayed is broken into lines by the inclusion of vertical bar characters wherever a line break is required THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE The Time and Date primitive is used to display the current time and date or to display the contents of a time and date expression It can also be used to edit such an expression or to set the Master s real time clock The properties of a time and date primitive are displayed using three tabbed pages The first page is shown below cer Time and Date Properties X Properties Data Entry Format Source Value 1 Current Time Edit DataEntr
468. ust obviously be set such that it is much less than the sampling rate times the number of samples in a file times the number of log files to be retained If this constraint is met the directory on the PC will accumulate copies of all the log files from the Master NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Logs within Crimson record the time and date of each sample and do not need to store the empty values used by Edict to mark power down periods When Master module is powered down this will show simply as a gap in the log files REVISION 6 PAGE 243 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER WEB SERVER PROPERTIES CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER Crimson s web server can be used to expose various data via the Master module s Ethernet port allowing remote access to diagnostic information or to the values recorded by the Data Logger The web server is configured by selecting the Web Server icon from the main screen WEB SERVER PROPERTIES The web server has the following properties E Untitled File G306 Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY 2 e Control Server State z Listen on Port 1denkfication 63 web ser Features Data Log Access Custom Ste Remote Viewing Remote Control Remote Refresh Target device memory usage is 2K F CAPS NUM e The Se
469. value Just as with tag text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages is shown below Vertical Bar Graph Properties xj Properties Additional Format Source Value Default Edit r Graph Options Show Label Yes E Show Value Yes h Flash on Alarm No v Value Background opaque he Show Setpoint No M Get From Tag Field Label Data Format v Text Colors Set As Defaults Value property is used to define the value to be displayed PAGE 186 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Show Label property is used to indicate whether a label should be included with the bar graph For vertical graphs the label is included at the bottom for horizontal graphs it is included at the left hand side If a tag is used for the value property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise it must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the graph itself If a tag of the appropriate data type is used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label it must be entered on the Format tab e The Show Setpoint property is used to indicate whether tick marks shou
470. ve RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE FreeMemory GetDiskFreePercent 0 PAGE 338 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE GETDISKSIZEBYTES DRIVE GETDISKSIZEBYTES DRIVE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION drive int The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the size in bytes of the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactFlash access is necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE CFSyze GetDiskSyzeBytes 0 REVISION 6 PAGE 339 GETFORMATTEDTAG INDEX CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER GETFORMATTEDTAG ZINDEX ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number DESCRIPTION Returns a string representing the formatted value of the tag specified by index The string returned follows the format programmed on the targeted tag For example a flag will show On or Off a multi variable will show the text corresponding to the value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function works with any type of tags FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Value GetFormattedTag 10 Returns the value of the t
471. ve allows an expression to be drawn as a horizontal bar graph between specified limits Additional properties allow the primitive s fill color and border style be defined PAGE 172 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive Control dar Simple Vertical Bar Properties pat 0004 Minimum General o Edit Maximum General 100 Edit Value Fill Format Fillstyle 2 Fill Color 1 Fixed Wey H Pike Fill Color 2 Fixed Meek d Pike Line Format Line Style Line Color Fixed Owe 5 Pike OK Cancel Set As Defaults The Value property is used to specify the value to be displayed In the example given above the primitive is configured to display the level of a tank The Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the range of values to be shown In the example above a range of 0 to 100 is specified The Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled area of the bar is drawn in the pattern and colors indicated while the unfilled area is drawn with solid Fill Color 2 The Line Format properties are used to define the border for the primitive PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS THE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES ul The Vertical Bar Graph primitive displays a set of va
472. ve occurred When a device is in the offline state it will be polled periodically to see if has returned online FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Okay IsDeviceOnline 1 PAGE 362 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE ISWRITEQUEUEEMPTY DEV ISWRITEQUEUEEMPTY DEV ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION dev int The device number to get the queue state from DESCRIPTION Returns the state of the writes queue for the device identified with the argument dev The function will return true if the queue is empty false otherwise Note The device number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when a device is selected in Communication FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE QueueEmpty IsWriteQueueEmpty 1 In this example the function returns the write queue stat for devicel REVISION 6 PAGE 363 LEFT STRING COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER LEFT STRING COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION string cstring The string to be processed count int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns the first count characters from string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE AreaCode Left Phone 3 PAGE 364 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE LEN STRING LEN STRING ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRI
473. ve the clock forward one hour while disabling it will move it back A typical database will only need to expose for editing by the user and even this may not be necessary if the Linked DST facility described above is in use CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP CLIENT Crimson s synchronization manager can be used to exchange files between the Master and a server Therefore log files can be synchronized on a server computer either automatically or on demand The synchronization manager is configured in the Sync Manager icon under Services in the Communications window The communication standard used for the exchange is FTP FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol It is used on TCP IP networks to exchange files between devices An exchange is always made in a client server way i e a client connects to a server to access information by uploading transfer to the server or downloading transfer from the server files The Master FTP support is a client and therefore has to connect to a server for the function to work Numerous FTP servers are available on the market some free others at a charge Windows IIS is an example of an FTP server embedded in the OS SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER SETTINGS Enabling the Sync Manager activates the FTP support The different settings necessary to connect to an FTP server are then available PAGE 98 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP
474. ws the Format tab for an integer text primitive dar Integer Text Properties Properties Data Entry Format r Data Label Label Text Translate Data Limits Minimum Value General lE it Maximum Value General INN it Format Number Base Decima v Sign Made unsigned Digits Before DP s Digits After DP 0 Leading Zeros ves E Group Digits No m Prefix None Translate Suffix None Translate Cancel Set As Defaults As can be seen the properties shown are indeed identical to those shown on the Format tab of an integer tag As mentioned above the properties for the other types of primitive are similarly identical to those of the corresponding tag You are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual regarding Data Tags for more information on each property EDITING THE UNDERLYING TAG If you want to edit a tag text primitive s properties either double click on the primitive or right click and select the Properties command from the resulting menu If however you want to edit the properties of the tag that is being used to control the primitive right click and select the Tag Details command instead The resulting dialog box will show the Data Format REVISION 6 PAGE 183 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER and Colors tabs from the Tags window and allow you to change the vario
475. ww redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DisPOFF DisPOFF ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION none float Turns backlight to display off DESCRIPTION Turns backlight to display off FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE DispOff REVISION 6 PAGE 317 DisPON CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER 5 ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION none Turns backlight to display on DESCRIPTION Turns backlight to display on FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE DispOn PAGE 318 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION DATA OR VALUE DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION DATA OR VALUE ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION port int The index of the driver to be controlled function int The required function to be executed data cstring Any parameter for the function DESCRIPTION This function is used to perform a special operation on a communications driver The number to be placed in the port argument to identify the driver is the port number to which the driver is bound The specific action to be performed is indicated by the unction parameter the values of which will depend upon the driver itself The data parameter may be used to pass addition information to the driver Most drivers do no
476. x On Update r Links Page Timeout Parent Page None X Period 0 secs Next Page None X On Timeout None Previous Page m OK Each page has a number of properties that can be accessed via the Page menu The Entry Order property is used to define how the cursor on the virtual HMI will move between data entry fields The setting determines whether fields organized in a grid will be entered in row or column order The Popup Location property is used to define the location of popup windows or the popup keypad when this display page is visible You may wish to adjust this property to keep the popups away from important data items The Update Rate property is used to define how frequently items on the display are updated As update rates increase in frequency overall communications performance of the virtual HMI may decrease This selection should be left at the default setting when possible The Background property is used to define the background color of the display page Note that the background cannot be animated as a change in the color would force the whole page to redraw thereby impairing performance The On Select and On Remove properties are used to define actions to be performed when the page is first selected for display or when the page is removed from the display Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions Refer to the D
477. y Flash on Alarm Show Label ves Y Get From Tag Field Label Data Format Text Colors Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Foreground w Fixed I white Pick Background Fixed m Gray Pick Justification Horizontal center 71 Vertical Midde Set As Defaults e Value property is used to indicate the time and date value to be displayed If no value is entered the current time and date is shown If an expression is entered it is taken to represent the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 PAGE 184 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS January 1997 Such values are typically obtained using the various time and date functions described in the Function Reference e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the virtual HMI to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual HMI facility of the web server If no value property has been defined this amounts to changing the current time or date If a value property has been entered the expression entered must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted e The balance of the properties are as described for tag text primitives While it may l
478. y selecting the Virtual Serial Port driver Then share the port as described above This Virtual Serial Port driver performs no communications activity of its own but still allows it to be shared for remote access LIMITATIONS Note that some PLC programming packages may not work with virtually or physically shared ports Issues to watch out for are tight timeouts that do not allow the Master time to relay the data to the PLC a reliance on sending break signals or on the manipulation of hardware handshaking lines or DOS style port access such that the package cannot see the virtual serial ports Luckily these issues are rare and most packages will happily communicate as if they were directly connected to the PLC in question USING ELECTRONIC MAIL Crimson can be configured to send email messages when alarm conditions are present or when notifications need to be provided of other events within the system The methods used to deliver email are configured via the Mail icon in the Communications window Untitled File CSMSTRSK Crimson 2 0 Edit Link Help oea 7 es 0 Addresses sms smtp General ov cars NM The properties on the General tab are used to enable or disable the mail manager and to provide a name for the Master This name will be used within email messages to identify the originator of the message Applications will typically use the name of the machine to which t
479. y have to use this function as Crimson will prompt for credentials when any action that requires security clearance is performed FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE UserLogOn REVISION 6 PAGE 431 WAITDATA DATA COUNT TIME CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER WAITDATA DATA COUNT TIME ARGUMENT TvPE DESCRIPTION data any First array element to be read count int Number of elements to be read time int The timeout period in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Requests that count elements from array element data onwards to read on the next comms scan This function is used with arrays that have been mapped to external data and which have their read policy set to Read Manually Unlike ReadData the function waits for up to the time specified by the time parameter in order to allow the data to be read The return value is one if read completed within that period or zero otherwise FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE status WaitData arrayl 8 10 1000 PAGE 432 http www redlion net controller FUNCTION REFERENCE WRITEFILE FILE TEXT WRITEFILE FILE TEXT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as required by OpenFile Text cstring Text to be written to file DESCRIPTION Writes a string up to 512 characters in length to the spe
480. y running a program with Data as argument A program has to be created first and set up to accept an integer argument as show in the image below File Edit View Program Link Help 2 lt 2 Programming Program1 x BB Programs Programi cerEdit Arguments xj Arguments Type Name Argument 1 Integer fart 0 Arument2 foe Argument 3 notus st fes Argument 4 NotUsed Edit Aro Argument 5 Mot Used Edt Jaros Options Return Type 1 Edit Run In Backaround External Data Read When Referenced Data Timeouts 1 30 0 secs Arguments 1 void Programi int OVER caes NUM Now the OnHelp field is ready to accept the following code This tells the viewer to run Program1 with the information provided in Data when the Help button is pressed Programi Data PAGE 194 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING THE COLOR VIRTUAL HMI PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The last step is then to write the program so the proper information 18 displayed depending on the alarm selected The code sample below illustrates an example with 2 tags and different alarm numbers When the program is called Data is transferred in Argl int Alarm Argl gt gt 16 Local integer assigned with alarm number int Tag Argl amp OxFFFF Local integer assigned with tag
481. y to Masters configured with a color virtual HMI If you are configuring the Master to have a monochrome virtual HMI please refer to the previous chapter for configuration details CONTROLLING THE VIEW By default the User Interface window attempts to show the entire front panel of the virtual HMI including the display and all the available keys In many cases this will not allocate enough screen space for the display to be edited so you will probably want to use one of the other zoom levels as shown below MAIN MENU MAIN MENU ae ues n As you can see at each level fewer keys are shown and more of the window is allocated to the display itself The panel view level can be controlled from the View gt Panel menu or by using the panel icon Ii or by pressing the Alt key together with the digits 1 through 4 ZOOM FUNCTION In addition to the panel views a zoom is available to help graphic designs Zooming in and out can be achieved from the View gt Zoom menu or by using the magnifying glass icon 27 or by rolling your mouse wheel up or down The Zoom will center on the mouse cursor so you can control which area of the screen you are zooming to There are four levels of zoom The highest level would give the following screen for the above database REVISION 6 PAGE 157 USING THE PAGE LIST CRIMSON USER MANUAL MODULAR CONTROLLER Due to screen resolution an
482. ys mode but the program will execute whether or not the data has been read successfully The operator will PAGE 226 http www redlion net controller CONFIGURING PROGRAMS ADDING COMMENTS MODE BEHAVIOR therefore never see the NOT READY message but if a device is offline there is no guarantee that the program s data items contain valid data e The Arguments property is used to specify up to five arguments that can be passed into the program Each argument has a name and a data type as specified by the dialog box that is displayed when the Edit button is pressed lt 9 Arguments Arguments Type Name Argument 1 integer 0 Argument 2 mes 00 Edit Argument 3 NotUsed 0 00 Edt acs Argument 4 Not Used rg Argument 5 wtusd ds acs OK Cancel e Passing arguments to programs is described in more detail below ADDING COMMENTS You can add comments to your programs in two ways Firstly you can use the sequence to introduce a comment which will continue for the rest of the current line Secondly you can use the sequence to introduce a single or multi line comment This comment will continue until the sequence appears The sample below shows both commenting styles This is a single line comment This is line 1 of the comment This is line 2 of the comment This is line 3 of the comment

Crimson 2 User Manual Modular Controller PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents